Category: Citrix ADC 13

Self-Service Password Reset (SSPR) – Citrix ADC

Last Modified: Dec 28, 2020 @ 5:49 am

33 Comments

Navigation

SSPR Flow

The SSPR feature in Citrix ADC is completely unrelated to the SSPR in Citrix StoreFront. They are separate registrations.

  • ADC SSPR registration is stored in an Active Directory user attribute.

SSPR is available in Citrix ADC 12.1 build 51.16 and higher.

SSPR requires nFactor, which is only available in Citrix ADC Advanced Edition and Premium Edition. You can use nFactor with Citrix Gateway.

The first factor is a Login Schema that has an optional Forgot Password link. The Login Schema file named SingleAuthPasswordResetRem.xml has this link. There are other built-in Login Schemas for Username Only and Dual Auth that also have the link.

If the user logs in normally, then ADC checks if the user has been enrolled in SSPR or not. If not enrolled, then the user is prompted to select questions and provide answers. This is a custom Login Schema that you can create from the ADC GUI as described later.

If the user clicks the Forgot Password link, then the user is prompted to answer two of the previously enrolled questions.

  • Optionally, the user might be prompted to retrieve a One-time password (OTP) sent to an Alternate Email address. The user might not have access to corporate email, so the OTP should be sent to the user’s personal email address. The user enters the alternate email address during SSPR registration.

  • Finally, the user is prompted to enter a new password.

Here’s what a sample SSPR nFactor configuration looks like:

# ** nFactor Visualizer 
# ** ------------------ 
# ** AAA vserver: AAA-SSPR
# **    Login Schema Policy = lschema_password_reset
# **       Priority = 20
# **       Rule = true
# **       Login Schema XML = "/nsconfig/loginschema/LoginSchema/SingleAuthPasswordResetRem.xml"
# **    Adv Authn Policy = LDAP_Password_Reset
# **       Priority = 10
# **       Rule = "aaa.LOGIN.VALUE(\"passwdreset\").EQ(\"1\")"
# **       Action = ldapAction named LDAP-Corp_NoAuth
# **       Goto if failed = NEXT
# **       Next Factor if Success = kba_validation
# **          Login Schema Profile = LSCHEMA_INT
# **          Adv Authn Policy = kba_validation
# **             Priority = 10
# **             Rule = true
# **             Action = ldapAction named LDAP-Corp_NoAuth
# **             Goto if failed = NEXT
# **             Next Factor if Success = email_validation
# **                Login Schema Profile = LSCHEMA_INT
# **                Adv Authn Policy = email_validation
# **                   Priority = 10
# **                   Rule = true
# **                   Action = emailAction named EmailOTP
# **                   Goto if failed = NEXT
# **                   Next Factor if Success = password_reset
# **                      Login Schema Profile = LSCHEMA_INT
# **                      Adv Authn Policy = LDAP-Corp-Adv_NoAuth
# **                         Priority = 100
# **                         Rule = true
# **                         Action = ldapAction named LDAP-Corp_NoAuth
# **                         Goto if failed = NEXT
# **    Adv Authn Policy = LDAP-Corp-Adv
# **       Priority = 20
# **       Rule = true
# **       Action = ldapAction named LDAP-Corp
# **       Goto if failed = NEXT
# **       Next Factor if Success = check_for_sspr_registration
# **          Login Schema Profile = LSCHEMA_INT
# **          Adv Authn Policy = switch_to_kba_register
# **             Priority = 1
# **             Rule = "AAA.USER.ATTRIBUTE(\"kba_registered\").EQ(\"0\")"
# **             Action = NO_AUTHN
# **             Goto if failed = NEXT
# **             Next Factor if Success = kba_registration
# **                Login Schema Profile = lschema_KBARegistration
# **                Adv Authn Policy = first_time_login_forced_kba_registration
# **                   Priority = 1
# **                   Rule = true
# **                   Action = ldapAction named LDAP-Corp
# **                   Goto if failed = NEXT
# **          Adv Authn Policy = NoAuth
# **             Priority = 100
# **             Rule = true
# **             Action = NO_AUTHN
# **             Goto if failed = END

Active Directory User Attribute

Citrix ADC SSPR stores its configuration in an Active Directory User attribute.

The attribute must be dedicated to SSPR. You can’t use the same attribute that you might already be using for Citrix ADC One-time passwords (OTP).

  • In Active Directory Users and Computers, enable Advanced Features mode (from the View menu), double-click a user, switch to the Attribute Editor tab, and find a String attribute that is not being used. When you double-click an attribute, look for String in the window title.
  • Open the Active Directory Schema console. Under Attributes, find your candidate attribute and double-click it. Make sure the Maximum length is high (e.g. 32767). The extensionAttributes default to 1024 or 2048, which is not long enough.
  • You might want to uncheck the bottom boxes (e.g. Attribute is copied when duplicating a user) since each user has their own SSPR configuration.
  • ADC needs permissions to set this Attribute and reset user passwords. You can use the Delegate Control wizard to grant these permissions.

    1. Consider creating a group for SSPR Admins and delegating permissions to that group. You can add your LDAP Bind Account and your Service Desk accounts to this group.
    2. In the Tasks to Delegate page, change it to Create a custom task to delegate and click Next.
    3. In the Active Directory Object Type page, change the selection to Only the following objects in this folder and select User objects. Click Next.
    4. In the Permissions page, on the top of the page, check the box for Property-specific.
    5. In the Permissions list, check the box next to Reset password. Scroll down.
    6. Find the attribute you are using for SSPR and check the Read and Write boxes. Click Next.

Help Desk will need to be trained to reset a user’s SSPR registration by double-clicking the attribute and clicking the Clear button. The next time the user logs in, the user will be prompted to enroll for SSPR again.

ADC uses a certificate to encrypt the contents of the Attribute. It currently is not possible to configure the certificate from the GUI, so you’ll need to SSH to the ADC and run the following command. The certificate should already be installed on the ADC.

bind vpn global -userDataEncryptionKey MyCertificate

The ADC SSPR configuration needs two LDAP Policy/Servers: one with authentication enabled, and one without authentication. In both LDAP Servers, in the Other Settings section, enter the Attribute name into the Alternate Email field and in the KB Attribute field. The same attribute can be used for both. However, you cannot use the same attribute for the OTP Secret field.

SSPR KBA Registration Login Schema

When creating the KBA Registration Login Schema you will be prompted to choose from a list of questions. This list is configured in the file KBQuestions.json located in /nsconfig/loginschema/LoginSchema.

  1. In ADC GUI, on the left, expand Security, expand AAA – Application Traffic, and click Login Schema.
  2. On the right, switch to the Profiles tab.
  3. On the right, click the button labelled Add KBA Registration Login Schema.
  4. Give the new Schema a name. ADC will create a file with the same name.
  5. Configure at least two questions. Move questions from the left to the right. Note: the XML file that it creates has size limits so don’t choose too many questions.
  6. On the right, you can optionally change the labels for Question Field and Answer Field. If you don’t enter anything, then the labels are Question, and Answer, as shown earlier in this article. Scroll down.
  7. Near the bottom are two More links you can click.
  8. The first More link lets you allow users to enter their own questions.
  9. The second More link lets you enable Register Alternate Email.
  10. Click Create when done.
  11. ADC creates a file in /nsconfig/loginschema/LoginSchema that matches the Schema name you entered earlier.
  12. ADC also adds a Login Schema Profile with the same name you entered earlier.

LDAP Servers

You’ll need two LDAP Servers: one with Authentication enabled, and the other with Authentication unchecked. Other than the Authentication checkbox, they are identical. Configure them like normal LDAP Servers.

The NoAuth server has Authentication unchecked.

Configure both LDAP Servers with the SSPR attribute as detailed earlier.

Email Action and Policy

You can optionally configure an Email action to send the user a OTP before allowing the password reset.

  1. In the ADC GUI, the easy way to find Email Actions is to enter “email” in the top left search box.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. Give the Email Action a name.
  4. In the Username box, enter the From email address. The emails will look like they come from this address.
  5. Enter the SMTP password for this From address.
  6. In the Server URL box, enter a smtps URL with port number similar to smtps://mail01.corp.com:587. Gmail’s URL smtps://smtp-relay.gmail.com:587 also works.
  7. In the Content box, enter a string containing $code. ADC replaces $code with the OTP.
  8. In the Type box, enter SMTP.
  9. In the Email Address box, enter aaa.user.attribute("alternate_mail"). This expression pulls the destination email address from Alternate Email attribute you defined in your LDAP Server.
  10. Click Create.
  11. It does not appear to be possible to use the ADC GUI to create an Email Authentication Policy. SSH to your ADC and run something similar to the following command: 
    add authentication Policy email_validation -rule true -action EmailOTP

SSPR nFactor Configuration

AAA vServer and Login Schema

The first factor will be a Login Schema that has the Reset Password link. This section creates the following portion of the nFactor configuration:

# ** AAA vserver: AAA-SSPR
# **    Login Schema Policy = lschema_password_reset
# **       Priority = 20
# **       Rule = true
# **       Login Schema XML = "/nsconfig/loginschema/LoginSchema/SingleAuthPasswordResetRem.xml"

Do the following:

  1. Create a AAA vServer.
  2. It can be Non Addressable.
  3. Optionally bind a certificate to the AAA vServer so its status will be Green instead of Red.
  4. On the right, in the Advanced Settings column, click Login Schemas to move it to the left.
  5. On the left, in the Login Schemas section, click where it says No Login Schema.
  6. Next to the Select Policy field, click Add to create a new Login Schema Policy.
  7. Give the Login Schema Policy a name to indicate that this Login Schema includes a link for Self-Service Password Reset.
  8. Next to Profile, click Add to create a new Login Schema Profile.
  9. Give the Login Schema Profile a name.
  10. In the Authentication Schema field, click the edit icon.
  11. In the Login Schema Files section, click the LoginSchema folder.
  12. Highlight one of the PasswordReset files (e.g. SingleAuthPasswordResetRem.xml) and then click the blue Select button on the top right. You can also optionally modify the built-in files.
  13. The Create Authentication Login Schema window collapses and the Authentication Schema field shows the selected file. Click Create when done.
  14. Click Create to finish creating the Authentication Login Schema Policy.
  15. Click Bind to bind the Login Schema Policy to the AAA vServer.

SSPR Registration

Let’s start with the SSPR Registration flow. This section creates the following snippet of the full nFactor configuration:

# ** AAA vserver: AAA-SSPR
# **    Login Schema Policy = lschema_password_reset
# **       Priority = 20
# **       Rule = true
# **       Login Schema XML = "/nsconfig/loginschema/LoginSchema/SingleAuthPasswordResetRem.xml"
# **    Adv Authn Policy = LDAP-Corp-Adv
# **       Priority = 20
# **       Rule = true
# **       Action = ldapAction named LDAP-Corp
# **       Goto if failed = NEXT
# **       Next Factor if Success = check_for_sspr_registration
# **          Login Schema Profile = LSCHEMA_INT
# **          Adv Authn Policy = switch_to_kba_register
# **             Priority = 1
# **             Rule = "AAA.USER.ATTRIBUTE(\"kba_registered\").EQ(\"0\")"
# **             Action = NO_AUTHN
# **             Goto if failed = NEXT
# **             Next Factor if Success = kba_registration
# **                Login Schema Profile = lschema_KBARegistration
# **                Adv Authn Policy = first_time_login_forced_kba_registration
# **                   Priority = 1
# **                   Rule = true
# **                   Action = ldapAction named LDAP-Corp
# **                   Goto if failed = NEXT
# **          Adv Authn Policy = NoAuth
# **             Priority = 100
# **             Rule = true
# **             Action = NO_AUTHN
# **             Goto if failed = END

Do the following:

  1. In the AAA vServer, scroll down to the Advanced Authentication Policies section and click where it says No Authentication Policy.
  2. In the Select Policy field, select your normal LDAP policy. The Login Schema collects username and password and verifies it with the LDAP Policy that you select here.
  3. Change the Priority to 20 or similar. This binding must be a higher number than the Password Reset flow that we configure later.
  4. Next to the Select Next Factor field, click Add to create a Policy Label which will check if the user is registered or not.
  5. Name the Policy Label to indicate that this Policy Label checks if the user is registered or not.
  6. Leave the Login Schema set to LSCHEMA_INT (i.e. no schema), and click Continue.
  7. Next to the Select Policy field, click Add to create an Authentication Policy.
  8. Name this Authentication Policy to indicate that it does nothing more than check if the user is registered or not.
  9. In the Expression field, enter the following expression: 
    AAA.USER.ATTRIBUTE("kba_registered").EQ("0")
  10. Click Create.
  11. Back in the Policy Label Policy Binding window, next to the Select Next Factor field, click Add to create another Policy Label.
  12. Name the Policy Label to indicate that this factor performs the SSPR Registration (i.e. Knowledge-Based Authentication registration).
  13. In the Login Schema field, select the KBA Registration Login Schema that you created earlier.
  14. Click Continue.
  15. Next to the Select Policy field, click Add to create an Authentication Policy.
  16. Name the Authentication Policy to indicate that ADC uses this LDAP Server to store the KBA registration information in the Active Directory User attribute.
  17. Change Action Type to LDAP.
  18. Change Action to your normal authenticating LDAP Server that has the KB Attribute defined.
  19. For Expression, enter true.
  20. Click Create.
  21. Back in the Policy Label Policy Binding page, click Bind.
  22. Click Done to finish creating the Policy Label for KBA Registration.
  23. Back in the “Check for SSPR Registration” Policy Label Policy Binding page, click Bind.
  24. To handle users that are already registered, click Add Binding.
  25. Next to the Select Policy field, click Add to create an Authentication Policy.
  26. Name the Policy to indicate that no authentication is occurring. This policy always returns true and is necessary to avoid errors for users that are already registered.
  27. Change Action Type to NO_AUTHN.
  28. In the Expression box, enter true.
  29. Click Create.
  30. Back in the Policy Label Policy Binding screen, click Bind.
  31. Click Done to close the “Check for SSPR Registration” Policy Label.
  32. Click Bind to bind the LDAP Policy and “Check for SSPR Registration” factor to the AAA vServer.

Password Reset

This section creates the following snippet of the full nFactor configuration:

# ** AAA vserver: AAA-SSPR
# **    Login Schema Policy = lschema_password_reset
# **       Priority = 20
# **       Rule = true
# **       Login Schema XML = "/nsconfig/loginschema/LoginSchema/SingleAuthPasswordResetRem.xml"
# **    Adv Authn Policy = LDAP_Password_Reset
# **       Priority = 10
# **       Rule = "aaa.LOGIN.VALUE(\"passwdreset\").EQ(\"1\")"
# **       Action = ldapAction named LDAP-Corp_NoAuth
# **       Goto if failed = NEXT
# **       Next Factor if Success = kba_validation
# **          Login Schema Profile = LSCHEMA_INT
# **          Adv Authn Policy = kba_validation
# **             Priority = 10
# **             Rule = true
# **             Action = ldapAction named LDAP-Corp_NoAuth
# **             Goto if failed = NEXT
# **             Next Factor if Success = email_validation
# **                Login Schema Profile = LSCHEMA_INT
# **                Adv Authn Policy = email_validation
# **                   Priority = 10
# **                   Rule = true
# **                   Action = emailAction named EmailOTP
# **                   Goto if failed = NEXT
# **                   Next Factor if Success = password_reset
# **                      Login Schema Profile = LSCHEMA_INT
# **                      Adv Authn Policy = LDAP-Corp-Adv_NoAuth
# **                         Priority = 100
# **                         Rule = true
# **                         Action = ldapAction named LDAP-Corp_NoAuth
# **                         Goto if failed = NEXT

Do the following to create the Password Reset flow:

  1. In the AAA vServer, in the Advanced Authentication Policies section, click where it says 1 Authentication Policy
  2. Note the Priority number of the existing binding. Our new binding will need a lower priority number so it is evaluated first. Click Add Binding.
  3. Next to the Select Policy field, click Add to create an Authentication Policy.
  4. Name the Authentication Policy to indicate that this policy only applies if the user clicked the Forgot Password link in the Login Schema.
  5. Change Action Type to LDAP.
  6. Change Action to the your LDAP Server that has Authentication unchecked (i.e. not enabled).
  7. In the Expression box, enter the following expression that returns true if the user clicked the link: 
    aaa.LOGIN.VALUE("passwdreset").EQ("1")
  8. Click Create.
  9. Back in the Policy Binding page, change the Priority to a number that is lower than the existing Policy Binding.
  10. Next to the Select Next Factor field, click Add to create a Policy Label (i.e. factor)
  11. Name the Policy Label to indicate that this factor will verify the user’s questions and answers.
  12. Leave the Login Schema set to the default LSCHEMA_INT (i.e. no schema) and click Continue.
  13. Next to the Select Policy field, click Add to create an Authentication Policy.
  14. Name the Authentication Policy to indicate that this policy verifies the user’s KBA questions and answers.
  15. Change Action Type to LDAP.
  16. Change Action to your LDAP Server that does not require authentication.
  17. In the Expression box, enter true.
  18. Click Create.
  19. Back in the Policy Label Policy Binding page, if you wish to add email validation, then next to Select Next Factor, click Add to create another Policy Label (factor).
  20. Name the Policy Label to indicate that this factor will perform Email OTP verification.
  21. Leave the Login Schema set to the default LSCHEMA_INT (i.e. no schema) and click Add.
  22. In the Policy Label Policy Binding section, click where it says Click to select.
  23. Click the small circle next to the email policy that you created earlier from the ADC’s command line. It’s not possible to use the GUI to create the email policy.
  24. At the top of the screen, click the blue Select button.
  25. Back in the Policy Label Policy Binding screen, next to the Select Next Factor field, click Add to create another Policy Label (i.e. factor).
  26. Name this Policy Label to indicate that this factor performs the password reset.
  27. Leave the Login Schema set to the default LSCHEMA_INT (i.e. no schema) and click Continue.
  28. In the Policy Label Policy Binding section, next to the Select Policy field, click Add to create an Authentication Policy.
  29. Name the Authentication Policy to indicate that this is your LDAP Policy that has Authentication unchecked (not enabled).
  30. Change Action Type to LDAP.
  31. Change Action to your LDAP Server that has Authentication unchecked.
  32. In the Expression field, enter true.
  33. Click Create.
  34. That’s it for the AAA configuration. Now click Bind and Done several times to return to the AAA vServer.






  35. Click Close to finish the AAA vServer’s Authentication Policy bindings.

Bind to Citrix Gateway

If you are using nFactor configuration with Citrix Gateway, then configure the Authentication Profile like normal.

  1. Go to Citrix Gateway > Virtual Servers and edit a Gateway.
  2. On the right, in the Advanced Settings column, click Authentication Profile to move it to the left.
  3. On the left, in the Authentication Profile section, click Add.
  4. Name the Authentication Profile to indicate that this nFactor Flow does Self-Service Password Reset.
  5. In the Authentication Virtual Server field, click where it says Click to select.
  6. Click the small circle next to the AAA vServer that is configured with your SSPR flow.
  7. At the top of the page, click the blue Select button.
  8. Click Create.
  9. Click OK to select the Authentication Profile.

CLI Commands

Here’s a full sample ADC CLI configuration:

# Certs
# -----
add ssl certKey WildcardCorpCom.cer_CERT_KE_ic1 -cert WildcardCorpCom.cer_ic1 -passcrypt b217e266 -encrypted -encryptmethod ENCMTHD_3

add ssl certKey WildcardCorpCom.cer_CERT_KEY -cert WildcardCorpCom.pfx -key WildcardCorpCom.pfx -inform PFX -passcrypt 52e54af -encrypted -encryptmethod ENCMTHD_3 -expiryMonitor DISABLED

add ssl certKey CorpIntermediate -cert CorpIntermediate.cer -inform DER -passcrypt cc9675 -encrypted -encryptmethod ENCMTHD_3 -expiryMonitor DISABLED

# Cert Links
# ----------
link ssl certKey WildcardCorpCom.cer_CERT_KEY CorpIntermediate

link ssl certKey CorpIntermediate WildcardCorpCom.cer_CERT_KE_ic1


# AAA Global Settings
# -------------------
enable ns feature AAA


# LDAP Actions
# ------------
add authentication ldapAction LDAP-Corp -serverIP 10.2.2.11 -serverPort 636 -ldapBase "dc=corp,dc=local" -ldapBindDn ctxsvc@corp.local -ldapBindDnPassword 868d22c -encrypted -encryptmethod ENCMTHD_3 -ldapLoginName sAMAccountName -groupAttrName memberOf -subAttributeName cn -secType SSL -passwdChange ENABLED -nestedGroupExtraction ON -groupNameIdentifier sAMAccountName -groupSearchAttribute memberOf -groupSearchSubAttribute CN -KBAttribute extensionAttribute1 -alternateEmailAttr extensionAttribute1

add authentication ldapAction LDAP-Corp_NoAuth -serverIP 10.2.2.11 -serverPort 636 -ldapBase "dc=corp,dc=local" -ldapBindDn ctxsvc@corp.local -ldapBindDnPassword a4ffb4 -encrypted -encryptmethod ENCMTHD_3 -ldapLoginName sAMAccountName -groupAttrName memberOf -subAttributeName cn -secType SSL -authentication DISABLED -passwdChange ENABLED -nestedGroupExtraction ON -groupNameIdentifier sAMAccountName -groupSearchAttribute memberOf -groupSearchSubAttribute CN -KBAttribute extensionAttribute1 -alternateEmailAttr extensionAttribute1


# Email (SSPR) Actions
# --------------------
add authentication emailAction EmailOTP -userName admin@corp.local -password 7868e -encrypted -encryptmethod ENCMTHD_3 -serverURL "smtps://mail01.corp.local:587" -content "Your OTP is $code" -emailAddress "aaa.user.attribute(\"alternate_mail\")"


# Advanced Authentication Policies
# --------------------------------
add authentication Policy LDAP-Corp-Adv -rule true -action LDAP-Corp

add authentication Policy kba_validation -rule true -action LDAP-Corp_NoAuth

add authentication Policy LDAP_Password_Reset -rule "aaa.LOGIN.VALUE(\"passwdreset\").EQ(\"1\")" -action LDAP-Corp_NoAuth

add authentication Policy NoAuth -rule true -action NO_AUTHN

add authentication Policy switch_to_kba_register -rule "AAA.USER.ATTRIBUTE(\"kba_registered\").EQ(\"0\")" -action NO_AUTHN

add authentication Policy email_validation -rule true -action EmailOTP

add authentication Policy first_time_login_forced_kba_registration -rule true -action LDAP-Corp

add authentication Policy EmailOTP -rule true -action EmailOTP

add authentication Policy LDAP-Corp-Adv_NoAuth -rule true -action LDAP-Corp_NoAuth


# Login Schemas
# -------------
add authentication loginSchema lschema_KBARegistration -authenticationSchema "/nsconfig/loginschema/LoginSchema/lschema_KBARegistration.xml"

add authentication loginSchema lschema_password_reset -authenticationSchema "/nsconfig/loginschema/LoginSchema/SingleAuthPasswordResetRem.xml"


# Login Schema Policies
# ---------------------
add authentication loginSchemaPolicy lschema_password_reset -rule true -action lschema_password_reset


# Authentication Policy Labels
# ----------------------------
add authentication policylabel kba_registration -loginSchema lschema_KBARegistration

bind authentication policylabel kba_registration -policyName first_time_login_forced_kba_registration -priority 1 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT

add authentication policylabel check_for_sspr_registration -loginSchema LSCHEMA_INT

bind authentication policylabel check_for_sspr_registration -policyName switch_to_kba_register -priority 1 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT -nextFactor kba_registration

bind authentication policylabel check_for_sspr_registration -policyName NoAuth -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression END

add authentication policylabel password_reset -loginSchema lschema_noschema

bind authentication policylabel password_reset -policyName LDAP-Corp-Adv_NoAuth -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT

add authentication policylabel email_validation -loginSchema lschema_noschema

bind authentication policylabel email_validation -policyName email_validation -priority 10 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT -nextFactor password_reset

add authentication policylabel kba_validation -loginSchema lschema_noschema

bind authentication policylabel kba_validation -policyName kba_validation -priority 10 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT -nextFactor email_validation


# Authentication Virtual Servers
# ------------------------------
add authentication vserver AAA-SSPR SSL 0.0.0.0

bind authentication vserver AAA-SSPR -portaltheme RfWebUI

bind authentication vserver AAA-SSPR -policy lschema_password_reset -priority 20 -gotoPriorityExpression END

bind authentication vserver AAA-SSPR -policy LDAP_Password_Reset -priority 10 -nextFactor kba_validation -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT

bind authentication vserver AAA-SSPR -policy LDAP-Corp-Adv -priority 20 -nextFactor check_for_sspr_registration -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT


# Authentication Profiles
# -----------------------
add authentication authnProfile SSPR -authnVsName AAA-SSPR


# NetScaler Gateway Global Bindings
# ---------------------------------
bind vpn global -userDataEncryptionKey WildcardCorpCom.cer_CERT_KEY


# NetScaler Gateway Virtual Servers
# ---------------------------------
add vpn vserver gateway2 SSL 10.2.4.220 443 -Listenpolicy NONE -tcpProfileName nstcp_default_XA_XD_profile -httpProfileName http2 -deploymentType ICA_STOREFRONT -authnProfile SSPR -vserverFqdn gateway3.corp.com

bind vpn vserver gateway2 -portaltheme RfWebUI

bind vpn vserver gateway2 -policy PL_OS_10.2.4.120 -priority 100

bind vpn vserver gateway2 -policy PL_WB_10.2.4.120 -priority 100


# SSL Virtual Servers
# -------------------
bind ssl vserver gateway2 -certkeyName WildcardCorpCom.cer_CERT_KEY

bind ssl vserver AAA-SSPR -certkeyName WildcardCorpCom.cer_CERT_KEY

SSL Virtual Servers – Citrix ADC 13

Last Modified: Apr 26, 2024 @ 7:34 am

24 Comments

Navigation

This page contains generic SSL instructions for all SSL-based Virtual Servers, including: Load Balancing, Citrix Gateway, Content Switching, and AAA.

💡 = Recently Updated

Change Log

Custom Cipher Group

References:

To get an A+ at SSL Labs, create a custom secure cipher group:

  1. Enable SSL Secure Renegotiation:
    1. In the left menu, expand Traffic Management, and then click SSL.
    2. On the right, in the right column, click Change advanced SSL settings.
    3. Find Deny SSL Renegotiation, and set the drop-down to NONSECURE.
    4. Scroll down and click OK.

      set ssl parameter -denySSLReneg NONSECURE
  2. The easiest way to create a cipher group is from the CLI. See Citrix Blogs Scoring an A+ at SSLlabs.com with Citrix NetScaler – Q2 2018 update for cipher group CLI commands. Putty (SSH) to the Citrix ADC and paste the following commands.
    Note: The TLS 1.3 ciphers are not in the Citrix Blog Post. You can add TLS 1.3 ciphers to the cipher group. Make sure the TLS 1.3 ciphers are listed first (top of the list).
    add ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1.3-AES256-GCM-SHA384 -cipherPriority 1
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1.3-CHACHA20-POLY1305-SHA256 -cipherPriority 2
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1.3-AES128-GCM-SHA256 -cipherPriority 3
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1.2-ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1.2-ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1.2-ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-SHA256
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1.2-ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA384
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1-ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-SHA
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1-ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1.2-ECDHE-RSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1.2-ECDHE-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1.2-ECDHE-RSA-AES-128-SHA256
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1.2-ECDHE-RSA-AES-256-SHA384
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1-ECDHE-RSA-AES128-SHA
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1-ECDHE-RSA-AES256-SHA
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1.2-DHE-RSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1.2-DHE-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1-DHE-RSA-AES-128-CBC-SHA
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1-DHE-RSA-AES-256-CBC-SHA
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1-AES-128-CBC-SHA
bind ssl cipher ssllabs-smw-q2-2018 -cipherName TLS1-AES-256-CBC-SHA
  3. Or you can create the cipher group using the GUI.
    1. Go to Traffic Management > SSL > Cipher Groups.
    2. On the right, click Add.
    3. Name it SSL Labs or similar.
    4. In the middle, click the button named Add.
    5. Use the search box to find a particular cipher.
    6. Check the box next to one of the results, and click the arrow to move it to the right.
    7. For TLS 1.3 support, add the TLS 1.3 ciphers first.
    8. Then add the ciphers from Citrix Blog Post Scoring an A+ at SSLlabs.com with Citrix NetScaler – Q2 2018 update.
    9. Use the up and down arrows to order the ciphers. Citrix ADC prefers the ciphers on top of the list, so the ciphers at the top of the list should be the most secure ciphers (TLS 1.3).
    10. Click Create when done.

Strict Transport Security – Rewrite Policy Method

To get an A+ at SSLLabs.com, you need to insert the Strict-Transport-Security HTTP header in the responses. Citrix ADC Rewrite Policy is one method of doing this. Another method is to enable HSTS in an SSL Profile, or enable it in SSL Parameters on a SSL vServer.

To create a Rewrite Policy that inserts the Strict-Transport-Security HTTP header:

  1. In the left menu, expand AppExpert, right-click Rewrite, and click Enable Feature.
  2. Create the Rewrite Action:
    1. Go to AppExpert > Rewrite > Actions.
    2. On the right, click Add.
    3. Name the action insert_STS_header or similar.
    4. The Type should be INSERT_HTTP_HEADER.
    5. In the Header Name field, enter Strict-Transport-Security.
    6. In the Expression field, enter the following: 
      "max-age=157680000"

    7. Click Create.
  3. Create the Rewrite Policy:
    1. On the left, go to AppExpert > Rewrite > Policies.
    2. On the right, click Add.
    3. Name it insert_STS_header or similar.
    4. Select the previously created Action.
    5. In the Expression box, enter HTTP.REQ.IS_VALID.
    6. Click Create.
  4. Now you can bind this Rewrite Response policy to SSL-based SSL vServers.
    1. Edit an SSL vServer (Gateway vServer, Load Balancing vServer, etc.).
    2. if the Policies section doesn’t exist on the left, then add it from the Advanced Settings column on the right.
    3. On the left, in the Policies section, click the plus icon.
    4. Change the Choose Policy drop-down to Rewrite.
    5. Change the Choose Type drop-down to Response, and click Continue.
    6. In the Select Policy field, click where it says Click to select.
    7. Click the small circle next to insert_STS_header, and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
    8. Click Bind.
enable ns feature rewrite

add rewrite action insert_STS_header insert_http_header Strict-Transport-Security "\"max-age=157680000\""

add rewrite policy insert_STS_header true insert_STS_header

bind lb vserver MyvServer -policyName insert_STS_header -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression END -type RESPONSE

SSL Profiles – Default and Custom

You can use SSL Profiles to package several SSL settings together and apply the settings package (Profile) to SSL-based Virtual Servers and SSL-based Services. These SSL settings include:

  • Disable SSLv3, TLSv1, TLSv11
  • Bind secure ciphers
  • Bind ECC curves
  • Enable Extended Master Secret (EMS)
  • Enable HSTS (Strict Transport Security), etc.

There are default SSL Profiles, and there are custom SSL Profiles. The default SSL Profiles are disabled by default because they would impact every SSL-based Virtual Server and Service on the appliance. Once default SSL Profiles are enabled, you cannot disable the default SSL Profiles.

  • Some features of custom SSL Profiles require default SSL Profiles to be enabled. For example, you cannot configure ciphers in a custom SSL Profile unless the default SSL Profiles are enabled.

Default SSL Profiles are intended to provide a baseline SSL configuration for all newly created SSL Virtual Servers and SSL Services. You can still create Custom SSL Profiles to override the Default SSL Profiles.

Enabling the default SSL profile will wipe out any SSL configuration on SSL entities (e.g. SSL Virtual Servers) that do not have a custom SSL profile bound. Citrix offers a script that can read your existing SSL entity SSL configuration and convert them to custom SSL Profiles. See Enabling the Default Profiles at Citrix Docs. The default_profile_script can be downloaded from Github. The commands output by the script won’t work until the default SSL Profile is enabled.

To enable Default SSL profiles

Enabling Default SSL Profiles is irreversible.

  1. Make sure you are connected to the appliance NSIP using http, and not https.
  2. In the left menu, go to Traffic Management > SSL.
  3. On the right, in the right column, click Change advanced SSL settings.
  4. Near the bottom, check the box next to Enable Default Profile. Note: this will change SSL settings on all SSL Virtual Servers to match the default SSL profile. You might want to do this during a maintenance window.
  5. Click OK at the bottom of the page.
  6. Click Yes to confirm that you are enabling the Default profile.
  7. If you go back into Change Advanced SSL Settings, notice that the Default Profile is enabled, and there’s no way to disable it.

Edit Default SSL Profile with Recommended SSL Profile Settings

The Default SSL Profile applies to all newly created SSL vServers and all newly created SSL Services.

The Default SSL Profile also applies to the management GUI unless you change the SSL Profile assigned to the management Internal Services.

  1. In the left menu, expand System, and click Profiles.
  2. On the right, switch to the SSL Profile tab.
  3. Edit the default frontend or backend profile.
    • Frontend = client-side connections to SSL Virtual Servers.
    • Backend = server-side connections (SSL Services and Service Groups).
    • ns_default_ssl_profile_frontend is automatically applied to all newly created SSL vServers.
    • ns_default_ssl_profile_backend is automatically applied to all newly created SSL Services.
  4. This section focuses on FrontEnd profiles so edit ns_default_ssl_profile_frontend.
  5. Click the pencil icon in the Basic Settings section.

    1. Scroll all the way down to the Protocol section.
    2. Notice that SSLv3 is already unchecked.
    3. It’s recommended that you uncheck TLSv1 and TLSv11 in the Default FrontEnd SSL profile.
      • If you have a website that requires TLSv1, then you can create another Custom FrontEnd SSL Profile that has TLSv1 enabled and manually bind the new Custom SSL Profile to the SSL vServers that need it.
    4. TLSv13 is an option.

      • You can either enable TLSv13 in this Default SSL Profile, or you can create new Custom SSL Profiles that have TLSv13 enabled.
      • If you enable TLSv13, then make sure your cipher group includes TLS 1.3 ciphers.
      • To log SSL Protocol usage, see NetScaler SSL Protocol’s Used (SSLv3, TLS1.0, etc) at Citrix Discussions.
    5. In ADC 13.0 build 61 and newer, just below the protocols. there is an option to enable Allow Extended Master Secret. Windows machines enforce EMS for resumption. 💡
    6. Find Deny SSL Renegotiation and set it to NONSECURE. To find the setting, press Ctrl+F in your browser and search for it.
    7. To enable Strict Transport Security (HSTS), scroll up a little, and check the box next to HSTS.
    8. Enter 157680000 in the Max Age box.

      • You can either enable HSTS in an SSL Profile, or you can enable HSTS by binding a Rewrite policy to your SSL vServer. Do not use both methods at the same time or else you will end up with two Strict-Transport-Security headers in your responses.
    9. If you do any SSL Offload (SSL on the client side, HTTP on the server side), then you’ll need to enable SSL Redirect. It’s above HSTS. With this option enabled, any 301/302 redirects from the server with HTTP Location headers are rewritten to HTTPS Location headers. You might need this option for StoreFront load balancing if doing SSL Offload (port 80 to the StoreFront servers).

      • This setting might be more appropriate in a Custom SSL Profile instead of the Default SSL Profile.
    10. For SSL vServers that need multiple SSL certificates, you can enable the SNI Enable checkbox.

      • This setting might be more appropriate in a Custom SSL Profile instead of the Default SSL Profile.
    11. Click OK when done modifying the Basic Settings section.
  6. Scroll down to the SSL Ciphers section, and click the pencil icon.

    1. Scroll down, and select your custom cipher group (e.g. SSL Labs). Click the arrow to move it to the right.
      If you enabled TLS 1.3, then make sure your cipher group includes TLS 1.3 ciphers.

    2. In the Configured list on the right, click the minus sign next to the DEFAULT cipher group to remove it from the Configured list.
    3. Click OK to close the SSL Ciphers section.
    4. If you make changes to the Custom Cipher Group, then you might have to edit the SSL Profile, remove the Custom Cipher Group, and rebind it.

Create a custom SSL Profile

You can create Custom SSL Profiles to override the Default SSL Profile.

  1. In the left menu, expand System, and click Profiles.
  2. On the right, switch to the tab named SSL Profile.
  3. To copy the existing settings from the Default SSL Profile, check the box next to ns_default_ssl_profile_frontend and then click the button named Add.

    1. Enter a name.
    2. Change the SSL Profile Type to FrontEnd or BackEnd.
    3. Configure SSL Profile settings as desired (see above for some recommendations).
    4. For example, your Custom SSL Profile can enable TLSv13 protocol and include TLSv13 ciphers.
    5. For example, your Custom SSL Profile can enable Client Authentication (client certificates).
    6. Another example, your Custom SSL Profile can enable SNI.
    7. When done, click OK at the bottom of the page.
  4. When you clone an SSL Profile, the Ciphers are not cloned so you’ll have to rebind the ciphers to the Custom SSL Profile.
  5. After the SSL Profile is created, edit any SSL-based Virtual Server.

    1. If you don’t see the SSL Profile section on the left, then on the right, in the Advanced Settings column, click SSL Profile to add the section to the left.
    2. On the left, scroll down to the SSL Profile section and click the pencil icon.
    3. Select an SSL Profile.
    4. Click OK to close the SSL Profile section.

SSL vServers – Bind Certificate, Bind Cipher Group, Disable SSLv3, Enable STS

If you enabled the Default SSL Profiles feature, you can either leave the vServer configured with the Default SSL Profile; or you can change the vServer to use a Custom SSL Profile.

If you don’t use the Default SSL Profiles feature, then you’ll need to manually configure ciphers and SSL settings on every SSL vServer.

Do the following on every SSL vServer:

  1. When creating an SSL Virtual Server (e.g. SSL Load Balancing vServer), on the left, in the Certificates section, click where it says No Server Certificate.

    1. In the Select Server Certificate field, click where it says Click to select.
    2. Click the small circle next to a certificate, and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
    3. Click Bind.

      bind ssl vserver MyvServer -certkeyName MyCert
  2. You can bind a Custom SSL Profile:
    1. Find the SSL Profile section on the left, and click the pencil icon.

      • If you don’t see the SSL Profile section on the left, then add the SSL Profile section from the Advanced Settings column on the right.
    2. Select a Custom SSL Profile, and click OK.
  3. If default SSL Profiles are not enabled:
    1. On the left, in the SSL Parameters section, click the pencil icon. You won’t see this section if Default SSL Profiles are enabled.
    2. Uncheck the box next to SSLv3.
    3. Optionally uncheck the boxes next to TLSv1 and TLSv11.
    4. Make sure TLSv12 is checked.
    5. TLSv13 is an option. If you enable this, then make sure your cipher group includes TLS 1.3 ciphers.
    6. Click OK.

      set ssl vserver MyvServer -ssl3 DISABLED -tls12 ENABLED
    7. Scroll to the SSL Ciphers section, and click the pencil icon.
    8. In the middle, click Add.
    9. Select your custom cipher group. It’s probably at the bottom of the list. If you enabled TLS 1.3, then make sure your cipher group includes TLS 1.3 ciphers. Move the cipher group to the right.
    10. Remove the DEFAULT cipher group from the Configured list

      unbind ssl vserver MyvServer -cipherName ALL
bind ssl vserver MyvServer -cipherName ssllabs-smw-q2-2018
    11. Then click OK to close the SSL Ciphers section.
  4. SSL Virtual Servers created on newer versions of Citrix ADC will automatically have ECC Curves bound to them. However, if this appliance was upgraded from an older version, then the ECC Curves might not be bound. If you are not using SSL Profile, then on the right, in the Advanced Settings column, click ECC Curve.

    1. On the left, in the ECC Curve section, click where it says No ECC Curve.
    2. In the ECC Curve Binding field, click where it says Click to select.
    3. Click the small circle next to ALL, and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
    4. Click Bind.

      bind ssl vserver MyvServer -eccCurveName ALL
  5. If HSTS is not enabled in a bound SSL Profile, you can enable it in SSL Parameters, or you can enable it by binding a Rewrite policy.
  6. To enable HSTS by configuring SSL Parameters:
    1. On the left, find the SSL Parameters section, and click the pencil icon. This section is only present if Default SSL Profiles are not enabled.
    2. In the right column, check the box next to HSTS.
    3. Enter 157680000 in the Max Age box.
    4. Click OK to close SSL Parameters.
  7. If enabling HSTS in an SSL Profile or SSL Parameters causes technical issues, then bind a Rewrite policy instead. Don’t do both methods.
    1. If the Policies section doesn’t exist on the left, then add it from the Advanced Settings column on the right.
    2. On the left, find the Policies section, and click the plus icon.
    3. Change the Choose Policy drop-down to Rewrite.
    4. Change the Choose Type drop-down to Response, and click Continue.
    5. In the Select Policy field, click where it says Click to select.
    6. Click the small circle next to the insert_STS_header policy, and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
    7. Click Bind.

      bind lb vserver MyvServer -policyName insert_STS_header -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression END -type RESPONSE

If you experience SSL performance problems on a Citrix ADC MPX, Citrix CTX207005 Performance Issues with NetScaler MPX SSL recommends creating and binding the following TCP Profile:

add ns tcpProfile tcp_test -WS ENABLED -SACK ENABLED -maxBurst 20 -initialCwnd 8 -bufferSize 4096000 -flavor BIC -dynamicReceiveBuffering DISABLED -sendBuffsize 4096000

SSL Tests

After you’ve created an SSL Virtual Server and configured SSL settings, run the following test:

SSL Redirect – Methods

There are typically three methods of performing SSL Redirect (http to https) in Citrix ADC:

  • Load Balancing Virtual Server Method – enable SSL Redirect directly on the Load Balancing Virtual Server. This is the easiest method.
    • This option is not available for Gateway Virtual Servers and Content Switching Virtual Servers.
    • There’s nothing in the GUI to indicate that the SSL Virtual Server is also listening on port 80.
  • Down vServer Method – create a new Load Balancing Virtual Server on Port 80, and configure the Redirect URL for when it is down.
    • The Virtual Server must be DOWN for the Redirect to occur. These Virtual Servers are shown as Red instead of Green.
  • Responder Method – create a new Load Balancing Virtual Server on Port 80, and bind a Responder policy that redirects to https.
    • The Responder policy only works if the Virtual Server is UP, which means it is shown as Green.
    • Some setup tasks are required – create the AlwaysUP service, and create the Responder Policy. But once setup is complete, it only requires slightly more steps than the Down vServer method.

SSL Redirect – SSL Load Balancing vServer Method

You can configure SSL Redirect directly in an SSL Load Balancing vServer (port 443) instead of creating a separate HTTP (port 80) Load Balancing vServer.

Limitations:

  • This is only an option for SSL Load Balancing vServers; it’s not configurable in Gateway vServers or Content Switching vServers.
  • Only one Redirect URL can be specified. Alternatively, the Responder method can handle multiple FQDNs to one VIP (e.g. wildcard certificate) and/or IP address URLs.

To configure an SSL Load Balancing vServer to redirect from HTTP to HTTPS:

  1. Edit the SSL Load Balancing vServer (port 443).
  2. In the Basic Settings section, click the pencil icon.
  3. Click More.
  4. In the Redirect from Port field, enter 80.
  5. In the HTTPS Redirect URL field, enter https://MyFQDN.
  6. Click Continue twice.
  7. When you view the list of Load Balancing Virtual Servers, there’s no indication that it’s listening on port 80.

SSL Redirect – Down vServer Method

If you created an SSL Virtual Server that only listens on SSL 443, then users must enter https:// when navigating to the website. To make it easier for the users, create another load balancing Virtual Server on the same VIP, but listens on HTTP 80, and then redirects the user’s browser to reconnect on SSL 443.

The Down Virtual Server Method is easy, but the Redirect Virtual Server must be down in order for the redirect to take effect. Another option is to use Responder policies to perform the redirect.

To create the down Redirect Virtual Server:

  1. On the left, under Traffic Management > Load Balancing, click Virtual Servers.
  2. On the right, right-click an SSL Virtual Server you’ve already created, and click Add. Doing it this way copies some of the data from the already created Virtual Server.
  3. Or, if you are redirecting Citrix Gateway, create a new Load Balancing vServer with the same VIP as the Gateway.
  4. Change the name of the Virtual Server to indicate that this new Virtual Server is an SSL Redirect.
  5. Change the Protocol to HTTP on Port 80.
  6. The IP Address should already be filled in. It must match the original SSL Virtual Server (or Gateway vServer). Click OK.
  7. Don’t bind any services. This vServer must intentionally be marked down so the redirect will take effect. Click Continue.
  8. On the right, in the Advanced Settings column, click Protection.
  9. On the left, in the Protection section, in the Redirect URL field, enter the full URL including https://. For example: https://storefront.corp.com/Citrix/StoreWeb.
  10. Click OK to close the Protection section.
  11. Click Done.
  12. When you view the SSL redirect Virtual Server in the list, it will have a state of DOWN. That’s expected. The Port 80 Virtual Server must be DOWN for this redirect method to work.

SSL Redirect – Responder Method

The Down Virtual Server Method is easy, but the Redirect Virtual Server must be down in order for the redirect to take effect. Another option is to use Responder policies to perform the redirect. The Responder method requires the Redirect Virtual Server to be UP.

Responder Method Setup Tasks

The following setup tasks are performed once no matter how many redirects you want to configure.

Create a dummy Load Balancing service. This dummy service can be bound to multiple Redirect Virtual Servers.

  1. Go to Traffic Management > Load Balancing > Services.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. Name the service AlwaysUp or similar.
  4. Enter a fake IP address. Try not to use any IP address owned by the Citrix ADC to avoid being able to access the ADC management web page.
  5. Click the More link.
  6. This dummy service must always be UP, so uncheck the box next to Health Monitoring.
  7. Click OK, and then click Done to close the Load Balancing Service.

    add server 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1
add service AlwaysUp 1.1.1.1 HTTP 80 -healthMonitor NO

Create the Responder Action:

  1. On the left, expand AppExpert, and click Responder.
  2. If Responder feature is not enabled, right-click Responder, and click Enable Feature.

    enable ns feature RESPONDER
  3. Under Responder, click Actions.
  4. On the right, click Add.
  5. Give the action a name.
  6. Change the Type to Redirect. If you leave this set to Respond With then it won’t work.
  7. Enter an expression. The following expression redirects to https on the same URL the user entered in the browser. Or you can create a Responder Action with a more specific Target. 
    "https://" + HTTP.REQ.HOSTNAME.HTTP_URL_SAFE + HTTP.REQ.URL.PATH_AND_QUERY.HTTP_URL_SAFE

    add responder action http_to_ssl_redirect_responderact redirect "\"https://\" + HTTP.REQ.HOSTNAME.HTTP_URL_SAFE + HTTP.REQ.URL.PATH_AND_QUERY.HTTP_URL_SAFE" -responseStatusCode 302
  8. Click Create.

Create the Responder Policy:

  1. On the left, under Responder, click Policies.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. Give the policy a name.
  4. Select the previously created Responder action.
  5. For the expression, enter the following. 
    HTTP.REQ.IS_VALID

    add responder policy http_to_ssl_redirect_responderpol HTTP.REQ.IS_VALID http_to_ssl_redirect_responderact
  6. Then click Create.

Enable Redirect using Responder Policy

Repeat this section for each HTTP to HTTPS redirect that you want to configure:

  1. Create a Load Balancing Virtual Server with Protocol HTTP, and Port 80.
  2. The vServer’s VIP should match an existing SSL Virtual Server or existing Citrix Gateway Virtual Server.

  3. Bind the AlwaysUp service.
    1. In the Services and Service Groups section, click where it says No Load Balancing Virtual Server Service Binding.
    2. In the Select Service field, click where it says Click to select.
    3. Check the box next to AlwaysUp, and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
    4. Click Bind.
    5. Click Continue to close Services and Service Groups.
  4. Bind the Responder Policy:
    1. On the right, in the Advanced Settings column, click Policies.
    2. On the left, scroll down to the Policies section, and click the plus icon in the top right of the Policies box.
    3. Change the Choose Policy drop-down to Responder. Click Continue.
    4. In the Select Policy field, click where it says Click to select.
    5. Click the small circle next to the redirect Responder policy, and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
    6. Click Bind.
    7. Then click Done to close the Load Balancing Virtual Server.

      add lb vserver MyvServer-HTTP-SSLRedirect HTTP 10.2.2.201 80

bind lb vserver storefront.corp.com-HTTP-SSLRedirect AlwaysUp

bind lb vserver storefront.corp.com-HTTP-SSLRedirect -policyName http_to_ssl_redirect_responderpol -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression END -type REQUEST
  5. The primary advantage of this method is that the Redirect Virtual Server is UP.

Related Pages

Certificates – Citrix ADC 13

Last Modified: Dec 6, 2020 @ 8:27 am

38 Comments

Navigation

💡 = Recently Updated

Change Log

  • 2020 Dec 6 – 13.0 build 71 and newer shows SANs (Subject Alternative Names) in Certificate Details
  • Updated screenshots and procedures for ADC 13

Convert .PFX Certificate to PEM Format

You can export a certificate (with private key) from Windows, and import it to Citrix ADC.

To export a Windows certificate in .pfx format

  1. If Windows Server 2012 or newer, on the Windows server that has the certificate, you can run certlm.msc to open the Certificates console pointing at Local Computer.
    1. Or, run mmc.exe, manually add the Certificates snap-in, and point it to Local Computer.
  2. Go to Personal > Certificates.
  3. Right-click the certificate, expand All Tasks, and click Export.
  4. On the Welcome to the Certificate Export Wizard page, click Next.
  5. On the Export Private Key page, select Yes, export the private key, and click Next.
  6. On the Export File Format page, click Next.
  7. On the Security page, check the box next to Password, and enter a new temporary password. Click Next.
  8. On the File to Export page, specify a save location and name the .pfx file. Don’t put any spaces in the filename. Click Next.
  9. In the Completing the Certificate Export Wizard page, click Finish.
  10. Click OK when prompted that the export was successful.

Import a .pfx file to Citrix ADC

Citrix ADC 13 imports .pfx files and uses them in their native encrypted format.

To import the .pfx file:

  1. On the Citrix ADC, expand Traffic Management, and click SSL.
  2. If the SSL feature is disabled, right-click the SSL node, and click Enable Feature.
  3. Go to Traffic Management > SSL > Certificates > Server Certificates.
  4. There are four different certificate nodes:
    1. Server Certificates have private keys. These certificates are intended to be bound to SSL vServers.
    2. Client Certificates also have private keys, but they are intended to be bound to Services so Citrix ADC can perform client-certificate authentication against back-end web servers.
    3. CA Certificates don’t have private keys. The CA certificates node contains intermediate certificates that are linked to Server Certificates. CA certificates can also be used for SAML authentication, and to verify client certificates.
    4. Unknown Certificates list the certificates that don’t fall under the other categories. Some SAML certificates (e.g. Azure) show up here.
  5. On the left, click the Server Certificates node.
  6. On the right, click Install.
  7. Give the certificate (Certificate-Key Pair) a name.
  8. Click the drop-down next to Choose File, select Local, and browse to the .pfx file that you exported earlier.
  9. After browsing to the .pfx file, Citrix ADC will prompt you to enter the Password for the .pfx file. Ignore the Key File Name field.
  10. Then click Install.
  11. If you click the information icon next to the new certificate…
  12. You’ll see that Citrix ADC uses the file in native .pfx format. No PEM conversion.
  13. In 13.0 build 71 and newer, if you right-click the certificate and click Details, you can see the SANs (Subject Alternative Names) in the certificate.

  14. You can now link an intermediate certificate to this SSL certificate, and then bind this SSL certificate to SSL and/or Citrix Gateway Virtual Servers.
  15. To automatically backup SSL certificates and receive notification when the certificates are about the expire, deploy Citrix Application Delivery Management (ADM). Also see Citrix CTX213342 How to handle certificate expiry on NetScaler.

To convert PFX to PEM (with Private Key encryption)

If you followed the previous section to import a .pfx in native format, then you can skip this section.

Sometimes you need to convert a .pfx file to PEM format so you can use the PEM certificate on other systems. To use Citrix ADC to convert PFX to PEM, do the following:

  1. In the Citrix ADC Configuration GUI, on the left, expand Traffic Management, and click SSL.
  2. In the right column of the right pane, in the Tools section, click Import PKCS#12.
  3. In the Import PKCS12 File dialog box:
    1. In the Output File Name field, enter a name for a new file where the converted PEM certificate and private key will be placed. This new file is created under /nsconfig/ssl on the Citrix ADC appliance.
    2. In the PKCS12 File field, click Choose File, and browse to the .pfx file.
    3. In the Import Password field, enter the password you specified when you previously exported the .pfx file.
    4. By default, the private key in the new PEM file is unencrypted. To encrypt the private key, change the Encoding Format selection to AES256 or DES3. This causes the new PEM file to be password protected, and encrypted.
    5. Enter a permanent password for the new PEM file, and click OK.
  4. You can use the Manage Certificates / Keys / CSRs link to view the new PEM file.

    1. The new file is usually at the bottom of the page.
    2. Right-click the new file, and click View.
    3. Notice that the Private Key is encrypted.
    4. If you scroll down, notice that the file contains both the certificate, and the RSA Private key.
  5. If you want to use this PEM certificate on a different system, then you can right-click the file and Download it.

Install PEM Certificate on Citrix ADC

If you want to bind the PEM certificate to ADC SSL Virtual Servers, then you must first install the PEM certificate. Or you can import a .pfx file in native format as described earlier.

  1. ADC probably won’t import the PEM certificate file if it contains CA certificates. Download the PEM file.

    1. Edit the downloaded file.
    2. Scroll down. Skip the first certificate. Then delete the rest of the certificates in the file. When done, you should have a Private Key and one Certificate (the first one in the file).
    3. Save the file with a new name. You can upload the file, or browse to it later when installing the certificate.
  2. On the left side of the Citrix ADC Configuration GUI, go to Traffic Management > SSL > Certificates > Server Certificates.
  3. On the right, click Install.
  4. In the Certificate-Key Pair Name field, enter a friendly name for this certificate.
  5. In the Certificate File Name field, click the drop-down next to Choose File, and select Local.
  6. Browse to the PEM file that you downloaded and edited to remove the CA certificates.
  7. Citrix ADC will ask you to enter the Password for the encrypted private key.
  8. Ignore the Key File Name since the converted PEM file contains both the certificate and the key.
  9. Click Install.
  10. In 13.0 build 71 and newer, if you right-click the certificate and click Details, you can see the SANs (Subject Alternative Names) in the certificate.

  11. You can now link an intermediate certificate to this SSL certificate, and then bind this SSL certificate to SSL and/or Citrix Gateway Virtual Servers.
  12. To automatically backup SSL certificates and receive notification when the certificates are about the expire, deploy Citrix Application Delivery Management (ADM). Also see Citrix CTX213342 How to handle certificate expiry on NetScaler.
  13. You can also export the certificate files and use them on a different Citrix ADC.

Create Key and Certificate Request

If you want to create free Let’s Encrypt certificates, see John Billekens’ PowerShell script detailed at Let’s Encrypt Certificates on a NetScaler.

You can create a key pair and Certificate Signing Request (CSR) directly on the Citrix ADC appliance. The CSR can then be signed by an internal, or public, Certificate Authority.

Most Certificate Authorities let you add Subject Alternative Names when creating (or purchasing) a signed certificate, and thus there’s no reason to include Subject Alternative Names in the CSR created on Citrix ADC. You typically create a CSR with a single DNS name. Then when submitting the CSR to the Certificate Authority, you type in additional DNS names.

  • For a Microsoft Certificate Authority, you can enter Subject Alternative Names in the Attributes box of the Web Enrollment wizard.
  • For public Certificate Authorities, you purchase a UCC certificate or purchase a certificate option that lets you type in additional names.

To create a key pair on Citrix ADC

  1. On the left, expand Traffic Management, expand SSL, and click SSL Files.
  2. On the right, switch to the tab named Keys.
  3. Click the button named Create RSA Key.
  4. In the Key Filename box, enter a new filename (e.g. wildcard.key). Key pair files typically have a .key extension.
  5. In the Key Size field, enter 2048 bits.
  6. By default, the private key is unencrypted. To encrypt it, set the PEM Encoding Algorithm drop-down to AES256 or DES3.
  7. Enter a password to encrypt the private key.
  8. Click Create.
  9. The new file is probably at the bottom of the list. Select it and click the button named View.
  10. The Private Key should be encrypted with your chosen encoding algorithm.

To create CSR file

  1. Back in the SSL Files page, on the right, switch to the tab named CSRs.
  2. Click the button named Create Certificate Signing Request (CSR).
  3. In the Request File Name field, enter the name of a new CSR file. CSR files typically have .csr or .txt extension.
  4. In the Key Filename field, click Choose File (Appliance) and select the previously created .key file. It’s probably at the bottom of the list.

  5. If the key file is encrypted, enter the password.
  6. You can optionally change the CSR Digest Method to SHA256. This only applies to the CSR and does not affect the CA-signed certificate.
  7. Citrix ADC 13 lets you specify up to three Subject Alternative Names in the CSR. Some Certificate Authorities ignore this field and instead require you to specify the Subject Alternative Names when purchasing the signed certificate. See CTX232305 How to create a SAN CSR in NetScaler 12.0 57.19.
  8. In the Common Name field, enter the FQDN of the SSL enabled-website. If this is a wildcard certificate, enter * for the left part of the FQDN. This is the field that normally must match what users enter into their browser address bars.
  9. In the Organization Name field, enter your official Organization Name.
  10. Enter IT, or similar, as the Organization Unit.
  11. Enter the City name.
  12. In the State field, enter your state name without abbreviating.
  13. Scroll down and click Create.
  14. The new CSR file is at the bottom of the list. You can select the new .csr file, and click the buttons named View or Download.

Get CSR signed by CA, and then install certificate on Citrix ADC

  1. View the CSR file or open the downloaded .csr file with Notepad, and send the contents to your Certificate Authority.

    1. Chrome requires every certificate to have at least one Subject Alternative Name that matches the FQDN entered in Chrome’s address bar. Public CAs will handle this automatically. But for Internal CAs, you typically must specify the Subject Alternative Names manually when signing the certificate.

    2. If the CA asks you for the type of web server, select Apache, or save the CA response as a Base 64 file.
  2. After you get the signed certificate, on the left side of the Citrix ADC Configuration GUI, expand Traffic Management > SSL > Certificates, and click Server Certificates.
  3. On the right, click Install.
  4. In the Certificate-Key Pair Name field, enter a friendly name for this certificate.
  5. In the Certificate File Name field, click the drop-down next to Choose File, and select Local.
  6. Browse to the Base64 (Apache) .cer file you received from the Certificate Authority.
  7. In the Key File Name field, click the drop-down next to Choose File, and select Appliance.
  8. Select the key file you created earlier, and click Open. It’s probably at the bottom of the list.
  9. If the key file is encrypted, enter the password.
  10. Click Install.
  11. The certificate is now added to the list.
  12. In 13.0 build 71 and newer, if you right-click the certificate and click Details, you can see the SANs (Subject Alternative Names) in the certificate.

  13. You can now link an intermediate certificate to this SSL certificate, and then bind this SSL certificate to SSL and/or Citrix Gateway Virtual Servers.
  14. To automatically backup SSL certificates and receive notification when the certificates are about the expire, deploy Citrix Application Delivery Management (ADM). Also see Citrix CTX213342 How to handle certificate expiry on NetScaler.
  15. You can also export the certificate files and use them on a different Citrix ADC.

Intermediate Certificate

If your Server Certificate is signed by an intermediate Certificate Authority, then you must install the intermediate Certificate Authority’s certificate on the Citrix ADC. This Intermediate Certificate then must be linked to the Server Certificate.

Get the correct intermediate certificate

  1. Log into Windows, and double-click the signed certificate file.
  2. On the Certification Path tab, double-click the intermediate certificate (e.g. Go Daddy Secure Certificate Authority. It’s the one in the middle).
  3. On the Details tab, click Copy to File.
  4. In the Welcome to the Certificate Export Wizard page, click Next.
  5. In the Export File Format page, select Base-64 encoded, and click Next.
  6. Give it a file name, and click Next.
  7. In the Completing the Certificate Export Wizard page, click Finish.

To import the intermediate certificate

  1. In the Citrix ADC configuration GUI, expand Traffic Management, expand SSL, expand Certificates, and click CA Certificates.
  2. On the right, click Install.
  3. Name it Intermediate or similar.
  4. Click the arrow next to Choose File, select Local, and browse to the Intermediate certificate file and open it.
  5. Click Install.

Link Intermediate Certificate to Server Certificate

  1. Go back to Traffic Management > SSL > Certificates >Server Certificates.
  2. On the right, right-click the server certificate, and click Link.
  3. The previously imported Intermediate certificate should already be selected. Click OK.
  4. You might be tempted to link the Intermediate certificate to a Root certificate. Don’t do this. Root certificates are installed on client machines, not on Citrix ADC. Citrix ADC must never send the root certificate to the client device. If you run ssllabs.com against your website, SSL Labs might show Contains anchor. If so, then you linked your intermediate to your root when you shouldn’t have.

Export Certificate Files from Citrix ADC

You can easily export certificate files from the Citrix ADC, and import them to a different Citrix ADC.

  1. In the menu, expand Traffic Management, expand SSL, expand Certificates, and click one of the certificate types.
  2. Move your mouse over the certificate you want to export, and then click the information icon on the far left.
  3. Note the file names. There could be one file name or two file names.
  4. On the left, go to Traffic Management > SSL.
  5. On the right, in the right column, click Manage Certificates / Keys / CSRs.
  6. Find the file(s) in the list, right-click the file, and click Download.
    1. You can only download one file at a time.
    2. In the search area, you can enter “Name:myfilename” to filter the list.
    3. You might have to increase the number of files shown per page, or go to a different page.
  7. Also download the files for any linked intermediate certificate.
  8. You can also use WinSCP to download the SSL certificate files from /nsconfig/ssl.
  9. You can now use the downloaded files to install certificates on a different Citrix ADC.

Replace Management Certificate

You can replace the default management certificate with a new trusted management certificate.

High Availability – When a management certificate is installed on one node of a High Availability pair, the management certificate is synchronized to the other node and used for the other node’s NSIP too. So make sure the management certificate matches the DNS names of both nodes. This is easily doable using a Subject Alternative Name certificate. Here are some SAN names the management certificate should match (note: a wildcard certificate won’t match all of these names):

  • The FQDN for each node’s NSIP. Example: adc01.corp.local and adc02.corp.local
  • The shortnames (left label) for each node’s NSIP. Example: adc01 and adc02
  • The NSIP IP address of each node. Example: 192.168.123.14 and 192.168.123.29
  • If you enabled management access on your SNIPs, add names for the SNIPs:
    • FQDN for the SNIP. Example: adc.corp.local
    • Shortname for the SNIP. Example: adc
    • SNIP IP address. Example: 192.168.123.30

If you prefer to create a separate management certificate for each HA node, then see CTP George Spiers How to secure management access to NetScaler and create unique certificates in a highly available setup.

Request Management Certificate

If you are creating a Subject Alternative Name certificate, it’s probably easiest to request a SAN certificate from an internal CA using the MMC Certificates snap-in on a Windows box.:

  1. Open the MMC certificates snap-in by running certlm.msc on a Windows 2012 or newer machine.
  2. Go to Personal, right-click Certificate, expand All Tasks, and click Request New Certificate.
  3. A web server certificate template should let you specify subject information.
  4. In the top half, change the Subject name > Type drop-down to Common Name. Enter a DNS name, and click Add to move it to the right.
  5. In the bottom half, change the Alternative Name > Type drop-down to either DNS or IP address (v4).
  6. Type in different names or IPs as detailed earlier, and click Add to move them to the right.
  7. Switch to the tab named Private Key.
  8. Expand Key Options, and make sure Mark private key as exportable is checked.
  9. Click OK. Then finish Enrolling the certificate.
  10. Export the certificate and Private Key to a .pfx file.

  11. Then follow one of the procedures below to replace the ADC’s management certificate.

Methods of replacing the Management Certificate

There are two methods of replacing the management certificate:

  • In the Citrix ADC GUI, right-click ns-server-certificate, and click Update. This automatically updates all of the Internal Services bindings too. This method is intended for dedicated management certificates, not wildcard certificates. Notes:
    • You cannot rename the ns-server-certificate in the Citrix ADC GUI. It remains as ns-server-certificate.
    • ns-server-certificate cannot be bound to Virtual Servers, so make sure you are replacing it with a dedicated management certificate.
  • Or manually Bind a new management certificate to each of the Internal Services.

Update Certificate Method

The Update Certificate button method is detailed below:

  1. The Update method doesn’t work with .pfx files so you’ll first have to convert your .pfx to PEM.
    1. In the Citrix ADC Configuration GUI, on the left, expand Traffic Management, and click SSL.
    2. In the right column of the right pane, in the Tools section, click Import PKCS#12.
    3. In the Output File Name field, enter a name for a new file where the converted PEM certificate and private key will be placed. This new file is created under /nsconfig/ssl on the Citrix ADC appliance.
    4. In the PKCS12 File field, click Choose File, and browse to the .pfx file.
    5. In the Import Password field, enter the password you specified when you previously exported the .pfx file.
    6. By default, the private key in the new PEM file is unencrypted. To encrypt the private key, change the Encoding Format selection to AES256 or DES3. This causes the new PEM file to be password protected, and encrypted.
    7. Enter a permanent password for the new PEM file, and click OK.
  2. You can’t update the certificate while connected to the Citrix ADC using https, so make sure you connect using http.
  3. On the left, expand Traffic Management, expand SSL, expand Certificates, and click Server Certificates.
  4. On the right, right-click ns-server-certificate, and click Update.
  5. Check the box next to Click to update the certificate and key.
  6. Click Choose File, and browse to the new PEM (not PFX) management certificate. It could be on the appliance, or it could be on your local machine.
  7. Click Yes to update the certificate.
  8. For the Key File Name, browse to the same PEM certificate file.
  9. If the PEM private key is encrypted, enter the password.
  10. Check the box next to No Domain Check. Click OK.
  11. You can now connect to the Citrix ADC using https protocol. The certificate should be valid (no certificate errors).

Manual Binding Method

The manual Binding to Internal Services method is detailed below:

  1. You can’t update the certificate while connected to the Citrix ADC using https, so make sure you connect using http.
  2. On the left, expand Traffic Management, expand SSL, expand Certificates, and click Server Certificates.
  3. On the right, use the Install button to install the new management certificate, which can be .pfx format, or PEM format.

  4. In the menu, expand Traffic Management, expand Load Balancing, and click Services.
  5. On the right, switch to the tab named Internal Services.
  6. Right-click one of the services, and click Edit.
  7. Scroll down to the Certificate section and click where it says 1 Server Certificate.
  8. Click the button named Add Binding.
  9. In the Select Server Certificate field, click where it says Click to select.
  10. Click the small circle next to the new management certificate and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
  11. Click Bind.
  12. Click Close.
  13. If Default SSL Profile is not enabled, then you can modify the SSL Parameters and/or Ciphers on each of these Internal Services to disable SSLv3 and bind stronger ciphers.

  14. Repeat for each of the rest of the internal services. There should be at least 6 services. Additional Internal Services are created for SNIPs that have management access enabled.

Force Management SSL

By default, administrators can connect to the NSIP using HTTP or SSL. This section details how to disable HTTP.

  1. Connect to the NSIP using https.
  2. On the left, expand System, expand Network, and click IPs.
  3. On the right, right-click your NetScaler IP, and click Edit.
  4. Near the bottom, check the box next to Secure access only, and then click OK.

    set ns ip 10.2.2.126 -gui SECUREONLY
  5. Repeat this procedure on the secondary appliance.
  6. Repeat for any SNIPs that have management access enabled.

Also see:

SSL Certificate – Update

There are two options for updating a certificate:

  • Create or Import a new certificate to Citrix ADC > Traffic Management > SSL > Certificates > Server Certificates. Then find all of the places the original certificate is bound, and manually replace the original certificate binding with the new certificate. This method is obviously prone to errors.
    • You can right-click a certificate and click Show Bindings to see where the certificate is being used.
  • On Citrix ADC, simply right-click the existing certificate, and click Update. This automatically updates all of the bindings. Much faster and easier.

To update a certificate using the Update method:

  1. Create an updated certificate, and export it as .pfx file (with private key). Don’t install the certificate onto Citrix ADC yet, but instead, simply have access to the .pfx file.
  2. In Citrix ADC, navigate to Traffic Management > SSL > Certificates > Server Certificates.
  3. On the right, right-click the certificate you intend to update, and click Update.
  4. Check the box next to Update the certificate and key.
  5. Click Choose File > Local, and browse to the updated .pfx file.
  6. For Key File Name, browse to the same .pfx file.
  7. Enter the .pfx file password.
  8. Click OK. This will automatically update every Virtual Server on which this certificate is bound.
  9. Click OK when told that cert links were broken.
  10. Intermediate certificate – After replacing the certificate, you might have to update the cert link to a new Intermediate certificate.
    1. Right-click the updated certificate, and click Cert Links, to see if it is currently linked to an intermediate certificate.
    2. If not, right-click the updated certificate, and click Link, to link it to an intermediate certificate. If it doesn’t give you an option to link it to, then you’ll first have to install the new intermediate certificate on the Citrix ADC.

Certificates can also be updated in Citrix Application Delivery Management (ADM).

Certificates can be updated from the CLI by running update ssl certKey MyCert. However, the certificate files must be stored somewhere on the appliance, and already be in PEM format.

Next Steps

System Configuration – NetScaler 14.1 – Citrix ADC 13

Last Modified: Apr 25, 2024 @ 1:39 pm

127 Comments

Navigation

💡 = Recently Updated

Change Log

VPX Virtual Hardware

Magnus Andersson Deploy Citrix ADC VPX On Nutanix AHV

VMware Compatibility (source = Support matrix for Citrix ADC at Citrix Docs)

  • Citrix ADC 13.1 build 21.50 and newer support VMware ESXi 7.0 update 3c.
  • Citrix ADC 13.0 build 71 and newer supports ESXi 7.0.

Download and import VPX:

  1. Download Citrix ADC VPX Release 13.1 or NetScaler Release 14.1 Virtual Appliance.

  2. Download one of the VPX Packages for New Installation.

  3. Extract the downloaded .zip file.
  4. In vSphere Client, Deploy OVF template.

Before powering on the appliance, edit the virtual hardware.

  1. If you are licensed for VPX 1000 or higher, increase the CPU count. VPX 1000 is licensed for 4 vCPUs.
  2. Consider setting Memory to 4 GB for each packet engine. A VPX 200 has one packet engine. A VPX 1000 has three packet engines.
  3. Change the NIC Adapter type to VMXNET3 or SR-IOV.
    • Citrix CTX224576 NetScaler VPX Loses Network Connectivity Intermittently on VMware ESXi After Upgrading to Version 12.0 recommends VMXNET3 as a workaround to network connectivity issues in recent Citrix ADC VPX builds.
    • If you choose to use VMXNET3 instead of E1000, make sure all of the NICs are VMXNET3. You cannot mix NIC types.
    • If you already licensed your appliance, jot down the E1000 MAC address, and configure the new VMXNET3 NIC with the same MAC address as the E1000 NIC so you don’t have to redo your license file.
    • To change the NIC Adapter Type, remove the existing NIC, click OK to close Edit Settings, then go back into Edit Settings and Add New Device.
  4. NetScaler 14.1 build 21 and later let you expand size of Hard Disk 1 and after the reboot NetScaler will automatically expand the /var partition, which you can see by running df -h in the shell.

  5. ADC 13.1 build 21.50 and later let you add a second disk to the ADC for storage of logs and crash files. These log and crash files tend to consume disk space on the main drive, which prevents firmware updates, so moving them to a second disk should allow firmware updates to succeed. You can add the second disk at any time, but pre-existing files will not be moved, so it’s best to add the second disk when the VPX is first deployed.

    • The new disk is mounted under /var/crash.
    • The /var/crash directory has several folders that are symlinked from the first drive to the second drive.

  6. NetScaler 14.1 build 21 and later let you expand size of Hard Disk 1 and after the reboot NetScaler will automatically expand the /var partition, which you can see by running df -h in the shell.

  7. Or see NetScaler Article Manually adjust NetScaler VPX Disk Space to use gpart to increase the partition size.

Auto-Provision IP Address

When importing VPX into a hypervisor, you can use VM advanced configuration parameters to set the NSIP. See CTX128250 How to Auto-Provision NetScaler VPX Appliance on a VMware ESX or ESXi Host, and CTX128236 How To Auto-Provision NetScaler VPX on XenServer.

Power On VPX and configure NSIP

  1. After importing the VPX OVF file and changing the NICs to VMXNET3, power on the Citrix ADC VPX appliance.
  2. Configure the management IP from the VM’s console.
  3. Then point your browser to the management IP using either http or https and login as nsroot with password nsroot.
  4. In ADC 13.0 build 67 and newer, you’ll be prompted to change the default nsroot password.

Customer User Experience Improvement Program

  1. You might be prompted to enable the Customer User Experience Improvement Program. Either click Enable, or click Skip.
  2. You can also enable or disable the Customer Experience Improvement Program by going to System > Settings.
  3. On the right is Change CUXIP Settings.
  4. Make your selection and click OK.
  5. See https://www.carlstalhood.com/delivery-controller-cr-and-licensing/#ceip for additional places where CEIP is enabled.
set system parameter -doppler ENABLED

Welcome Wizard

Citrix ADC has a Welcome! Wizard that lets you set the NSIP, hostname, DNS, licensing, etc. It appears automatically the first time you login.

  1. Click the Subnet IP Address box.
  2. You can either enter a SNIP for one of your production interfaces, or you can click Do it later and add SNIPs later after you configure Port Channels and VLANs.
    Note: If you have a dedicated management network, to prevent the management network from being used for outgoing traffic, don’t put a SNIP on the management subnet.

    add ns ip 10.2.2.60 255.255.255.0 -type SNIP
  3. Click the Host Name, DNS IP Address, Time Zone and NTP Server box.
  4. Enter a hostname. In a High Availability pair each node can have a different hostname. You typically create a DNS record that resolves the hostname to the NSIP (management IP).
  5. Enter one or more DNS Server IP addresses. Use the plus icon on the right to add more servers.
  6. Change the time zone to GMT-05:00-CDT-America/Chicago or similar.
  7. Add one or more NTP Servers.
  8. Click Done.

    set ns hostname ns02

add dns nameServer 10.2.2.11

set ns param -timezone "GMT-06:00-CST-America/Chicago"
  9. Click Yes to save and reboot.
  10. Click the Licenses box.
  11. On the far right side of the screen you’ll see the Host ID. You’ll need this to allocate your licenses at mycitrix.com. See below for detailed instructions on how to allocate the license to this Host ID.
  12. On the left, select Upload license files, and click Browse.
  13. Browse to the license file, open it, and click Reboot when prompted.

    • License files are stored in /nsconfig/license.
  14. After the reboot and logging in, a box will pop up showing you the installed license, including Days to Expiration.
  15. Also look in the top left corner to make sure it doesn’t say ADC VPX (Freemium). The number in the parentheses should match the MPX or VPX model number.

  16. 30 days prior to license expiration will be a banner at the top of the GUI. It also sends an SNMP trap.
  17. In ADC 13.1 build 24 and newer, you can adjust the number of days before expiration by clicking Manage Licenses, and then edit the Notification Settings on the bottom.

Licensing – VPX Mac Address

To license a Citrix ADC VPX appliance, you will need its MAC address.

  1. Go to the Configuration tab.
  2. In the right pane, look down for the Host Id field. This is the MAC address you need for license allocation.
  3. Another option is to SSH to the appliance and run shell.
  4. Then run lmutil lmhostid. The MAC address is returned.

License Allocation at MyCitrix.com

Allocate a Citrix ADC VPX license:

  1. Login to http://mycitrix.com.
  2. On the left, click Manage Licenses.
  3. If you are activating an eval license, at the bottom of the page, click Don’t see a new license and enter the eval license key.

  4. In the blue Find a license by… box, change the drop-down to Product name, enter adc in the text box, and click Search.
  5. Select one of your ADC VPX licenses, open the Select an action menu, and click Allocate licenses.
  6. Change the quantity to 1.
  7. In the Host field, enter the Host ID (Mac Address) you got from your VPX appliance.
  8. Click Create license file.
  9. Click Yes, create license file.
  10. Click Download license file and save it somewhere.

In Citrix ADC Standard Edition or higher, some Citrix Gateway Universal Licenses are included in your Citrix ADC platform license. There is no need to allocate a license file for these built-in licenses.

  • Citrix ADC Standard Edition comes with 500 Gateway Universal licenses
  • Citrix ADC Advanced Edition comes with 1,000 Gateway Universal licenses
  • Citrix ADC Premium Edition comes with unlimited Gateway Universal licenses

Citrix Gateway VPX Enterprise Edition does not come with any Gateway Universal Licenses. Citrix Gateway VPX Enterprise Edition is a Gateway-only edition that has fewer features than Citrix ADC Standard Edition.

If you need more Gateway Universal licenses than your ADC Edition provides, then you can acquire Gateway Universal licenses by purchasing Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops (CVAD) Premium Edition, Citrix Endpoint Management Enterprise Edition, or a la carte. Then allocate the additional Citrix Gateway Universal licenses at mycitrix.com.

  1. Search for gateway licenses, select Citrix Gateway Universal License, open the Select an action menu, and click Allocate licenses.
  2. Change the quantity, or leave it set to allocate all licenses.
  3. Enter your appliance hostname (not Mac address). If you have two appliances in a HA pair, allocate these licenses to the first appliance hostname, then reallocate them to the second appliance hostname.

    1. To get a Citrix ADC’s hostname, login to the ADC as nsroot, and then click the gear icon on the top right.
    2. In the third row, notice the case sensitive Host Name.
  4. Click Create license file.
  5. Click Yes, create license file.
  6. Click OK when prompted to download your license file. Save it somewhere you know where you are saving it.
  7. If you have two appliances in a High Availability pair with different hostnames then you will need to return the Citrix Gateway Universal licenses and reallocate them to the other hostname. The Select an action menu has a Return allocations option.

Install Licenses on Appliance

If you haven’t already installed licenses on your appliance, then do the following:

  1. If the Setup wizard is open, click the fourth row for Licenses.
  2. Otherwise, in the Citrix ADC Configuration GUI, on the left, expand System, and click Licenses.
  3. On the top right, click Manage Licenses.
  4. Click Add New License.
  5. If you have a license file, select Upload license files, and then click Browse. Select the license file(s), and click Open.

    • License files are stored in /nsconfig/license.
  6. Click Reboot when prompted.


  7. After reboot, log in. If you allocated and installed your license correctly, then the top left should no longer say Freemium.
  8. A window will appear showing the installed license.

    1. Notice that Maximum ICA Users Allowed is set to Unlimited.
    2. Maximum NetScaler Gateway Users Allowed will vary depending on your Citrix ADC Edition.
    3. Days to Expiration is shown.
  9. Note: the Citrix ADC SNMP counter allnic_tot_rx_mbits must remain less than the licensed bandwidth or packets will drop.

VPX 100% CPU

Citrix ADC VPX packet engine consumes 100% of the hypervisor CPU. VPX 200 and lower only have one packet engine, so it’s probably consuming around 50% CPU.

You can change this behavior by doing the following:

  1. On the left, go to System > Settings.
  2. On the right, in the bottom of the second column, click Change VPX Configuration Settings.
  3. Change the CPU Yield drop-down to YES, and click OK.

  4. After making this change, you can see an immediate drop-off in CPU consumption.

Upgrade Firmware

Citrix CTX241500 Citrix ADC Firmware Release Cycle:

  • Versions that end in x.1 (e.g. 11.1, 12.1, 13.1, 14.1 etc.) get three years of maintenance releases after one year of feature releases (new features).
  • Versions that end in x.0 (e.g. 12.0, 13.0, 14.0, etc.) get one year of maintenance releases after one year of feature releases (new features).

See the Health Check article for the latest firmware versions that resolve security vulnerabilities.

License – Newer firmware is enforcing license subscription dates in the license file. If you don’t have pooled licensing, then check the CSS dates in your license file:

  1. On NetScaler ADC, go to /nsconfig/license and edit your license file.
  2. Make sure the left date is newer than today. If not, then you’ll need to go to http://citrix.com/account and re-download the license file for this appliance. The newer license file should have a newer date.

Classic Policies – Gateway Classic Policies (classic authentication policies, classic Session Policies, classic Authorization Policies, etc.) still work in NetScaler 14.1, so it’s not necessary to convert your Gateway Classic Policies to Gateway Advanced Policies before you upgrade.

In ADC 13.1 and newer, some non-Gateway features have been removed. To verify that your config does not use the removed features, see Citrix’s Github for a validation script. NetScaler 14.1 build 17 and newer have an upgrade option in the GUI to Enable NSPEPI Tool to check the config before upgrading.

  1. Go to the root of the Github ADC-scripts repository, click the green Code button and then click Download ZIP. Unzip it after downloading.
  2. Use WinSCP or similar to upload the files to the ADC. In the nspepi folder, upload the files nspepi and check_invalid_config to /netscaler on the ADC. Also upload the \nspepi\nspepi2 folder to the /netscaler/nspepi2 folder on the ADC. Replace the existing files.
  3. SSH to ADC and run shell.
  4. Run the following commands and then review the output: 
    cd /netscaler
chmod +x check_invalid_config
./check_invalid_config /nsconfig/ns.conf

NetScaler Console (formerly known as Citrix ADM) can upgrade firmware. NetScaler Console can also schedule the firmware upgrade instead of doing it immediately. NetScaler Console does a precheck to make sure there are no upgrade issues. For more details, see Creating Maintenance Tasks at NetScaler Docs.

To upgrade firmware using the NetScaler GUI (source = Upgrade a high availability pair at NetScaler Docs):

  1. To do an ISSU upgrade (zero downtime, no TCP disconnects), NetScaler Docs says that HA Sync VLAN should be configured. In a typical deployment where NSIP is not on a tagged VLAN, set it to VLAN 1. Set it on each node at System > High Availability > Nodes > 0 > Edit.
  2. Download firmware. Ask your Citrix Partner or Citrix Support for recommended versions and builds. You want the Firmware Build, not the VPX (Virtual Appliance).
    Note: Firmware for NetScaler Gateway is identical to firmware for NetScaler. Either one will work on either appliance type.

  3. Watch the Security Bulletins to determine which versions and builds resolve security issues. You can subscribe to the Security Bulletins at http://support.citrix.com by clicking your avatar on the top right after logging in and then clicking My support alerts.

    • Some security updates require additional configuration. For example, CTX330728 requires the nsapimgr_wr.sh command. 
      nsapimgr_wr.sh -ys maxclientForHttpdInternalService=30
  4. Save config – Make sure you Save the config before beginning the upgrade. If you do this on the Primary, then both nodes will save their configs.
  5. License – Transferring the firmware upgrade file to the appliance will be slow unless you license the appliance first. An unlicensed appliance will reduce the maximum upload speed to 20 Mbps.
  6. Backup – Before upgrading the appliance, consider using WinSCP or similar to back up the /flash/nsconfig directory.
  7. Start with the Secondary appliance.
  8. Disk Cleanup – VPXs usually don’t have enough free space to perform the upgrade.

    • NetScaler 14.1 build 21 and later let you expand size of Hard Disk 1 and after the reboot NetScaler will automatically expand the /var partition, which you can see by running df -h in the shell.

    • If you SSH to the appliance, run shell, run cd /var, then you can run the following command to see disk space consumption sorted by highest: 
      du -d 1 | sort -n -r

    • /var/nsinstall has old firmware upgrades that can be deleted.
    • Check /var/netscaler/nsbackup for old backup files.
    • A common consumer of disk is the counter files located in /var/nslog.
    • Also look in /var/core for crash dumps.
  9. In the Citrix ADC GUI, with the top left node System selected, on the right, click System Upgrade.
  10. Click Choose File and browse to the build…tgz file.
  11. NetScaler 14.1 build 17 and newer have an upgrade option to Enable NSPEPI Tool to check the config before upgrading.
  12. Click Upgrade.
  13. The firmware will upload.
  14. You should eventually see a System Upgrade window with text in it. If you previously saved your config, then click Yes when asked to reboot. Otherwise, click No, save your config, and then click Reboot.
  15. Go back to the System node. On the right, click the Reboot button.
  16. Click OK to reboot.
  17. After the reboot, after you login, you can see the firmware version by clicking your name on the top right of the browser window.
  18. Once the Secondary is done, login, go to System, and click the Migration button to start the zero downtime upgrade as detailed at NetScaler Docs. This is a new feature in ADC 13.

    • Or go to System > High Availability > Nodes and do a Force Failover.
  19. Click Start Migration. It will take some time for client connections to drain off of the Primary and move to the upgraded appliance.
  20. You can go back into the Migration window and click the link labelled Click to show migration details to see if the failover is complete or not.

  21. Then upgrade the firmware on the former Primary.
  22. Go to System > HA > Nodes and verify the Synchronization State. If one of them is disabled, then edit the node, and check the box next to Secondary node will fetch the configuration from Primary.

To install firmware by using the command-line interface

  1. To upload the software to the Citrix ADC, use a secure FTP client (e.g. WinSCP) to connect to the appliance.
  2. Create a version directory under /var/nsinstall (e.g. /var/nsinstall/14.1.36.27).
  3. Copy the software from your computer to the /var/nsinstall/<version> (e.g. /var/nsinstall/14.1.26.27) directory on the appliance.
  4. Open a Secure Shell (SSH) client (e.g. Putty) to open an SSH connection to the appliance.
  5. At a command prompt, type shell.
  6. At a command prompt, type cd /var/nsinstall/<version> to change to the nsinstall directory.
  7. To view the contents of the directory, type ls.
  8. To unpack the software, type tar -xvzf build_X_XX.tgz, where build_X_XX.tgz is the name of the build to which you want to upgrade.
  9. To start the installation, at a command prompt, type ./installns.
  10. When the installation is complete, restart Citrix ADC.
  11. When the Citrix ADC restarts, at a command prompt type what or show version to verify successful installation.
  12. To failover the pair without downtime, enter migrate ns and wait for connections to drain off the former primary appliance.
  13. Then repeat these steps to upgrade the former primary appliance.

High Availability

Configure High Availability as soon as possible to ensure that almost all configurations are synchronized across the two appliances. The synchronization exceptions are mainly network interface configurations (e.g. LACP).

High Availability will also sync files between the two appliances. See CTX138748 File Synchronization in NetScaler High Availability Setup for more information.

  1. Prepare the secondary appliance:
    1. The secondary appliance must be the same hardware as the primary appliance.
    2. Login to the second appliance and configure a NSIP.
    3. Don’t configure a SNIP. In Step 2, Subnet IP Address, you can click Do It Later to skip the wizard. You’ll get the SNIP later when you pair it with the primary.
    4. Configure Hostname, Time Zone, and NTP Servers.
    5. Don’t configure DNS since you’ll get those addresses when you pair it. However, if NTP points to a DNS name, then NTP won’t work until you pair the appliance.
    6. License the secondary appliance. The new secondary appliance must be the same edition (License Type) as the former primary appliance.

    7. Upgrade firmware on the secondary appliance. The firmware of both nodes must be identical.
  2. On the secondary appliance, go to System > High Availability > Nodes.
  3. On the right, edit the local node.

    1. Change High Availability Status to STAY SECONDARY and click OK. If you don’t do this then you run the risk of losing your config when you pair the appliances.

      set ha node -hastatus STAYSECONDARY
  4. On the primary appliance, on the left, expand System, expand Network, and click Interfaces.

    1. On the right, look for any interface that is currently DOWN.
    2. You need to disable those disconnected interfaces before enabling High Availability. Right-click the disconnected interface, and click Disable. Repeat for the remaining disconnected interfaces.

      show interface
disable interface 1/1
  5. On the primary appliance, on the left, expand System, expand High Availability, and click Nodes.
  6. On the right, edit node 0.

    1. Change the High Availability Status to STAY PRIMARY, and click OK.
  7. On the right, click Add.

    1. Enter the other Citrix ADC’s NSIP address.
    2. Enter the other Citrix ADC’s login credentials, and click Create.

      add ha node 1 192.168.123.14
      Note: this CLI command must be run separately on each appliance.
  8. If you click the refresh icon near the top right, Synchronization State will probably say IN PROGRESS. Keep refreshing until it says SUCCESS.
  9. Edit Node ID 0 (the local appliance).

    1. Change High Availability State back to ENABLED.
    2. Under Fail-safe Mode, check the box next to Maintain one primary node even when both nodes are unhealthy.
    3. Scroll down, and click OK.

      set ha node -failSafe ON
  10. If you login to the Secondary appliance, you might see a message warning you against making changes. Always apply changes to the Primary appliance.
  11. On the secondary appliance, go to System > High Availability > Nodes and edit the local node 0.
  12. Change it from STAY SECONDARY to ENABLED. Also enable Fail-safe Mode. Click OK.
  13. On the new secondary appliance, go to System > Network > Routes, and make sure you don’t have two 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0 routes. Joining an appliance to an HA pair causes the default route on the primary appliance to sync to the secondary appliance. But, it doesn’t delete the default gateway that was formerly configured on the secondary appliance.
  14. From the Citrix ADC CLI (SSH), run “sh ha node” to see the status. You should see heartbeats on all interfaces. If not, configure VLANs as detailed later..
  15. You can also disable HA heartbeats on specific network interfaces (System > Network > Interfaces).

    1. Note: Make sure HA heartbeats are enabled on at least one interface/channel.
    2. Note: this is an interface configuration, which means this configuration change is not propagated to the other node.
  16. To do an ISSU upgrade (zero downtime, no TCP disconnects), Citrix Docs says that HA Sync VLAN should be configured. In a typical deployment where NSIP is not on a tagged VLAN, set it to VLAN 1. Set it on each node at System > High Availability > Nodes > 0 > Edit.

HA Failover

  1. HA Failover changes the MAC address associated with VIPs and SNIPs. If your firewall (e.g. Cisco ASA) doesn’t like Gratuitous ARP, then see CTX112701 – The Firewall Does not Update the Address Resolution Protocol Table
  2. ADC 13 adds a graceful node Migrate operation which drains sessions instead of drops sessions.
    1. Once migration is started, the two nodes no longer synchronize their configurations. The only way to clear the migration status is to reboot the Secondary. See zero downtime upgrade at Citrix Docs.
    2. Go to System, and click the Migrate button to start the Migrate operation.
    3. Click Start Migration. It will take some time for client connections to drain off of the Primary and move to the upgraded appliance.

      migrate ns
    4. To clear the migration and allow nodes to be failed over again, reboot the secondary.
    5. Go to System > HA > Nodes and verify the Synchronization State. If one of them is disabled, then edit the node, and check the box next to Secondary node will fetch the configuration from Primary.

  3. Instead of Migrate, you can do a Force Failover, which does not require a reboot, and the nodes continue synchronizing.
    1. Go to System > High Availability > Nodes, open the menu named Select Action, and do a Force Failover.

      force ha failover

Port Channels on Physical Citrix ADC MPX

If you are configuring a Citrix ADC MPX (physical appliance), and if you plugged in multiple cables, and if more than one of those cables is configured on the switch for the same VLAN(s), then you must bond the interfaces together by configuring a Port Channel.

  • On the switch, create a Port Channel, preferably with LACP enabled.
  • The Port Channel can be an Access Port (one VLAN), or a Trunk Port (multiple VLANs).
  • On the Citrix ADC, configure LACP on the network interfaces, or create a Channel manually. Both methods are detailed below.

Also see Webinar: Troubleshooting Common Network Related Issues with NetScaler.

LACP Port Channel

To configure Port Channels on a Citrix ADC, you can either enable LACP, or you can configure a Channel manually. If your switch is configured for LACP, do the following on Citrix ADC to enable LACP on the member interfaces.

  1. Go to System > Network > Interfaces.
  2. On the right, edit one of the Port Channel member interfaces.
  3. Scroll down.
  4. Check the box next to Enable LACP.
  5. In the LACP Key field, enter a number. The number you enter here becomes the channel number. For example, if you enter 1, Citrix ADC creates a Channel named LA/1. All member interfaces of the same Port Channel must have the same LACP Key. Click OK when done.
  6. Continue enabling LACP on member interfaces and specifying the key (channel number). If you are connected to two port channels, one set of member interfaces should have LACP Key 1, while the other set of member interfaces should have LACP Key 2.
  7. In an HA pair, you must perform this interface configuration separately on both nodes. The LACP commands are not propagated across the HA pair.
  8. If you go to System > Network > Channels.
  9. You’ll see the LACP Channels on the right. These were created automatically after you set the LACP Key on the interface.
  10. If you edit a Channel, there’s a LACP Details tab that shows you the member interfaces.

Manual Channel

If your switch ports are not configured for LACP, then you can instead create a Channel manually.

  1. Go to System > Network > Channels.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. At the top, choose an unused Channel ID (e.g. LA/1).
  4. On the bottom, in the Bind/Unbind section, click Add.
  5. Click the plus icon next to each member interface to move it to the right. Then click Create.

Redundant Interface Set

You can also configure the Citrix ADC for switch-independent teaming. Create a Channel manually, but select a Channel ID starts with LR instead of LA. This is called Link Redundancy or Redundant Interface Set.

Channel Minimum Throughput

Channels can be configured so that a High Availability failover occurs when the Channel throughput drops below a configured value. For example, if you have four members in a Channel, you might want a High Availability failover to occur when two of the member interfaces fail.

  1. Go to System > Network > Channels, and edit a Channel.
  2. Near the top, enter a minimum threshold value in the Throughput field. If the total bonded throughput drops below this level, a High Availability failover will occur.

Trunk Port and High Availability

If you are trunking multiple VLANs across the channel, and if every VLAN is tagged (no native VLAN), then a special configuration is needed to allow High Availability heartbeats across the channel.

  1. Go to System > Network > VLAN.
  2. Add a VLAN object.
  3. Bind the VLAN to a channel or interface. To bind multiple VLANs to a single interface/channel, the VLANs must be tagged.
  4. Configure one of the VLANs as untagged. Only untag one of the VLANs. Which one you untag doesn’t matter. If your switch doesn’t allow untagged packets, don’t worry, we’ll fix that soon.
  5. If your switch doesn’t allow untagged packets, go to System > Network > Channels, and edit the channel.
  6. Scroll down and switch to the tab named Settings.
  7. Set Tag all VLANs to ON to cause Citrix ADC to tag all packets, including the VLAN you formerly marked as untagged.
    • We essentially moved the VLAN tagging from the VLAN to the Channel/Interface, which means VLAN tagging happens lower in the network stack so High Availability heartbeat packets are also tagged.
  8. Note: in an HA pair, you must perform this Tagall configuration separately on both nodes. The Tagall command is not propagated across the HA pair.

Common physical interface configuration

Here is a common Citrix ADC networking configuration for a physical Citrix ADC MPX that is connected to both internal and DMZ.

Note: If the appliance is connected to both DMZ and internal, then be aware that this configuration essentially bypasses (straddles) the DMZ-to-internal firewall. That’s because if a user connects to a public/DMZ VIP, then Citrix ADC could use an internal SNIP to connect to the internal server: in other words, traffic comes into a DMZ VLAN, but goes out an internal VLAN. A more secure approach is to have different appliances for internal and DMZ. Or use Citrix ADC SDX, partitioning, or traffic domains.

  • 0/1 connected to a dedicated management network. NSIP is on this network.
    • No data on 0/1 – 0/1 is not optimized for high throughput so don’t put data traffic on this interface. If you don’t have a dedicated management network, then put your NSIP on one of the other interfaces (1/1, 10/1, LA/1, etc.) and don’t connect any cables to 0/1.
    • No SNIP on management network – To prevent Citrix ADC from using this dedicated management interface for outbound data traffic, don’t put a SNIP on this management network, and configure the default gateway (route 0.0.0.0) to use a router on a different data network (typically the DMZ VLAN). However, if there’s no SNIP on this VLAN, and if the default gateway is on a different network, then there will be asymmetric routing for management traffic, since inbound management traffic goes in 0/1, but reply traffic goes out LA/1 or LA/2. To work around this problem, enable Mac Based Forwarding, or configure Policy Based Routing. Both of these options are detailed in the next section.
    • Management VLAN tagging – It’s easiest if the switch port for this dedicated management interface is an Access Port (untagged). If VLAN tagging is required, then NSVLAN must be configured on the Citrix ADC.
  • 10/1 and 10/2 in a LACP port channel (LA/1) connected to internal VLAN(s). Static routes to internal networks through a router on one of these internal VLANs.
    • Access Port – If only one internal VLAN, configure the switch ports/channel as an Access Port.
    • Trunk Port – If multiple internal VLANs, configure the switch ports/channel as a Trunk Port. Set one of the VLANs as the channel’s Native VLAN so it doesn’t have to be tagged.
    • Tag HA heartbeat packets – If the networking team is unwilling to configure a Native VLAN on the Trunk Port, then Citrix ADC needs special configuration (tagall) to ensure HA heartbeat packets are tagged.
  • 1/1 and 1/2 in a LACP port channel (LA/2) connected to DMZ VLAN(s). The default gateway (route 0.0.0.0) points to a router on a DMZ VLAN so replies can be sent to Internet clients.
    • Access Port – If only one DMZ VLAN, configure the switch ports/channel as an Access Port.
    • Trunk Port – If multiple DMZ VLANs, configure the switch ports/channel as a Trunk Port. Set one of the VLANs as the channel’s Native VLAN so it doesn’t have to be tagged.
    • Tag HA heartbeat packets – If the networking team is unwilling to configure a Native VLAN on the Trunk Port, then Citrix ADC needs special configuration (tagall) to ensure HA heartbeat packets are tagged.

Dedicated Management Subnet

If your Citrix ADC is connected to multiple subnets, then one of those subnets could be a Dedicated Management Subnet. If you have a subnet that is for NSIP only, and if you don’t want to use the NSIP subnet for data traffic, then you’ll want to move the default route off of the NSIP subnet and onto a different data subnet. However, moving the default route breaks traffic from the NSIP. To work around this problem, create PBRs for the NSIP traffic, including both replies from NSIP, and traffic sourced by the NSIP (e.g. Syslog).

Citrix Blog Post Separating NetScaler Management and Data Traffic for DISA STIGs also uses PBRs.

  1. Go to System > Network > PBRs. You can also search the menu for PBRs.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. Give the PBR a name (e.g. NSIP)
  4. Set the Next Hop Type drop-down to New.
  5. In the Next Hop field, enter the router IP address that is on the same network as the NSIP.
  6. In the Configure IP section, set the first Operation drop-down to =.
  7. In the Source IP Low field, enter the NSIP. This causes the PBR to match all traffic with NSIP as the Source IP address.
    • In an HA pair, the PBR command is synced and applied to both nodes in the pair. To accommodate this, in the Source IP Low field, enter the lower NSIP address. Then in the Source IP High field, enter the higher NSIP address.
  8. You don’t need anything else.
  9. Scroll down, and click Create. This rule routes any traffic with NSIP as source IP address through a router on the NSIP subnet. The default route will be ignored, but only for NSIP traffic.
  10. DNS traffic is special. To handle DNS traffic sourced by the NSIP, create another PBR by right-clicking the existing one, and clicking Add.
  11. Change the name to NSIP-DNS or similar.
  12. Change the Action drop-down to DENY, which tells ADC that traffic matching this PBR should use normal routing instead of overriding to a different gateway.
  13. Change the Priority to a lower number than the original PBR so this rule is matched before the general NSIP rule. Scroll down.
  14. In the Configure IP section, remove all settings.
  15. In the Configure Protocol section, click the Protocol drop-down, and select UDP (17).
  16. Above the two Destination port fields, change the Operation to =.
  17. In the Destination port Low field, enter 53.
  18. Scroll down, and click Create.
  19. Make sure the DENY PBR is higher in the list (lower priority number) than the ALLOW PBR.
  20. Then open the Action menu, and click Apply.
  21. Click Yes to apply.

    add ns pbr NSIP-DNS DENY -destPort = 53 -nextHop 10.2.2.1 -protocol UDP -priority 5
add ns pbr NSIP ALLOW -srcIP = 10.2.2.126-10.2.2.127 -nextHop 10.2.2.1
apply ns pbrs

Floating Management IP

If you want a floating management IP that is always on the Primary appliance, here’s a method of granting management access without adding a SNIP to the management subnet:

  1. Create a Load Balancing Service on HTTP 80 on IP address 127.0.0.1. Note: Citrix ADC doesn’t allow creating a Load Balancing service on IP address 127.0.0.1 and port 443 (SSL).

    • The IP address you enter is 127.0.0.1. When you view the Load Balancing Service, it shows the local NSIP. After a HA failover, the IP Address will change to the other NSIP.
  2. Create a Load Balancing Virtual Server using a VIP on the management subnet. Protocol = SSL. Port number = 443. Bind a certificate.

    1. Bind the loopback:80 service to the Load Balancing Virtual Server. In summary: the front end is 443 SSL, while the LB Service is 80 HTTP.
  3. Add the new VIP to the PBRs so the replies go out the correct interface. Re-apply the PBRs after you modify them.


  4. You should then be able to point your browser to https://Step2VIP to manage the appliance.
  5. You can perform the same loopback trick for 22 SSH. Create a Load Balancing Service on TCP 22 on IP address 127.0.0.1.
  6. Create a Load Balancing Virtual Server using the same management VIP specified earlier. Protocol = TCP. Port number = 22.

    1. Bind the loopback:TCP:22 service to the Load Balancing Virtual Server.
  7. You should then be able to point your SSH Client to <Step2VIP> to manage the appliance.
  8. CLI Commands for the floating management VIP: 
    add service mgmt 127.0.0.1 HTTP 80
add service mgmt-SSH 127.0.0.1 TCP 22
add lb vserver mgmt-SSL SSL 10.2.2.128 443
add lb vserver mgmt-SSH TCP 10.2.2.128 22
bind lb vserver mgmt-SSL mgmt
bind lb vserver mgmt-SSH mgmt-SSH
set ns pbr NSIP-DNS DENY -srcIP = 10.2.2.126-10.2.2.128 -destPort = 53 -protocol UDP -priority 5
set ns pbr NSIP ALLOW -srcIP = 10.2.2.126-10.2.2.128 -nextHop 10.2.2.1
apply ns pbrs

Multiple Subnets / Multiple VLANs

Best practices for network configurations at Citrix Docs and Citrix CTX214033 Networking and VLAN Best Practices for NetScaler discusses many of the same topics detailed in this section.

If this is a physical MPX appliance, see the previous Port Channel section first.

If you only connected Citrix ADC to one subnet (one VLAN) then skip ahead to DNS servers.

Configuration Overview

The general configuration process for multiple subnets is this:

  1. Create a SNIP for each subnet/VLAN.
  2. Create a VLAN object for each subnet/VLAN.
    1. Bind the VLAN object to the SNIP for the subnet.
    2. Bind the VLAN object to the Port Channel or single interface that is configured for the VLAN/subnet.

SNIPs for each VLAN

You will need one SNIP for each connected subnet/VLAN. VLAN objects (tagged or untagged) bind the SNIPs to particular interfaces. Citrix ADC uses the SNIP’s subnet mask to assign IP addresses to particular interfaces.

NSIP Subnet

The NSIP subnet is special, so you won’t be able to bind it to a VLAN. Use the following SNIP/VLAN method for any network that does not have the NSIP. The remaining interfaces will be in VLAN 1, which is the VLAN that the NSIP is in. VLAN 1 is only locally significant so it doesn’t matter if the switch is configured with it or not. Just make sure the switch has a native VLAN configured, or configure the interface as an access port. If you require trunking of every VLAN, including the NSIP VLAN, then additional configuration is required (NSVLAN or Tagall).

Configure Subnets/VLANs

To configure Citrix ADC with multiple connected subnets:

  1. Add a subnet IP for every network the Citrix ADC is connected to, except the dedicated management network. Expand System, expand Network, and click IPs.
  2. On the right, click Add.

    1. Enter the Subnet IP Address for this network/subnet. The SNIP will be the source IP address the Citrix ADC will use when communicating with any other service/server on this network. The Subnet IP is also known as the Interface IP for the network. You will need a separate SNIP for each connected network (VLAN).
    2. Enter the netmask for this network.
    3. Ensure the IP Type is set to Subnet IP. Scroll down.

      add ns ip 172.16.1.11 255.255.255.0 -type SNIP
    4. Under Application Access Controls, decide if you want to enable GUI management on this SNIP. This feature can be particularly useful for High Availability pairs, because when you point your browser to the SNIP, only the primary appliance will respond. However, enabling management access on the SNIP can be a security risk, especially if this is a SNIP for a DMZ network.
    5. Click Create when done. Continue adding SNIPs for each connected network (VLAN).

      set ns ip 172.16.1.11 -mgmtAccess ENABLED -telnet DISABLED -ftp DISABLED
  3. On the left, expand System, expand Network, and click VLANs.
  4. On the right, click Add.

    1. Enter a descriptive VLAN ID. The actual VLAN ID only matters if you intend to tag the traffic. If not tagged, then any ID (except 1) will work.
    2. In the Interface Bindings section, check the box next to one physical interface or channel (e.g. LA/1) that is connected to the network.
    3. If this is a trunk port, select Tagged if the switch port/channel is expecting the VLAN to be tagged.
    4. If your switches do not allow untagged packets, then you will need to use the tagall interface option to tag Citrix ADC High Availability heartbeat packets. See CTX122921 Citrix NetScaler Interface Tagging and Flow of High Availability Packets
    5. If you don’t tag the VLAN, then the Citrix ADC interface/channel is removed from VLAN 1, and instead put in this VLAN ID.
    6. Switch to the tab named IP Bindings.
    7. Check the box next to the Subnet IP for this network. This lets Citrix ADC know which interface is used for which IP subnet. Click Create when done.

      add vlan 50
bind vlan 50 -ifnum LA/1 -IPAddress 172.16.1.11 255.255.255.0
  5. Add static routes to the internal networks through an internal router.
    1. On the left, expand System, expand Network, and click Routes.
    2. On the right, click Add.
    3. Make sure NULL Route is set to No.
    4. Set the Gateway (next hop) to an internal router.
    5. Then click Create.

      add route 10.2.0.0 255.255.0.0 10.2.2.1
  6. The default route should be changed to use a router on the DMZ network (towards the Internet). Before deleting the existing default route, either enable Mac Based Forwarding, or create a Policy Based Route, so that the replies from NSIP can reach your machine. You usually only need to do this for dedicated management networks.
    1. Note: PBR is recommended over MBF, because PBR can handle traffic sourced by NSIP (e.g Syslog traffic), while MBF cannot.
    2. Mac Based Forwarding sends replies out the same interface they came in on. However, MBF ignores the routing table, and doesn’t handle traffic sourced by the NSIP (e.g. LDAP traffic). To enable MBF:
      1. On the left, expand System, and click Settings.
      2. On the right, in the left column, click Configure modes.
      3. Check the box next to MAC Based Forwarding (MBF), and click OK. More info on MAC Based Forwarding can be found at Citrix CTX1329532 FAQ: Citrix NetScaler MAC Based Forwarding (MBF).

        enable mode mbf
  7. Go back to System > Network > Routes.
    1. On the right, delete the 0.0.0.0 route. Don’t do this unless the Citrix ADC has a route, PBR, or MBF to the IP address of the machine you are running the browser on.

      rm route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.2.2.1
    2. Then click Add.
    3. Set the Network to 0.0.0.0, and the Netmask to 0.0.0.0.
    4. Make sure NULL Route is set to No.
    5. Enter the IP address of the DMZ (or data) router, and click Create.

      add route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.1.1

DNS Servers

  1. To configure DNS servers, expand Traffic Management, expand DNS, and click Name Servers.
  2. On the right, click Add.

    1. Enter the IP address of a DNS server, and click Create.
    2. Note: The Citrix ADC must be able ping each of the DNS servers, or they will not be marked as UP. The ping originates from the SNIP.

      add dns nameServer 10.2.2.11
  3. Citrix ADC includes DNS Security Options, which are useful if you use this Citrix ADC to provide DNS services to clients (e.g. DNS Proxy/Load Balancing, GSLB, etc.). You can configure them at Security > DNS Security.

  4. Additional DNS Security Options are detailed at DNS security options at Citrix Docs.

NTP Servers

  1. On the left, expand System, and click NTP Servers.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. Enter the IP Address of your NTP Server (or pool.ntp.org), and click Create.

    add ntp server pool.ntp.org
  4. On the right, open the Action menu, and click NTP Synchronization.
  5. Select ENABLED, and click OK. This starts the NTP daemon in BSD to perform the NTP sync.

    enable ntp sync
  6. You can click the System node to view the System Time.
  7. If you need to manually set the time:
    1. SSH (Putty) to the Citrix ADC appliances.
    2. Run shell to access BSD.
    3. Run date to manually set the time. Run date –help to see the syntax.
    4. Ntpdate –u pool.ntp.org will cause an immediate NTP time update. You’ll need to disable NTP Sync before you can run this command.

SYSLOG Server

Citrix CTX120609 NetScaler Log Rotation and Configuration Using Newsyslog

The Citrix ADC will, by default, store a few syslogs on the local appliance. You can create a syslog policy to also send the syslog entries to an external server, like Citrix Application Delivery Management (ADM).

  1. On the left, expand System, expand Auditing, and click Syslog.
  2. On the right, switch to the Servers tab, and click Add.

    1. Enter a name for the Syslog server.
    2. You can change Server Type to Server Domain Name, and enter a FQDN.
    3. Enter the IP Address or FQDN of the SYSLOG server, and 514 as the port.
    4. Configure the Log Levels you’d like to send to it by clicking CUSTOM – typically select everything except DEBUG.
    5. Select your desired Time Zone and Date Format.
    6. You can optionally enable other logging features. User Configurable Log Messages lets you use Responder policies to generate log entries.
    7. Then click Create.

      add audit syslogAction MySyslogServer 10.2.2.12 -logLevel EMERGENCY ALERT CRITICAL ERROR WARNING -timeZone LOCAL_TIME -userDefinedAuditlog YES
add audit syslogAction MySyslogServer syslog.corp.local -logLevel EMERGENCY ALERT CRITICAL ERROR WARNING -timeZone LOCAL_TIME -userDefinedAuditlog YES
  3. On the right, switch to the Policies tab, and then click Add.

    1. Give the policy a descriptive name,
    2. Change the Expression Type selection to Advanced Policy.
    3. Select the previously created Syslog server.
    4. And then click Create.

      add audit syslogPolicy MySyslogServer true MySyslogServer
  4. While still on the Policies tab, open the Actions menu, and click Classic Policy Global Bindings or Advanced Policy Global Bindings, depending on which one you chose when creating the Syslog policy.

    1. Click Add Binding.
    2. Click where it says Click to select.
    3. Click the radio button next to the Syslog policy you want to bind, and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
    4. Change the Priority to 100 or similar.
    5. If you don’t select anything in Global Bind Type, then it defaults to SYSTEM_GLOBAL.
    6. Click Bind.
    7. Click Done.

      bind audit syslogGlobal -policyName MySyslogServer -priority 100
bind system global MySyslogServer -priority 100

SNMP – MIB, Traps, and Alarms

  1. On the left, expand System, and click SNMP.
  2. On the right, click Change SNMP MIB.

    1. Change the fields as desired. Your SNMP tool (e.g. Citrix Application Delivery Management (ADM)) will read this information. Click OK.
    2. This configuration needs to be repeated on the other node.

      set snmp mib -contact NSAdmins@corp.com -name ns02 -location Corp
  3. Expand System, expand SNMP, and click Community.

    1. On the right, click Add.
    2. Specify a community string, and the Permission, and click Create.

      add snmp community public GET
  4. On the left, under SNMP, click Traps.

    1. On the right, click Add.
    2. Specify a trap destination. The fields will vary for V2 vs V3. Click Create. You’ll have to add the Trap Destinations twice so you can select both Generic and Specific.

      add snmp trap generic 10.2.2.12 -communityName public
add snmp trap specific 10.2.2.12 -communityName public
  5. On the left, under SNMP, click Managers.

    1. On the right, click Add.
    2. Change the selection to Management Network.
    3. Specify the IP of the Management Host, and click Create.

      add snmp manager 10.2.2.12
  6. The Alarms node allows you to enable SNMP Alarms and configure thresholds.

    1. You can Edit an alarm to set thresholds. For example, CPU-USAGE can be set to 90% alarm, and 50% normal, with a Critical severity.

      set snmp alarm CPU-USAGE -thresholdValue 90 -normalValue 50 -severity Critical
    2. You can also configure the MEMORY alarm.

      set snmp alarm MEMORY -thresholdValue 90 -normalValue 50 -severity Critical

From http://www.slideshare.net/masonke/net-scaler-tcpperformancetuningintheaolnetwork: In addition to the usual OIDs, we have found these very useful to warn of potential problems.

  • ifTotXoffSent – .1.3.6.1.4.1.5951.4.1.1.54.1.43
  • ifnicTxStalls – .1.3.6.1.4.1.5951.4.1.1.54.1.45
  • ifErrRxNoBuffs – .1.3.6.1.4.1.5951.4.1.1.54.1.30
  • ifErrTxNoNSB – .1.3.6.1.4.1.5951.4.1.1.54.1.31

Call Home

Citrix Blog Post – Protect Your NetScaler From Disaster With Call Home!: If you have a physical Citrix ADC (MPX or SDX) with an active support contract, you may optionally enable Call Home to automatically notify Citrix Technical Support of hardware and software failures.

Call Home at Citrix Docs has information on how it work.

From the Citrix ADC release notes: Call Home is now enhanced to send Citrix ADC usage metrics to Citrix Insight Services (CIS) periodically. Citrix collects the data to understand how the appliance works and how to improve the product. By default, Call Home sends the metrics once in every 7 days. For more information, see Call Home at Citrix Docs.

To enable Call Home:

  1. On the left, expand System, and click Diagnostics.
  2. On the right, in the left column, in the Technical Support Tools section, click Call Home.
  3. Check the box next to Enable Call Home.
  4. Optionally enter an email address to receive notifications from Citrix Technical Support. Click OK.
  5. If you go back into Call Home, it should indicate if registration succeeded or failed. Successful registration requires an active support contract.

Change nsroot Password

  1. In ADC 13.0 build 67 and newer, you’ll be forced to change the default nsroot password.
  2. If you want to force strong passwords for local accounts, go to System > Settings, and on the right, click Change Global System Settings

    1. Scroll down to the Password section.
    2. You can change Strong Password to Enable Local, and also specify a Min Password Length. Click OK.
  3. Expand System, expand User Administration, and click Users.
  4. On the right, right-click nsroot, and click Change Password.
  5. Specify a new password and click OK.

    set system user nsroot Passw0rd

TCP, HTTP, SSL, and Security Settings

Citrix Docs Introduction to best practices for Citrix ADC MPX, VPX, and SDX security

Best practice settings:

  1. On the left, expand System, and click Settings.
  2. On the right, in the right column, click Change TCP parameters.

    1. Check the box for Window scaling (near the top) and set the Factor to 8.
    2. Scroll down and check the box for Selective Acknowledgement.
    3. Nagle’s algorithm should not be checked.
    4. Click OK.

      set ns tcpParam -WS ENABLED -SACK ENABLED
  3. On the right, click Change HTTP parameters.

    1. Under Cookie, change the selection to Version1. This causes Citrix ADC to set Cookie expiration to a relative time instead of an absolute time.

      set ns param -cookieversion 1
    2. Check the box next to Drop invalid HTTP requests. Note: this might break some web sites.
    3. Scroll down, and click OK.

      set ns httpParam -dropInvalReqs ON
  4. From Citrix CTX232321 Recommended TCP Profile Settings for Full Tunnel VPN/ICAProxy from NetScaler Gateway 11.1 Onwards:
    1. Expand System, and click Profiles.
    2. On the right, on the tab named TCP Profiles, edit the nstcp_default_profile.
    3. Enable Window Scaling with a factor of 8.
    4. Set Minimum RTO (in millisec) = 600.
    5. Set TCP Buffer Size (bytes) = 600000
    6. Set TCP Send Buffer Size (bytes) = 600000
    7. Change TCP Flavor = BIC.
    8. Enable Selective Acknowledgement. Don’t enable Nagle’s algorithm.
    9. Click OK when done.
  5. You can run the following command to see statistics on the dropped packets: 
    nsconmsg -g http_err_noreuse_ -d stats
  6. See CTX209398 Addressing false positives from CBC and MAC vulnerability scans of SSHD to harden SSHD by editing /nsconfig/sshd_config with the following. Then run kill -HUP `cat /var/run/sshd.pid` to restart SSHD. 
    Ciphers aes128-ctr,aes192-ctr,aes256-ctr
MACs hmac-sha1,hmac-ripemd160

Citrix Knowledgebase articles:

The following security configurations are detailed by Jason Samuel at Mitigating DDoS and brute force attacks against a Citrix Netscaler Access Gateway:

  • Maximum logon attempts on Citrix Gateway Virtual Server
  • Rate Limiting for IP.SRC and HTTP.REQ.URL.
  • nstcp_default_XA_XD_profile TCP profile on the Citrix Gateway Virtual Server.
  • Syslog logging
  • External website monitoring
  • Obfuscate the Server header in the HTTP response
  • Disable management access on SNIPs
  • Change nsroot strong password, use LDAP authentication, audit local accounts
  • Don’t enable Enhanced Authentication Feedback
  • SSL – disable SSLv3, deny SSL renegotiation, enable ECDHE ciphers, disable RC4 ciphers.
  • 2-factor authentication
  • Citrix Application Delivery Management (ADM)
  • Review IPS/IDS & Firewall logs

Management Authentication – LDAP

Load balancing of LDAP servers is strongly recommended. If you bind multiple LDAP servers instead of load balancing them, Citrix ADC will try each of the LDAP servers, and for incorrect passwords, will lock out the user sooner than expected. But if you instead load balance your LDAP servers, the authentication attempt will only be sent to one of them.

  1. Expand System, expand Authentication, expand Basic Policies, and then click LDAP.
  2. On the right, switch to the Servers tab. Then click Add.

    1. Enter LDAPS-Corp-Mgmt or similar as the name. If you have multiple domains, you’ll need a separate LDAP Server per domain so make sure you include the domain name. Also, the LDAP policy used for management authentication will be different than the LDAP policy used for Citrix Gateway.
    2. Change the selection to Server IP. Enter the VIP of the Citrix ADC load balancing vServer for LDAP.
    3. Change the Security Type to SSL.
    4. Enter 636 as the Port. Scroll down.
    5. In the Connection Settings section, in the Base DN field, enter your Active Directory DNS domain name in LDAP format.
    6. In the Administrator Bind DN field, enter the credentials of the LDAP bind account in userPrincipalName format.
    7. Enter the Administrator Password (bind account password). Click Test LDAP Reachability. Scroll down.
    8. In the Other Settings section, use the drop-down next to Server Logon Name Attribute, Group Attribute, and Sub Attribute Name to select the default fields for Active Directory.
    9. On the right, check the box next to Allow Password Change.
    10. It is best to restrict access to only members of a specific group. In the Search Filter field, enter memberOf=<GroupDN>. See the example below:
      memberOf=CN=Citrix ADC Administrators,OU=Citrix,DC=corp,DC=local
      You can add :1.2.840.113556.1.4.1941: to the query so it searches through nested groups. Without this, users will need to be direct members of the filtered group.
      memberOf:1.2.840.113556.1.4.1941:=CN=Citrix ADC Administrators,OU=Citrix,DC=corp,DC=local
      Citrix 132802 How to Use the ldapsearch Utility on the NetScaler Gateway Enterprise Edition Appliance to Validate a Search Filter
      An easy way to get the full distinguished name of the group is through Active Directory Users & Computers. Make sure Advanced Features is enabled in the View menu. Double-click the group object. Switch to the Attribute Editor tab. Find Distinguished Name and copy it.
      Scroll down to distinguishedName, double-click it, and then copy it to the clipboard.
      Back on the Citrix ADC, in the Search Filter field, type in memberOf=, and then paste the Distinguished Name right after the equals sign. Don’t worry about spaces.
    11. Scroll down and click More to expand it.
    12. For Nested Group Extraction, if desired, change the selection to Enabled.
    13. Set the Group Name Identifier to samAccountName.
    14. Set Group Search Attribute to –<< New >>–, and enter memberOf.
    15. Set Group Search Sub-Attribute to –<< New >>–, and enter CN.
    16. Example of LDAP Nested Group Search Filter Syntax
    17. Scroll down, and click Create.

      add authentication ldapAction Corp-Mgmt -serverIP 10.2.2.210 -serverPort 636 -ldapBase "dc=corp,dc=local" -ldapBindDn "corp\\ctxsvc" -ldapBindDnPassword Passw0rd -ldapLoginName samaccountname -searchFilter "memberOf=CN=Citrix ADC Admins,CN=Users,DC=corp,DC=local" -groupAttrName memberOf -subAttributeName CN -secType SSL -passwdChange ENABLED
  3. On the left, go to System > Authentication > Advanced Policies > Policy.
  4. On the right, click Add.

    1. Enter the name LDAPS-Corp-Mgmt or similar.
    2. Change the Action Type drop-down to LDAP.
    3. Select the previously created LDAPS-Corp-Mgmt server.
    4. On the bottom, in the Expression area, type in true.
    5. Click Create.

      add authentication Policy LDAPS-Corp-Mgmt -rule true -action LDAPS-Corp-Mgmt
  5. Click Global Bindings in the right pane.

    1. Click where it says Click to select.
    2. Click the radio button next to the newly created LDAP policy, and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
    3. Click Bind.
    4. Click Done.

      bind system global LDAPS-Corp-Mgmt -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT
  6. Under System, expand User Administration, and click Groups.

    1. On the right, click Add.
    2. In the Group Name field, enter the case sensitive name of the Active Directory group containing the Citrix ADC administrators.

      • ADC 13.0 build 41 and newer lets you restrict a group to the CLI only. Note that GUI access requires API permissions.
    3. In the Command Policies section, click Bind.
    4. Select the superuser policy, and click Insert.
    5. Scroll down, and click Create.

      add system group "Citrix ADC Admins" -timeout 900
bind system group "Citrix ADC Admins" -policyName superuser 100
  7. To prevent somebody from creating an nsroot account in LDAP (Active Directory) and then using that external nsroot account to login to ADC, disable external authentication on the local nsroot account.
    1. On the left, go to System > User Administration > Users.
    2. On the right, edit the nsroot user.
    3. At the top of the page, in the System User section, click the pencil icon.
    4. Uncheck the box next to Enable External Authentication and then click Continue.
    5. Click Save and then click Done.
  8. If you logout:
  9. You should be able to login to Citrix ADC using an Active Directory account.

Management Authentication – Two Factor

Citrix ADC supports two factor authentication for management access. The technology is based on nFactor but works in all editions of ADC (no licensing restrictions). Here’s a summary of the configuration steps with more detail coming later:

  1. The first authentication factor must be an Advanced Authentication Policy that is bound globally. Classic Authentication Policies will not work.
  2. Create a Login Schema to ask for the second factor password (i.e. passcode).
    • This Login Schema is for second factor only and has no effect on the first factor. The second factor Login Schema should only ask for a single password prompt. It doesn’t appear to be possible to ask for both factors using the same Login Schema.
    • Login Schema for the second factor does not use the normal nFactor language files and you instead must hard code the password prompt label for the second factor logon field directly in the Login Schema .xml file.

  3. Create an Advanced Authentication Server and Policy for the second factor (e.g. RADIUS).
  4. Create an Authentication Policy Label with Feature Type set to RBA_REQ. This is not the default so make sure you change the Feature Type drop-down field.

    1. When creating the Policy Label, select the Login Schema for the second factor.
    2. Bind the second factor Advanced Authentication Policy to the Policy Label.
  5. Go to Global Bindings for Authentication, edit the existing authentication binding, click Next Factor, and select your new Policy Label. That’s it.

Here are detailed configuration instructions for adding a second authentication factor to the management logon page.

  1. Login Schema XML File:
    1. Point WinSCP to your ADC appliance.
    2. Navigate to /nsconfig/loginschema/LoginSchema and download the SingleAuth.xml file.
    3. Rename the file to MgmtNextFactor.xml or something like that.
    4. Edit the file.
    5. Look for the <Requirement> element with ID of passwd. Then look for the Label and set the Text field to whatever you want displayed on the second password page. Save the file when done.
    6. The Label Text you enter will be shown on the second factor logon page.
    7. In WinSCP, change the directory to /nsconfig/loginschema, which is one directory up from where you downloaded the file.
    8. Upload your modified file.
  2. RADIUS Authentication Server:
    1. Follow the link for instructions to create a RADIUS Server. Only create the Server object. The Policy object will be created later when creating the Authentication Policy Label. 
      add authentication radiusAction RADIUSMgmt -serverName 10.2.2.42 -serverPort 1812 -radKey b746744 -encrypted -encryptmethod ENCMTHD_3
  3. On the left, go to System > Authentication > Advanced Policies > Policy Label.
  4. On the right, click Add.
  5. Name the Policy Label MgmtNextFactor or similar.
  6. In the Login Schema field, click Add.

    1. Name the Login Schema MgmtNextFactor or similar.
    2. In the Authentication Schema field, click the pencil icon.
    3. On the left, select the Login Schema .xml file you uploaded earlier.
    4. On the top right, click the blue Select button. Do NOT click Create on the bottom left until you’ve clicked this blue Select button.
    5. The window collapses showing you the Login Schema file that you selected. Now you can click Create.

      add authentication loginSchema MgmtNextFactor -authenticationSchema "/nsconfig/loginschema/MgmtNextFactor.xml"
  7. Back in the Authentication Policy Label screen, notice that you can edit the Login Schema object from here.
  8. Change the Feature Type drop-down to RBA_REQ. If you don’t do this, then you won’t be able to bind this later.
  9. Click Continue.

    add authentication policylabel MgmtNextFactor -type RBA_REQ -loginSchema MgmtNextFactor
  10. In the Policy Label’s Policy Binding field, click Add.

    1. Name the Authentication Policy RADIUSMgmt or similar.
    2. Change the Action Type drop-down to RADIUS.
    3. Select the RADIUS server that you created earlier. Or you can Add one from here.
    4. In the Expression box, enter the word true and then click Create.

      add authentication Policy RADIUSMgmt -rule true -action RADIUSMgmt
  11. Back in the Policy Label Policy Binding screen, click Bind.

    bind authentication policylabel MgmtNextFactor -policyName RADIUSMgmt -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT
  12. The Authentication Policy Label configuration is complete so click Done.
  13. On the left, go to System > Authentication > Advanced Policies > Policy.
  14. On the right, click the Global Bindings button.
  15. You should already have an Advanced Authentication Policy bound globally. 
    add authentication ldapAction LDAPS-Corp-Mgmt -serverIP 10.2.2.11 -serverPort 636 -ldapBase "dc=corp,dc=local" -ldapBindDn ctxsvc@corp.local -ldapBindDnPassword 5054fc33f673bf4c5c6 -encrypted -encryptmethod ENCMTHD_3 -ldapLoginName sAMAccountName -groupAttrName memberOf -subAttributeName cn -secType SSL -passwdChange ENABLED

add authentication Policy LDAPS-Corp-Mgmt -rule true -action LDAPS-Corp-Mgmt

bind system global LDAPS-Corp-Mgmt -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression END
  16. Right-click your existing global binding and click Edit Binding.
  17. In the Next Factor field, click where it says Click to select.
  18. Click the small circle next to your Management Next Factor Policy Label and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
  19. Back in the Policy Binding screen, click Bind.

    bind system global LDAPS-Corp-Mgmt -priority 100 -nextFactor RADIUSMgmt -gotoPriorityExpression END
  20. Click Done to close the Global Authentication Policy Binding screen.

CLI Prompt

  1. When you connect to the Citrix ADC CLI prompt, by default, the prompt is just a >.
  2. You can run set cli prompt %u@%h to make it the same as a UNIX prompt. See Citrix Docs for the cli prompt syntax.

Backup and Restore

Citrix Application Delivery Management (ADM) can automatically backup your instances. Or you can do it manually:

  1. Save the configuration.
  2. On the left, expand System, and click Backup and Restore.
  3. On the right, click Backup/Import.
  4. Give the backup file a name.
  5. For Level, select Full, and click Backup.
  6. Once the backup is complete, you can download the file.

For a PowerShell script, see John Billekens Create offline backups of the NetScaler config

To restore:

  1. If you want to restore the system, and if the backup file is not currently on the appliance, click the Backup/Import button.
  2. Change the selection to Import.
  3. Browse Local to the previously downloaded backup file.
  4. Then click Backup. This uploads the file to the appliance and adds it to the list of backup files.
  5. Now you can select the backup, and click Restore.

Next Steps

Citrix ADC SDX 14.1 and 13

Last Modified: Mar 6, 2024 @ 6:11 am

34 Comments

Navigation

Change Log

Overview

Citrix CTX226732 Introduction to Citrix NetScaler SDX.

Citrix ADC SDX is normal Citrix ADC hardware, but runs XenServer hypervisor, and several virtual machines that are listed below:

  • Service VM (aka Management Service, aka SVM) – every SDX comes with this Virtual Machine. The SVM enables the SDX Administrator to create additional VMs on XenServer. It’s analogous to vCenter, except each SDX has its own SVM.
    • It’s not possible to build this VM yourself. If it something happens to it, your only choice is to do a factory reset on the physical appliance, which deletes all local virtual machines, and recreates the Service VM.
    • Each Service VM only manages the VMs on the local SDX. Each SDX has its own Service VM. To manage multiple SDXs, use Citrix Application Delivery Management (ADM).
    • XenServer on SDX is a special build. Do not attempt to directly upgrade XenServer, patch XenServer, configure XenServer, etc. Instead, all upgrades and configurations should be performed by the Service VM.
  • Citrix ADC VPX Instances – you create one or more Citrix ADC instances on top of XenServer.
    • The number of Citrix ADC instances you can create is limited by your SDX license. Most models let you buy more instances.
    • The physical resources (CPU, Memory, NICs, SSL Chips, FIPS HSM) of the SDX are partitioned to the different instances.
    • The amount of bandwidth (throughput) available to the VPX instances depends on your license. For example, the 14040 SDX license gives you 40 Gbps of throughput, which is partitioned across the instances.
    • The Citrix ADC instances are created from a normal XenServer .xva template.
    • Each VPX has its own NSIP. Once the VPX is provisioned, you connect to the NSIP, and configure it like a normal Citrix ADC .

If the top left of the window says SDX, then you are logged into the Management Service (aka Service VM, aka SVM). If it says VPX, then you are logged into an instance.

High Availability – Citrix ADC SDX does not have any High Availability capability at the XenServer or SVM layer. In other words, every SDX is completely standalone. To achieve HA, you create Citrix ADC VPX instances on two separate SDXs, and pair the VPX instances in the normal fashion. See Citrix ADC High Availability.

Why Citrix ADC VPX on top of SDX instead of normal hypervisors?

  • VPX on SDX gets physical access to SSL chips. These SSL ASICs are not available on normal hypervisors. SSL Chips provide significantly higher SSL throughput than normal hypervisors.
  • VPX on SDX gets SR-IOV access to the Network interfaces. This enables full 50 Gbps throughput to a single VM.
  • The SDX NICs can filter VLANs to different instances, thus ensuring that VPX instances cannot cross security boundaries by adding the wrong VLANs.
  • Some SDXs have Hardware Security Modules (HSM) for FIPS compliance. The VPXs on SDX can utilize this hardware security resource.

SDX Networking

  • Management port – Every SDX has a 0/1 port.
    • The SVM and XenServer management IP are on this NIC.
    • You need a minimum of two IPs on a management network connected to the 0/1 port.
    • SVM and XenServer cannot use any of the data ports for management.
  • LOM port – Every SDX has a Lights Out Management (LOM) port.
    • The LOM port gives you out-of-band console access to XenServer. Once you’re on XenServer, you can use Xen commands to see the SVM console, and/or VPX consoles.
  • Data ports – The remaining interfaces can be aggregated into port channels. Port channels are configured at XenServer, not from inside the VPXs. Use the Service VM to create channels, and then connect the VPXs to the channels.
  • VPX networking – When VPXs are created, you specify which physical ports to connect the virtual machine to.
    • If you want the VPX NSIP to be on the same subnet as SVM and XenServer, then connect the VPX to 0/1.
    • Connect the VPX to one or more LA/x interfaces (port channels).
    • Once the VPX is created, log into it, and create VLAN objects in the normal fashion. VLAN tagging is handled by the VPX, not XenServer.
    • On SVM, when creating the VPX instance, you can specify a list of allowed VLANs. The VPX administrator is only allowed to add VLANs that are in this list.
  • SVM to NSIP – SVM must be able to communicate with every VPX NSIP. If VPX NSIP is on a different subnet than SVM, then ensure that routing/firewall allows this connection.
    • SDX 13 has a new internal network for SVM-to-VPX communication, thus eliminating the need for VPX and SVM to be on the same subnet.

LOM IP Configuration

For new SDX models 16000 / 9100, LOM is locked for external out of band access by default on power reset. Please run the following command in XS/Dom0 shell. More info at CTX477557 On new SDX, LOM access via the GUI works but configuration settings are disabled / read-only.
/usr/sbin/sdx_bmc_unlock.sh

There are two ways to set the IP address of the Lights Out Module (LOM):

  • ipmitool from the NetScaler SDX XenServer command line
    • For MPX, you can run ipmitool from the BSD shell.
  • Crossover Ethernet cable from a laptop with an IP address in the 192.168.1.0 network.

Ipmitool Method:

  1. For SDX, SSH to the XenServer IP address (not the Service VM IP).
    • For MPX, SSH to the Citrix ADC NSIP.
  2. Default XenServer credentials are root/nsroot.
    1. Default MPX credentials are nsroot/nsroot.
  3. If MPX, run shell. XenServer is already in the shell.
  4. Run the following: 
    ipmitool lan set 1 ipaddr x.x.x.x
ipmitool lan set 1 netmask 255.255.255.0
ipmitool lan set 1 defgw ipaddr x.x.x.x

  5. You should now be able to connect to the LOM using a browser.

Laptop method:

  1. Configure a laptop with static IP address 192.168.1.10 and connect it to the Lights Out Module port.
  2. In a Web browser, type the IP address of the LOM port. For initial configuration, type the LOM port’s default address: http://192.168.1.3
  3. In the User Name and Password boxes, type the administrator credentials. The default username and password are nsroot/nsroot.
  4. In the Menu bar, click Configuration, and then click Network.
  5. Under Options, click Network, and type values for the following parameters:
    1. IP Address—The IP address of the LOM port.
    2. Subnet Mask—The mask used to define the subnet of the LOM port.
    3. Default Gateway—The IP address of the router that connects the appliance to the network.
  6. Click Save.
  7. Disconnect the laptop, and instead connect a cable from a switch to the Lights Out Module.

LOM Firmware Upgrade

The LOM firmware at https://www.citrix.com/downloads/citrix-adc/components/lom-firmware-upgrade.html differs depending on the hardware platform. The LOM firmware for the 8000 series is different than the 11000 series and the 14000 series. Do not mix them up.

SDX automatically upgrades the LOM firmware when you upgrade the SDX firmware. For SDX firmware older than 12.0 build 57, update the LOM firmware manually.

Citrix ADC MPX has a new method for updating LOM as detailed at CTX218264 How to Upgrade the LOM Firmware on Any NetScaler MPX Platform

To manually update the LOM firmware:

  1. Determine which firmware level you are currently running. You can point your browser to the LOM and login to the see the firmware level. Or you can run ipmitool mc info from the XenServer shell.
  2. If your LOM firmware is older than 3.0.2, follow the instructions at CTX137970 How to Upgrade LOM Firmware on NetScaler 115xx and CloudBridge 4xxx/5xxx Model Families From AMI 2.52 Using CLI to upgrade the firmware.
  3. If your LOM firmware is version 3.02 or later, follow the instructions at CTX218514 How to Upgrade LOM Firmware to the latest 14k_xxx revision on NetScaler 14xxx, NetScaler 25xxx Model Families, CloudBridge 5100, T1120 and T1300 to upgrade the firmware.
  4. If your firmware is version 3.0.2 or later, you can upgrade to 3.39. Download LOM firmware.
  5. In the LOM, click the Maintenance menu and then click Firmware Update.
  6. On the right, click Enter Update Mode.
  7. Click OK when prompted to enter update mode.
  8. Click Choose File, and browse to the extracted bin file.
  9. After the file is uploaded, click Upload Firmware.
  10. Click Start Upgrade.
  11. The Upgrade progress will be displayed.
  12. After upgrade is complete, click OK to acknowledge the 1 minute message.
  13. The LOM will reboot.
  14. After the reboot, login and notice that the LOM firmware is now 3.39.

SDX IP Configuration

The default IP address for the SVM Management Service is 192.168.100.1/16 bound to interface 0/1. Use a laptop with crossover cable to reconfigure the IP. Point your browser to http://192.168.100.1. Default login is nsroot/nsroot.

The default IP address for XenServer is 192.168.100.2/16. Default login is root/nsroot.

  • There should be no need to connect to XenServer directly. Instead, all XenServer configuration (e.g. create new virtual machine) is performed through the Management Service (SVM).
  • When you set the SVM’s IP Address, there is also a field to also set the XenServer IP address (aka Application supportability IP). XenServer IP and SVM Management Service IP must be on the same subnet.

To change the XenServer IP, make the change through the SVM as detailed below:

  1. Point a browser to http://192.168.100.1, and login as nsroot/nsroot.
  2. When you first login to the SDX SVM Management Service, the Welcome! Wizard appears. Click the first row for Management Network.
  3. Configure the IP addresses.
    1. Application supportability IP = XenServer. You’ll almost never connect to this IP.
    2. Appliance Management IP = SVM (Management Service). This is the IP you’ll normally use to manage SDX.
    3. The bottom has an Additional DNS checkbox that lets you enter more DNS servers.
    4. You can change the nsroot password at this time, or change it later after LDAP is configured.
  4. Click Done.
  5. Click the System Settings box.
  6. Enter a Host Name.
  7. You can optionally check Secure Access only to ensure that administrators must use https when connecting to the SVM.
  8. Select the time zone, and click Continue.
  9. Click the Licenses box.
  10. Click Add License File.
  11. Allocate Citrix ADC SDX licenses at mycitrix.com using the normal license allocation process.
    1. The SDX license defines the number of instances you can create.
    2. The SDX license also defines the amount of throughput available to the instances.
    3. The SDX license is allocated to ANY, which means you can use the same license on all SDX hardware, assuming all of them are purchased with the same license model.
  12. Click Browse to upload the license file. After uploading, click Finish and it should apply automatically.
  13. Or you can click Apply Licenses.
  14. Then click Continue to close the Welcome! wizard.

Another way to change the SVM Management Service IP address is through the serial port. This is actually the XenServer Dom0 console. Once logged in to XenServer, run ssh 169.254.0.10 to access the SVM Management Service virtual machine. Then follow instructions at CTX130496 How to Configure the Service Virtual Machine on NetScaler SDX to change the IP.

The console of the SVM Management Service virtual machine can be reached by running the following command in the XenServer Dom0 shell (SSH or console):

xe vm-list params=name-label,dom-id name-label="Management Service VM"

Then run /usr/lib64/xen/bin/xenconsole <dom-id>

SDX Platform Software Bundle

If your Citrix ADC SDX is not version 11 or newer, and if your Citrix ADC SDX is running 10.5 build 57 or later, then do the following:

  1. Go to Management Service > Software Images, and upload a Single Bundle older than 13. The single bundle is around 1.5 GB.
    Note: Direct upgrade from version 10.5 to 13.0 is not supported. You must first upgrade from 10.5 to 11.0 or 11.1 or 12.0 or 12.1, and then upgrade to SDX 13.0.
  2. On the left, click System.
  3. On the right, click Upgrade Management Service. Select the Single Bundle upgrade file you already uploaded.
  4. Management Service will upgrade and reboot. A few minutes after that, XenServer will be upgraded. Be patient as there’s no notification that the box will reboot again.

Starting with SDX 11.0, all updates are bundled together and installed at once.

  1. Make sure your Management Service (SVM) is running SDX 10.5 build 57 or newer.
    Note: Direct upgrade from version 10.5 to 13.0 is not supported. You must first upgrade from 10.5 to 11.0 or 11.1 or 12.0 or 12.1, and then upgrade to SDX 13.0.
  2. Download the latest SDX Platform Software bundle from Downloads > Citrix ADC > Release 13 > Service Delivery Appliances.

  3. Login to the SDX Management Service and go to Configuration > System.
  4. On the right, in the right column, click Upgrade Appliance.
  5. Browse to the build-sdx-13.0.tgz software bundle, and click OK.
  6. It will take some time to upload the SDX image.
  7. It should show you the estimated installation time.
  8. Check boxes next to the instances that need configs saved.
  9. Click Upgrade.
  10. Click Yes to continue with the upgrade.
  11. The SVM Management Service displays installation progress. It will take a while.
  12. Once the upgrade is complete, click Login.

  13. If you click the Configuration tab, the Information page will be displayed showing the version of XenServer, Management Service (Build), etc.

FIPS

If your SDX is a FIPS appliance, see Citrix Blog Post Meet Security Compliance and Be Scalable with NetScaler FIPS SDX for detailed HSM setup instructions:

  1. Zeroize the HSM
  2. Upgrade HSM firmware
  3. Create HSM partitions
  4. Create Citrix ADC instance and attach HSM partition:
    • Only one CPU core
  5. From inside Citrix ADC instance:
    1. Reset FIPS
    2. Initialize FIPS
    3. Create FIPS Key
    4. Create HA Pair and synchronize FIPS

DNS Servers

To add more than one DNS server, do the following:

  1. In the SVM Management Service, on the left, click System.
  2. On the right, click Network Configuration.
  3. On the bottom, there’s a checkbox for Additional DNS that lets you put in more DNS servers.
  4. Click OK when done.

SVM Management Service NTP

  1. On the Configuration tab, in the navigation pane, expand System, and then click NTP Servers.
  2. To add a new NTP server, in the right pane, click Add.
  3. In the Create NTP Server dialog box, enter the NTP server name (e.g. pool.ntp.org), and click Create.
  4. Click Yes when prompted to restart NTP Synchronization.
  5. In the right pane, click NTP Synchronization.
  6. In the NTP Synchronization dialog box, select Enable NTP Sync. Click OK.
  7. Click Yes when asked to restart the SVM Management Service. This only restarts the SVM. Other instances/VMs on the same box won’t be affected.

Licensing

If you haven’t already licensed your SDX, you can upload a license file to the SDX appliance.

  1. Login to http://mycitrix.com and go to Manage Licenses.
  2. In the New Licenses section, find a Citrix ADC SDX license, and allocate it. There is no need to specify a hostname. You can use the same license file on multiple SDX appliances.

  3. On the SDX Configuration tab, in the navigation pane, expand System, and then click Licenses.
  4. In the right pane, click Add License File.
  5. Click Browse and upload the allocated license file.
  6. Click Finish.
  7. If you refresh your browser, the number shown on the top left of the window will indicate your licensed model number.

SVM Management Service Alerting

Syslog

  1. On the Configuration tab, expand System > Auditing, and click Syslog Servers.
  2. In the right pane, click the Add button.

    1. Enter a name for the Syslog server.
    2. Enter the IP address of the Syslog server.
    3. Change the Choose Log Level section to Custom, and select log levels.
  3. Click Create.
  4. On the right is Syslog Parameters.
  5. You can configure the Date Format and Time Zone. Click OK.

Mail Notification

  1. On the Configuration tab, expand System > Notifications, and click Email.
  2. In the right pane, on the Email Servers tab, click Add.
  3. Enter the DNS name of the mail server, and click Create.
  4. In the right pane, switch to the tab named Email Distribution List, and click Add.
  5. In the Create Email Distribution List page:
    1. Enter a name for the mail profile.
    2. Select the Email Server to use.
    3. Enter the destination email address (distribution list).
  6. Click Create.
  7. SDX 13 has a Test button for the Distribution List.

System SNMP

  1. Go to System > SNMP.
  2. On the right, click Configure SNMP MIB.
  3. Enter asset information, and click OK. Your SNMP management software will read this information.
  4. Under the SNMP node, configure normal SNMP including: Trap Destinations, Managers, Alarms, etc.

  5. MIBs can be downloaded from the Downloads tab.

Instance SNMP

  1. The instances will send SNMP traps to the Service VM. To get alerted for these traps, in the Configuration page, in the navigation pane, expand Citrix ADC, expand Events, and click Event Rules.
  2. On the right, click Add.

    1. Give the rule a name.
    2. Move the Major and Critical severities to the right.
    3. Scroll down.
    4. For the other sections, if you don’t configure anything then you will receive alerts for all of the devices, categories, and failure objects. If you configure any of them, then only the configured entities will be alerted.
    5. Scroll down.
    6. Click Save.
  3. Select an Email Distribution List, and click Done.

SVM Management Service nsroot Password and AAA

Change nsroot password

  1. On the Configuration tab, in the navigation pane, expand System, expand User Administration, and then click Users.
  2. On the right, in the Users pane, right-click the nsroot user account, and then click Edit.
  3. In the Configure System User dialog box, check the box next to Change Password.
  4. In Password and Confirm Password, enter the password of your choice.
  5. You can optionally Configure User Session Timeout.
  6. Scroll down and click OK.

AAA Authentication

To enable LDAP authentication for the Service VM:

  1. Go to Configuration > System > Authentication > LDAP.
  2. In the right pane, click Add.
  3. This is configured identically to Citrix ADC.
    1. Enter a Load Balancing VIP for LDAP servers.
    2. Change the Security Type to SSL, and Port to 636.
    3. Note: if you want to Validate LDAP Certificate, then there are special instructions for installing the root certificate on the SVM. See Installing CA certificates to the SDX/SVM for LDAPS user authentication at Citrix Discussions for details.
    4. Scroll down.
    5. Enter the Base DN in LDAP format.
    6. Enter the bind account in UPN format, or Domain\Username format, or DN format.
    7. Check the box for Enable Change Password.
    8. Click Retrieve Attributes, and scroll down.
    9. For Server Logon Attribute, select sAMAccountName.
    10. For Group Attribute, select memberOf.
    11. For Sub Attribute Name, select CN.
    12. To prevent unauthorized users from logging in, configure a Search Filter as detailed in the LDAP post. Scroll down.
  4. Click Create.
  5. Expand System, expand User Administration, and click Groups.
  6. On the right, click Add.
  7. In the Create System Group page:
    1. Enter the case sensitive name of the Active Directory group.
    2. Check the box next to System Access.
    3. Configure the Session Timeout.
    4. Optionally Configure User Session Timeout.
  8. Click Create.
  9. On the left, under System, click User Administration.
  10. On the right, click User Lockout Configuration.

    1. If desired, check the box next to Enable User Lockout, and configure the maximum logon attempts. Click OK.
  11. On the left, under System, click Authentication.
  12. On the right, click Authentication Configuration.

    1. Change the Server Type drop-down to EXTERNAL, and click Insert.
    2. Select the LDAP server you created earlier, and click OK at the top of the page.
    3. Make sure Enable fallback is enabled, and click OK.

SSL Certificate and Encryption

Replace SDX SVM Management Service Certificate

To replace the SVM Management Service certificate:

  1. PEM format: The certificate must be in PEM format. The SVM Management Service does not provide any mechanism for converting a PFX file to PEM. You can convert from PFX to PEM by using the Import PKCS#12 task in a Citrix ADC instance.
  2. On the left, click System.
  3. On the right, in the left column, in the Set Up Appliance section, click Install SSL Certificate.
  4. Select the certificate and key files in PEM format. If the key file is encrypted, enter the password. Then click OK.
  5. The SVM Management Service will restart. Only the SVM restarts; the Citrix ADC instances do not restart.

Force HTTPS to the SVM Management Service

  1. Connect to the SVM using HTTPS. You can’t make this upcoming change if you are connected using HTTP.
  2. On the Configuration tab, click System.
  3. On the right, click Change System Settings.
  4. Check the box next to Secure Access Only, and click OK. This forces you to use HTTPS when connecting to the SVM Management Service.

SSL Encrypt SVM Management Service to Citrix ADC Communication

From CTX134973 How to Secure Network Traffic from Service Virtual Machine to NetScaler VPX Instances: Communication from the SVM Management Service to the Citrix ADC VPX instances is HTTP by default. If you want to configure HTTPS access for the Citrix ADC VPX instances, then you have to secure the network traffic between the SVM Management Service and Citrix ADC VPX instances. If you do not secure the network traffic from the SVM Management Service configuration, then the Citrix ADC VPX Instance State appears as Out of Service and the Status shows Inventory from instance failed.

  1. Log on to the SVM Management Service .
  2. On the Configuration tab, click System.
  3. On the right, click Change System Settings.
  4. Change the Communication with Citrix ADC Instance drop-down to https, as shown in the following screen shot:
  5. Run the following command on the Citrix ADC VPX instance, to change the Management Access (-gui) to SECUREONLY: 
    set ns ip ipaddress -gui SECUREONLY
  6. Or in the Citrix ADC VPX instance GUI, go to Network > IPs, edit the NSIP, and then check the box next to Secure access only.

SDX/XenServer LACP Channels

For an overview of Citrix ADC SDX networking, see Citrix CTX226732 Introduction to Citrix NetScaler SDX

To use LACP, configure Channels in the SVM Management Service, which creates them in XenServer. Then when provisioning a VPX instance, connect it to the Channel.

  1. In the SVM Management Service, on the Configuration tab, expand System, and click Channels.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. In the Create Channel page:
    1. Select a Channel ID.
    2. For Type, select LACP or STATIC. The other two options are for switch independent load balancing and are only supported for the management ports.
    3. In the Interfaces section, move the Channel Member interfaces to the right by clicking the right arrow.
    4. In the Settings section, for LACP you can select Long or Short, depending on switch configuration. Long is the default.
  4. Click Create when done.
  5. Click Yes when asked to proceed.
  6. The channel will then be created on XenServer.

VPX Instances – Provision

Admin profile

Admin profiles specify the nsroot user credentials for the instances. SVM Management Service uses these nsroot credentials later when communicating with the VPX instances to retrieve configuration data.

The default admin profile for an instance specifies a user name of nsroot, and the password is also nsroot. To specify a different nsroot password, create a new admin profile.

  • You can create a single admin profile that is used by all instances. To delegate administration, don’t give out the nsroot password to the instance administrators. One option is to enable LDAP inside the instance before granting access to a different department.
  • When creating an instance, there’s an option to create a non-nsroot account, which has almost the same permissions as nsroot, but leaves out some SDX specific features (e.g interfaces). This is another option for delegating administration to a different team.
  • Or you can create different admin profiles for different instances, which allows you to inform the different departments the nsroot password for their VPX instances.

Important: Do not change the password directly on the Citrix ADC VPX instance. If you do so, the instance becomes unreachable from the SVM Management Service. To change a password, first create a new admin profile, and then modify the Citrix ADC instance, selecting this new profile from the Admin Profile list.

  1. On the Configuration tab, in the navigation pane, expand Citrix ADC, and then click Admin Profiles.
  2. In the Admin Profiles pane, click Add.
  3. In the Create Admin Profile dialog box, set the following parameters:
    • Profile Name*—Name of the admin profile.
    • User Name—User name used to log on to the Citrix ADC instances. The user name of the default profile is nsroot and cannot be changed.
    • Password*—The password used to log on to the Citrix ADC instance. Maximum length: 31 characters.
    • Confirm Password*—The password used to log on to the Citrix ADC instance.
    • Use global settings for Citrix ADC communication – you can uncheck this box and change the protocol to https.
    • SNMP v2 or v3 – for SNMP communication between the SVM and the VPX
    • Community
  4. Click Create. The admin profile you created appears in the Admin Profiles pane.

Upload a Citrix ADC VPX .xva file for XenServer

You must upload a Citrix ADC VPX .xva file to the SDX appliance before provisioning the Citrix ADC VPX instances. XVA files are only used when creating a new instance. Once the instance is created, use normal firmware upgrade procedures.

  1. Go to the Citrix ADC VPX download page and select a VPX Release.
  2. Download the Citrix ADC VPX for XenServer.
  3. After downloading, use 7-zip to extract the .gz file. You can’t upload the .gz file to SVM. You must extract it first.

  4. On the SVM’s Configuration tab, in the navigation pane, expand Citrix ADC, and then click Software Images.
  5. On the right, switch to the tab named XVA Files, and then click Upload.
  6. In the Upload ADC Instance XVA dialog box, click Browse and select the XVA image file that you want to upload. Click Upload.
  7. The XVA image file appears in the XVA Files pane after it is uploaded.

Provision a Citrix ADC instance

  1. In the SVM Management Service, go to the Dashboard page.

    1. On the bottom right, the System Resource Utilization pane shows you the amount of physical resources that are available for allocation.
    2. Click Core Allocation to see the number of cores available for assignment.
    3. Click Crypto Capacity to see the SSL capacity.
  2. On the Configuration tab, in the navigation pane, expand Citrix ADC, and then click Instances.
  3. In the Citrix ADC Instances pane, click Add.
  4. In the Provision Citrix ADC section, enter a name for the instance.
  5. SDX 13 has an option for Manage through internal network which means that the VPX no longer needs NSIP on the same subnet as the SDX SVM.
  6. Enter the NSIP, mask, and Gateway.
  7. Nexthop to Management Service – If the instance’s NSIP is on a different subnet than the SVM IP, and if Manage through internal network is not checked, and if the instance’s default gateway is on a different network than the NSIP, then enter a next hop router address on the instance’s NSIP network, so the instance can respond to the SDX SVM Management Service.
  8. In the XVA File field, you can Browse > Local to select an XVA file on your local machine that hasn’t been uploaded to SDX yet. Or you can Browse > Appliance, and select an XVA file that has already been uploaded to SDX.

  9. Select an Admin Profile created earlier. Or you can click the Add button or plus icon to create a new Admin Profile.
  10. Enter a Description. Scroll down.
  11. In the License Allocation section, change the Feature License to Platinum.
  12. For Throughput, partition your licensed bandwidth. If you are licensed for 40 Gbps, make sure the total of all VPX instances does not exceed that number.
  13. For Allocation Mode, Burstable is also an option. Fixed bandwidth can’t be shared with other instances. Burstable can be shared. See Bandwidth Metering in SDX at Citrix Docs.
  14. In the Crypto Allocation field, allocate at least one multiple of Asymmetric Crypto Units. Clicking the up arrow should increment in the correct multiple. See Managing Crypto Capacity at Citrix Docs. You can find the minimum by dividing the total Asymmetric Crypto Units by the Crypto Virtual Interfaces. Enter in a multiple of this result.
  15. In the Resource Allocation section, consider changing the Total Memory to 4096.
  16. For CPU, for production instances, select one of the Dedicated options. Dev/Test instances can use Shared CPU. Then scroll down.
  17. In the Instance Administration section, you can optionally add an instance administrator has has fewer permissions than the nsroot account.. Enter a new local account that will be created on the VPX. Scroll down.
  18. In the Network Settings section, if the VPX NSIP is on the same network as the SDX SVM, then leave 0/1 selected.
  19. Click Add to connect the VPX to more interfaces.
  20. If you have Port Channels, select one of the LA interfaces.
  21. If you configure any VLAN settings here, then XenServer filters the VLANs available to the VPX instance. Changing the VLAN filtering settings later probably requires a reboot. Note: VLAN tagging is configured inside the instance, and not here.
  22. Click Add. Continue adding the interfaces needed by your new VPX.
  23. In the Management VLAN Settings section, do not configure anything in this section unless you need to tag the NSIP VLAN.
  24. Click Done.
  25. After a couple minutes the instance will be created. Look in the bottom right of Chrome to see the status.
  26. Click Close when it’s done booting.
  27. If you go to the Dashboard page…
  28. If you click an instance name, you can see how the instance is connected to the physical NICs.
  29. Back in Configuration > Citrix ADC > Instances, in your Instances list, click the blue IP address link to launch the VPX management console. Or, simply point your browser to the NSIP and login.
  30. Do the following at a minimum (instructions are in the Citrix ADC System Configuration article):
    1. Create Policy Based Route for the NSIP – System > Settings > Network > PBRs
    2. Add SNIPs for each VLAN – System > Network > IPs
    3. Add VLANs and bind to SNIPs – System > Network > VLANs
    4. Create Static Routes for internal networks – System > Network > Routes
    5. Change default gateway – System > Network > Routes > 0.0.0.0
    6. Create another instance on a different SDX, and High Availability pair them together – System > High Availability

VPX Instances – Manage

You may login to the VPX instance and configure everything normally. SDX also offers the ability to manage IP addresses and SSL certificates, from SDX, rather than from inside the VPX instance. The SDX SVM Management Service does not have the ability to create certificates, so it’s probably best to do that from within the VPX instance.

View the console of a Citrix ADC instance

  1. Connect to the SDX SVM Management Service using https.
    • Viewing the virtual machine console might not work unless you install a valid certificate for the SDX Management Service.
  2. In the SVM Management Service, go to Configuration > Citrix ADC > Instances.
  3. On the right, right-click an instance, and click Console.
  4. The instance console then appears.
  5. Another option is to use the Lights Out Module, and the xl console command, as detailed at Citrix Blog Post SDX Remote Console Access of VIs.

Start, stop, delete, or restart a Citrix ADC instance

  1. On the Configuration tab, in the navigation pane, expand Citrix ADC, and click Instances.
  2. On the right, in the Instances pane, right-click the Citrix ADC instance on which you want to perform the operation, and then click Start or Shut Down or Delete or Reboot.
  3. In the Confirm message box, click Yes.

Create a Subnet IP Address on a Citrix ADC Instance

  1. On the Configuration tab, in the navigation pane, click Citrix ADC.
  2. On the right, in the Citrix ADC Configuration pane, click Create IP.
  3. In the Create Citrix ADC IP dialog box, specify values for the following parameters.
    • IP Address* – Specify the IP address assigned as the SNIP address.
    • Netmask* – Specify the subnet mask associated with the SNIP address.
    • Type* – Specify the type of IP address. Possible values: SNIP.
    • Save Configuration* – Specify whether the configuration should be saved on the Citrix ADC . Default value is false.
    • Instance IP Address* – Specify the IP address of the Citrix ADC instance on which this SNIP will be created.
  4. Click Create.

Create a VLAN on a Citrix ADC instance

  1. Go to Citrix ADC > Instances.
  2. On the right, right-click an instance, and click VLAN Bindings.
  3. In the VLAN Bindings page, click Add.
  4. Enter a VLAN ID, and select an interface.
  5. Check the box for Tagged if needed.
  6. Notice there’s no way to bind a SNIP to the VLAN. You do that inside the instance. Click Create.

Save the configuration of a Citrix ADC instance

  1. On the Configuration tab, in the navigation pane, click Citrix ADC.
  2. On the right, in the Citrix ADC pane, click Save Configuration.
  3. In the Save Configuration dialog box, in Instance IP Address, select the IP addresses of the Citrix ADC instances whose configuration you want to save.
  4. Click OK.

Change NSIP of VPX Instance

The best way to change the NSIP is to edit the instance. Go to Configuration > Citrix ADC > Instances, right-click an instance, and click Edit.

Then change the IPv4 Address at the top of the page. Click Done. SVM will push the configuration change to the instance.

If you change NSIP inside of VPX instead of Editing the Instance in the SVM Management Service, see article CTX139206 How to Change NSIP of VPX Instance in SDX to adjust the XenServer settings.

Enable Call Home

  1. On the Configuration tab, in the navigation pane, click the Citrix ADC node.
  2. On the right, click Call Home.
  3. Enter an email address to receive communications regarding Citrix ADC Call Home.
  4. Check the box next to Enable Call Home.
  5. Click Add to select instances.
  6. Select the instances to enable Call Home by moving them to the right, and then click OK.
  7. You can view the status of Call Home by expanding Citrix ADC, and clicking Call Home.
  8. The right pane indicates if it’s enabled or not. You can also configure Call Home from here.

VPX Instance – Firmware Upgrade

Upload Citrix ADC Firmware Build Files

To upgrade a VPX instance from the SVM Management Service, first upload the firmware build file.

  1. Download the Citrix ADC firmware using the normal method. It’s in the Build section.
  2. On the SDX, in the Configuration tab, on the left, expand Citrix ADC, and click Software Images.
  3. On the right, in the Software Images tab, click Upload.
  4. Browse to the build-##.#…tgz file, and click Open.
  5. The uploaded image is shown in the list.

Upgrade Multiple Citrix ADC VPX Instances

You can upgrade multiple instances at the same time:

  1. To prevent any loss of the configuration running on the instance that you want to upgrade, save the configuration on the instance before you upgrade the instance.
  2. On the Configuration tab, in the navigation pane, click Citrix ADC.
  3. On the right, click Upgrade.
  4. Select a Software Image that you already uploaded.
  5. Select the instances that you want to upgrade.
  6. Click OK.

  7. Click Close when done.
  8. You can view the Task Log at Diagnostics > Task Log.

SVM Management Service Monitoring

  1. To view syslog, in the navigation pane, expand System, click Auditing, and then in the right pane click Syslog Message.
  2. To view the task log, in the navigation pane, expand Diagnostics, and then click Task Log.
  3. To view SVM Management Service events, on the Configuration tab, expand System and click Events.
  4. Citrix ADC > Entities lets you see the various Load Balancing entities configured on the instances. You might have to click Poll Now to get them to show up.
  5. To view instance alerts, go to Citrix ADC > Events > All Events.
  6. There is also event reporting.

SVM Management Service Backups

The SDX appliance automatically keeps three backups of the SVM Management Service configuration that are taken daily at 12:30 am.

Backups in Citrix ADC SDX contain the following:

  • Single bundle image
  • Citrix ADC XVA image
  • Citrix ADC upgrade image
  • SVM Management Service image
  • SVM Management Service configuration
  • Citrix ADC SDX configuration
  • Citrix ADC configuration

You can go to Management Service > Backup Files to backup or restore the SDX appliance’s configuration. And you can download the backup files.

You can configure the number of retained backups by clicking System on the left, and then clicking Backup Policy in the right pane.

You can even transfer the backup files to an external system.

Citrix Application Delivery Management (ADM) 13

Last Modified: Mar 13, 2023 @ 10:31 am

60 Comments

Navigation

The older 12.1 version of Citrix ADM is detailed in a different post.

💡 = Recently Updated

Change Log

Planning

Why ADM?

Citrix Application Delivery Management (ADM), formerly known as NetScaler Management and Analytics System (MAS), enables every Citrix ADC (formerly known as NetScaler) administrator to achieve the following:

  • Alert notifications – Receive email alerts whenever something goes down. For example, if a Load Balancing service goes down, you can receive an email alert.
    • ADM can email you for any SNMP trap produced by any ADC appliance.
  • Automatically backup all Citrix ADC instances.
    • ADM can even transfer the backups to an external system, which is then backed up by a normal backup tool.
  • SSL Certificate Expiration – Alert you when SSL certificates are about to expire.
    • Show you all SSL certificates across all ADC appliances.
  • Configuration Record and Play – Use the Configuration Recorder to configure one ADC appliance, and then push out the same configuration changes to additional appliances. This is the easiest method of managing ADC appliances in multiple datacenters.
  • AppFlow Reporting – Receive ICA AppFlow traffic from ADC and show it in graphs.
    • Integrate ADM with Citrix Director so Help Desk can see the AppFlow data.

Everything listed above is completely free, so there’s no reason not to deploy ADM.

ADM Overview

For an overview of ADM, see Citrix’s YouTube video Citrix NetScaler MAS: Application visibility and control in the cloud.

Citrix Tech Zone Citrix Application Delivery Management (ADM) Overview Cheat Sheet

Cloud vs on-prem

ADM is available both on-premises, and as a Cloud Service. For the Cloud Service, you import a ADM Agent appliance to an on-prem hypervisor, or deploy a ADM Agent to AWS or Azure. The ADM Agent is the broker between the Cloud Service and the on-prem (or cloud hosted) Citrix ADC appliances. For more info on the ADM Cloud Service, see the following:

The rest of this article focuses on the on-premises version, but much of it also applies to the Cloud Service.

On-premises ADM Licensing:

  • Instance management is free (unlimited). This includes Configuration Jobs, Instance Backups, Network Functions/Reporting. Basically everything in the Networks node is free.
  • Analytics and Application monitoring are free for up to 30 Virtual Servers (Load Balancing, Citrix Gateway, Content Switching, etc.).

ADM version – The version/build of Citrix ADM must be the same or newer than the version/build of the Citrix ADC appliances being monitored. ADM 13 can monitor many ADC appliance versions including version 11.1, version 12.1, and version 13.0.

HDX Insight

See CTX239748 for a list of HDX Insight Quality Improvements in Citrix Gateway 12.1 and newer. These include:

  • NSAP protocol for reduced performance impact on ADC
  • EDT support

HDX Insight Requirements (aka AppFlow Analytics for Citrix ICA traffic):

  • Your ADC appliance must be running Enterprise Edition or Platinum Edition.
  • ADC must be 10.1 or newer.
  • HDX Insight works with the following Receivers:
    • Receiver for Windows must be 3.4 or newer. Or upgrade to Workspace app.
    • Receiver for Mac must be 11.8 or newer. Or upgrade to Workspace app.
    • Receiver for Linux must be 13 or newer. Or upgrade to Workspace app.
    • No mobile Receivers. See the Citrix Receiver Feature Matrix for the latest details.
  • For ICA Session Reliability with AppFlow: NetScaler 10.5 build 54 and newer.
    • For ICA Session Reliability, AppFlow, and ADC High Availability: NetScaler 11.1 build 49 and newer.
  • For EDT (UDP-based ICA), Citrix ADC must be 12.1 build 49 or newer.
  • AppFlow statistics are only generated when ICA traffic flows through a Citrix Gateway. Internally, when a user clicks an icon from StoreFront, an ICA connection is established directly from Receiver to the VDA, thus bypassing the internal ADC. Here are some methods of getting ICA traffic to flow through an internal ADC:
  • A new Receiver / Workspace app Virtual Channel named NetScaler App Experience or NSAP can dramatically reduce the CPU needed on the ADC to process AppFlow. Details at Citrix Blog Post HDX Insight 2.0. NSAP requires the following:
    • VDA 7.17 or newer, including VDA 1903. VDA 7.15 (LTSR) does not include the NSAP functionality.
    • Workspace app or Receiver 4.10 and newer.
    • ADC 12.0 build 57.24 or newer, including ADC 12.1 and ADC 13.
  • For ICA round trip time calculations, in a Citrix Policy, enable the following settings:
    • ICA > End User Monitoring > ICA Round Trip Calculation
    • ICA > End User Monitoring > ICA Round Trip Calculation Interval
    • ICA > End User Monitoring > ICA Round Trip Calculation for Idle Connections
  • Citrix CTX215130 HDX Insight Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Guide contains the following contents:
    • Introduction
    • Prerequisites for Configuring HDX Insight
    • Troubleshooting
      • Issues Related to ICA parsing
      • Error Counter details
    • Checklist before Contacting Citrix Technical Support
    • Information to collect before Contacting Citrix Technical support
    • Known Issues

Citrix CTX204274 How ICA RTT is calculated on NetScaler Insight: ICA RTT constitutes the actual application delay. ICA_RTT = 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 +5 +6:

  1. Client OS introduced delay
  2. Client to NS introduced network delay (Wan Latency)
  3. NS introduced delay in processing client to NS traffic (Client Side Device Latency)
  4. NS introduced delay in processing NS to Server (XA/XD) traffic (Server Side Device Latency)
  5. NS to Server network delay (DC Latency)
  6. Server (XA/XD) OS introduced delay (Host Delay)

Multi-Datacenter Deployment Architecture

In a main datacenter, import two Citrix ADM appliances into the same subnet and configure them as an HA pair with a Floating IP address.

In a DR datacenter, import a DR node Citrix ADM appliance, and configure it to replicate with the main datacenter.

For Citrix ADC appliances in additional datacenters, import two ADM Agent appliances into each datacenter. Remote ADC instances are discovered and managed through remote ADM agents.

  • The virtual appliance for ADM Agent is different than the normal ADM appliance.
  • Documentation at Configure multisite deployment at Citrix Docs, and will be detailed later in this post.

Import ADM Appliance

If you are upgrading an existing ADM or MAS, skip to the Upgrade section.

There are two different ADM appliances:

  • ADM appliance for the main datacenter, including High Availability, and for the DR node.
  • ADM Agent appliance for remote datacenters

To import a ADM Appliance into vSphere, do the following:

  1. Download Citrix ADM Image for ESX.

    • The download page for ADM has two different images: one called ADM Image, and one called ADM Agent Image. The first image should be the non-agent image.
  2. Extract the downloaded .zip file for the non-agent image.
  3. In vSphere Web Client, right-click a cluster, and click Deploy OVF Template.
  4. In the Select an OVF Template page, select Local file, and browse to the Citrix ADM .ovf files. If vCenter 6.5 or newer, select all three files. Click Next.

  5. In the Select name and folder page, enter a name for the virtual machine, and select an inventory folder. Then click Next.
  6. In the Select a resource page, select a cluster or resource pool, and click Next.
  7. In the Review details page, click Next.
  8. In the Select storage page, select a datastore. Due to high IOPS requirement, SSD is recommended.
  9. Change the virtual disk format to Thin Provision. Click Next.
  10. In the Select networks page, choose a valid port group, and click Finish.
  11. In the Ready to Complete page, click Finish.
  12. Before powering on the appliance, you can review its specs. Right-click the virtual machine, and click Edit Settings.
  13. Review the specs. Citrix Docs VMware ESXi Hardware Requirements has recommended specs.
  14. The OVF defaults to 8 vCPU and 32 GB of RAM.
  15. You can add a second hard disk at this time.
  16. Citrix Docs Attach an additional disk to Citrix ADM says that an additional disk must be added before initial deployment.
    • Use the ADM storage calculator to determine the recommended size of the disk. Ask your Citrix Partner for the tool.
    • The new disk must be larger than 120 GB.
    • In ADM 13, the new disk can be larger than 2 TB.
    • In ADM 13, the new disk can be grown later, and /mps/DiskPartitionTool.py can resize the partition, but only up to 2 TB. If you need more than 2 TB, the initial disk should be larger than 2 TB.
  17. Power on the Virtual Machine.

Appliance IP Address Configuration

  1. Open the console of the virtual machine.
  2. Configure IP address information.
  3. Enter 7 when done.

Second Disk

  1. SSH to the appliance and login as nsrecover/nsroot.
  2. Enter /mps/DiskPartitionTool.py

  3. Enter info to see that there are no existing partitions on the second disk.
  4. Enter create to create partitions on the second disk. A reboot is required.
  5. During the reboot, the database is moved to the second disk.
  6. After the reboot, the Disk Partition Tool info command shows the partition on the second disk.
  7. If you need to increase the size of the disk, reboot the ADM appliance so it detects the larger size. Then use the Disk Partition Tool resize command.

Deployment Modes

HA Pair in the Main Datacenter

First Node:

  1. SSH to the first node and login as nsrecover/nsroot.
  2. Enter deployment_type.py.
  3. Enter 1 for Citrix ADM Server.
  4. Enter no when prompted for Citrix ADM Standalone deployment.
  5. For the First Server Node prompt, enter yes.
  6. Enter yes to Restart the system.

Second Node:

  1. Import another ADM appliance to the same subnet, and configure an IP address.
    • Latency to the HA node must not exceed 10 ms.
    • The HA nodes must be on the same subnet.
  2. If you added a second disk to the first ADM appliance, then you must add the same size second disk to the second ADM appliance.
  3. Configure the new nodes’ IP address.
  4. SSH to the second appliance, login as nsrecover/nsroot, and run the Disk Partition tool.
  5. SSH to the second appliance, login as nsrecover/nsroot, and run deployment_type.py.
  6. Enter 1 for Citrix ADM Server.
  7. Enter no when prompted for Citrix ADM Standalone deployment.
  8. Enter no when prompted is this is First Server Node.
  9. Enter the IP address of the first ADM node.
  10. Enter the nsroot password of the first node. The default password is nsroot.
  11. Enter a new Floating IP address.
  12. Enter yes to restart the system.

Deploy HA Configuration:

  1. After both appliances are fully booted, point your browser to the first appliance’s IP address, and login as nsroot/nsroot. It will take several minutes after booting before the ADM appliance is ready.
  2. If you see Customer User Experience Improvement Program, click Enable, or click Skip.
  3. In the What is Application Delivery Management page, click the blue Get Started button.
  4. On the Instances page, click Add Instance. This wizard will keep appearing at logon until you add an instance.

    1. Enter IP Address or FQDN of one of your ADC instances.
    2. The Profile Name contains the password for your ADC nsroot account. To specify the password, you can Edit the built-in ns_nsroot_profile, or you can create a new Profile.
    3. Check the box next to Change Password and enter the ADC’s nsroot password.
    4. Scroll down and click OK to close the ADC Profile window.
    5. Click OK to close the Add Instances window and begin the discovery process.
    6. Click Close when Operation completed successfully. If there’s an error, switch to the Error tab to see more details.
    7. You can add more instances, or just click Next.
  5. In the Customer Identity page, make your choices, and then scroll down and click Next.

  6. In the System Notifications page, check the box next to Send Email and then click Add.

    1. In the Create Email Distribution List page, next to Email Servers, click Add.
    2. Enter your email server details and then click Create to close the Create Email Server window.
    3. Back in the Create Email Distribution List window, enter a From address, enter a To address, and then click Create.
    4. Back in the Getting Started wizard, click Next.
  7. On the Done page, click Finish.
  8. If you want to make any network changes (e.g. DNS servers) to either node, then you must make those changes before you deploy the HA pair. Click the menu icon on the top left. Then go to System > Administration > IP Address, Host Name and Proxy Server.

    1. Enter an Alternate DNS and then click Save.
  9. On the top left, click the menu (hamburger) icon, expand System, and then click Deployment.
  10. In the top right, click Deploy.
  11. Click Yes to reboot.
  12. It takes around 10 minutes to restart.
  13. After deployment, you can now use the Floating IP to manage the appliance.
  14. The System > Deployment page should show both nodes as UP.

Afterwards, you can manage High Availability.

  1. System > Deployment lets you see the HA nodes.
  2. You can Force Failover from here. Note: HA failover only occurs after three minutes of no heartbeats.
  3. On the top right is a HA Settings button that lets you change the Floating IP.

DR Node

Requirements for the DR node:

  • The main datacenter must have an HA pair of ADM appliances. Standalone in the main datacenter is not supported.
  • Latency from the main datacenter HA pair to the DR node must not exceed 200 ms.
  • Ports 5454 and 22 open between the ADM nodes.

To configure a DR node:

  1. Import another ADM appliance into a remote datacenter, and configure an IP address.
  2. If you added a second disk to the main datacenter ADM appliances, then you must add the same size second disk to the DR ADM  appliance.
  3. After configuring the new nodes’ IP address, SSH to the DR appliance and login as nsrecover/nsroot.
  4. Enter deployment_type.py.
  5. Enter 2 for Remote Disaster Recovery Node.
  6. Enter the Floating IP address of the HA pair in the main datacenter.
  7. Enter the nsroot password, which is nsroot by default.
  8. The DR node registers with the ADM HA Pair.
  9. You can change the password of the DR node by running the following command: 
    ./mps/change_freebsd_password.sh <username> <password>
  10. Point your browser to the Floating IP Address and login.
  11. Go to System > Administration.
  12. On the right, in the right column, click Disaster Recovery Settings.
  13. The Registered Recovery Node should already be filled in. Click Deploy DR Node.
  14. Click Yes to enable DR.
  15. A System Backup is performed and replicated to the DR appliance. Click Close when done.
  16. The status of the DR node is displayed. You can click the Refresh icon on the top right to update the display.
  17. ADM 13.0 build 71 and newer have a Sync DR Node button in case it gets out of sync.
  18. Disaster Recovery is not automatic. See the manual DR procedure at at Citrix Docs. Docs also shows how to fail back.
    • /mps/scripts/pgsql/pgsql_restore_remote_backup.sh

ADM Agents

ADM Agents help ADM discover and manage instances on the other side of a high latency WAN link.

The virtual appliance for ADM Agent is different than the normal ADM appliance.

  1. Download the ADM Agent from the main ADM download page. On the ADM download paged for a particular build, scroll down the page to find the ADM Agent images.
  2. Extract the downloaded .zip file.
  3. Import the .ovf to vSphere.

  4. Edit the settings of the virtual machine to see the allocated CPU and Memory.
  5. There’s no need to add a disk to the Agent.
  6. Power on the ADM Agent virtual machine.
  7. At the virtual machine’s console, configure an IP address.
  8. Login as nsrecover/nsroot.
  9. Run /mps/register_agent_onprem.py
  10. Enter the floating IP address of the main ADM HA Pair. Enter nsroot credentials.
  11. The Agent will be registered and services restarted.
  12. To change the nsrecover password on ADM Agents, putty (SSH) to the ADM Agent appliance, login as nsrecover and then run the script at /mps/change_agent_system_password.py
  13. Login to the ADM Floating IP.
  14. Go to Networks > Agents.
  15. On the right, select the ADM Agent, and then click Attach Site.
  16. In the Site drop-down, if you don’t see your site, then you can click the Add button to create a new site.

    1. Enter a name and other location information.
    2. Make sure you enter the coordinates. Google can find coordinates for various locations. If Longitude is West, then the value is negative.
    3. Click Create when done.
  17. Click Save to attach the Site to the Agent. Any ADC instance discovered through this Agent will be attached to the configured Site.
  18. For Agent HA, import two ADM Agents into your hypervisor and attach both Agents to the same Site.
  19. ADM 13.0 build 61 and newer let you change the nsrecover password from the ADM GUI.

ADM Appliance Maintenance

Add Instances

Citrix ADM must discover Citrix ADC instances before they can be managed. Citrix Docs How Citix ADM discovers instances.

  1. Once you’ve built all of the nodes, point your browser to the Citrix ADM Floating IP address, and login as nsroot/nsroot.

Before adding more instances, ADM needs to know the nsroot password for the new instances. You create Admin Profiles to specify the nsroot passwords.

  1. To edit, or create new Admin Profiles, on the top left, click the hamburger menu icon, and then go to Networks > Instances > Citrix ADC.
  2. On the right, open the menu named Select Action, and click Profiles.
  3. Click the Add button to create an Admin Profile.
  4. In the top half, give the Profile a name and enter the password for the instance’s nsroot account. Create a separate Admin Profile for each unique nsroot password.
  5. In the bottom, make up some SNMP settings. You can do SNMP v3.
  6. Click Continue when done.

To add more instances:

  1. Click the top left hamburger icon.
  2. Go to Networks > Instances > Citrix ADC.
  3. On the right, select a tab (e.g. MPX), and then click Add.
  4. The Add instance screen is the same as shown during the getting started wizard. To authenticate to the ADC using nsroot, select an existing Profile or create a new one. If you have Sites or Agents, you can select one.

Tags:

  1. You can assign Tags to instances. See How to create tags and assign to instances at Citrix Docs.

  2. You can then search instances based on the Tags.

Instance Authentication from ADM

By default, when you click the blue link for one of the instances, ADM will do single sign-on to the instance using nsroot credentials. This is probably a security risk, or certainly an auditing risk.

To prevent ADM from doing single sign-on to instances:

  1. In ADM, go to System > Administration.
  2. On the right, click System, Time zone, Allowed URLs and Message of the day.
  3. In the Basic Settings page, check the box next to Prompt Credentials for Instance Login and click Save.

Citrix ADC SDX

  1. At Networks > Instances > Citrix ADC, on the SDX tab, you can click Add to discover a SDX appliance plus all VPXs on that SDX appliance. You don’t have to discover the VPXs separately.
  2. In the Add Citrix ADC SDX page, click the Add button next to the Profile Name drop-down to create an SDX profile. Note: SDX profiles are different than VPX profiles.

    1. Enter the credentials for the SDX SVM Management Service.
    2. For Citrix ADC Profile, select an admin profile that has nsroot credentials for the VPX instances. After the SDX’s VPX instances are discovered, ADM uses this ADC Profile to login to each VPX. If you don’t have a VPX Admin Profile in your drop-down list, click the Add button. Note: You can only select one ADC Profile. If each VPX instance has different nsroot credentials, you can fix it after SDX discovery has been performed. The ADC Profile is different than the SDX Profile.
    3. Back in the Configure ADC SDX Profile page, enter a new Community string for the SDX SVM. This appears to be SNMP v2 only.
    4. If you need the communication to be http instead of https, then you can uncheck the box for Use global settings for SDX communication.
    5. Click OK when done.
  3. Back in the Add Citrix ADC SDX page, select a Site, and optionally an Agent.
  4. Click OK to start discovery.
  5. After discovery is complete, switch to the VPX tab. You should automatically see the VPX instances.
  6. To specify the nsroot credentials for a VPX, right-click the VPX, and click Edit.

    1. In the Modify Citrix ADC VPX page, either select an existing Profile Name, or click the Add button to create a new one. Click OK when done. It should start rediscovery automatically.
  7. After fixing the nsroot credentials, right-click the VPX instance, and click Configure SNMP. ADM will configure the VPX to send SNMP Traps to ADM.

Instance management

  • REST API proxy – Citrix ADM can function as a REST API proxy server for its managed instances. Instead of sending API requests directly to the managed instances, REST API clients can send the API requests to Citrix ADM. See Citrix CTX228449 Citrix ADM as an API Proxy Server
  • Citrix ADC VPX Check-In/Check-Out Licensing – You can allocate VPX licenses to Citrix ADC instances on demand from Citrix ADM. The Licenses are stored and managed by Citrix ADM, which has a licensing framework that provides scalable and automated license provisioning. A Citrix ADC VPX instance can check out the license from the Citrix ADM when a Citrix ADC VPX instance is provisioned, or check back in its license to Citrix ADM when an instance is removed or destroyed. See Citrix CTX228451 Citrix ADC VPX check-in and check-out licensing

Licenses

Virtual Server License Packs

Without Virtual Server licenses, you can enable analytics features on only 30 Virtual Servers. You can install additional licenses in 100 Virtual Server packs. More info at Licensing at Citrix Docs.

  1. On the left menu, go to Networks > Licenses.
  2. On the right, notice the Host ID. You will need this ID when allocating licenses at https://www.citrix.com/account.
  3. At https://www.citrix.com/account, allocate your Citrix ADM licenses to this Host ID.
  4. Then use the Browse button to upload the allocated license file.
  5. Click Finish after uploading the license file to apply it.
  6. The License Expiry Information section shows you the number of installed licenses and when they expire.
  7. You can use the Notification Settings section to email you when licenses are almost fully consumed or about to expire.
  8. Check the box next to Email and select a distribution list. If you don’t have an Email server setup yet, click the Add button to create one.
  9. Click Save when done.

Allocate licenses to Virtual Servers

ADM tries to automatically allocate all licenses to Virtual Servers in the order the Virtual Servers are discovered. If you don’t have enough licenses for every Virtual Server that ADM discovers, then you can manually unassign an automatically-allocated ADM Virtual Server license and reassign the license to a different Virtual Server.

  1. Go to System > Licensing & Analytics to see the number of currently installed (Entitled) licenses, and the number of Licensed virtual servers.
  2. By default, Auto Licensed Virtual Servers is enabled. If you disable this setting, then the Configure License button appears.
  3. Click the Configure License button.
  4. The top right shows you the number of licensed vs Entitled Virtual Servers.
  5. You can sort by Type. Or use the search box to filter the list of Virtual Servers.
  6. The Licensed column shows you the Virtual Servers that are licensed. You can select a Licensed Virtual Server and Unlicense it.
  7. Select a Virtual Server you want to license, and then click the License button.
  8. You can also Enable Analytics from here.

All licensed Virtual Servers are shown on the Applications > Dashboard page.

Enable AppFlow / Insight / Analytics

Citrix ADC 12.1 and newer have an additional port TCP 5563 from ADC SNIP to ADM for Metrics Collector.

You can only enable Analytics (i.e. AppFlow) on Virtual Servers that are licensed.

  1. Go to Networks > Instances > Citrix ADC.
  2. On the right, switch to one of the instance type tabs (e.g. VPX).
  3. Select an instance, open the Select Action menu, and click Configure Analytics.
  4. Select one or more Virtual Servers. If they are not licensed, then click the License button.
  5. After licensing, select one or more Virtual Servers and then click the button labelled Enable Analytics.
  6. Different options are available for different types of Virtual Servers.
    • For ICA Proxy Gateways, you want HDX Insight. Gateway Insight provides AAA and EPA info for the Gateway. Leave it set to ICA unless you are doing double-hop ICA.
    • For HTTP Load Balancing Virtual Servers, you want Web Insight. If you are licensed for ADC Premium Edition, then you can also enable Security Insight for Web App Firewall and Bot Protection monitoring.
  7. For appliances that have Gateway Virtual Servers, expand Advanced Options and select Citrix Gateway.
  8. Click OK to enable AppFlow on the Virtual Servers.
  9. Click Close when configuration is complete.
  10. Enable Analytics on more Virtual Servers.
  11. Login to the Citrix ADC (not ADM), and go to System > Settings.
  12. On the right, click Configure Modes.
  13. If you are using LogStream, then make sure ULFD is checked. Click OK.

    enable mode ulfd
  14. On the right, click Change Global System Settings.
  15. Scroll down to ICA port(s) and add 1494 and 2598 to the list. Click OK. (Source = Citrix Discussions)

    set ns param -icaPort 1494 2598
  16. On the right, click Change HTTP Parameters.
  17. At the top, add 80 and 443 to the Http Ports list. Click OK. (Source = Citrix Discussions)

    set ns param -httpPort 80 443
  18. By default, with AppFlow enabled, if an ADC High Availability pair fails over, then all Citrix connections will drop and users must reconnect manually. NetScaler 11.1 build 49 and newer have a feature to replicate Session Reliability state between both HA nodes.
    1. From Session Reliability on NetScaler High Availability Pair at Citrix Docs: Enabling this feature will result in increased bandwidth consumption, which is due to ICA compression being turned off by the feature, and the extra traffic between the primary and secondary nodes to keep them in sync.
    2. On a NetScaler 11.1 build 49 and newer ADC appliance, go to System > Settings.
    3. On the right, in the Settings section, click Change ICA Parameters.
    4. Check the box next to Session Reliability on HA Failover, and click OK.
  19. In a NetScaler 12 or newer instance, at System > AppFlow > Collectors, you can see if the Collector (ADM) is up or not. However, older ADC uses SNIP to verify connectivity, but AppFlow is sent using NSIP, so being DOWN doesn’t necessarily mean that AppFlow isn’t working. Citrix CTX227438 After NetScaler Upgrade to Release 12.0 State of AppFlow Collector Shows as DOWN.
  20. When AppFlow is enabled on a Gateway vServer, an AppFlow policy is bound to the twice to the Gateway: once for Request Policies (i.e. HTTP), and once for ICA Request Policies. You might want to verify that these bindings are actually configured.
  21. On the ADM appliance, AppFlow for ICA (HDX Insight) information can be viewed under the Analytics > HDX Insight node.

Citrix Blog Post – NetScaler Insight Center – Tips, Troubleshooting and Upgrade

Enable Syslog on Instance

ADM can configure ADC instances to send Syslog to ADM. Note: this will increase disk space consumption on the ADM appliances.

  1. Go to Networks > Instances > Citrix ADC. On the right, select one of the tabs containing your ADC instance.
  2. On the right, select an instance, open the Select Action drop-down, and click Configure Syslog.
  3. At the top, check the Enable box.
  4. In ADM 13, the Log Level should already be set to Custom with some boxes selected. Feel free to check other boxes while keeping in mind the disk space requirements.
  5. Click OK.

ADM nsroot Password

Changing ADM’s nsroot password also changes ADM’s nsrecover password.

  1. In ADM , go to System > User Administration.
  2. On the right, on the tab named Users, select the nsroot account, and click Edit.
  3. Check the box next to Change Password and enter a new password.
  4. You can also specify a session timeout by checking the box next to Configure Session Timeout.
  5. Click OK.

ADM Agent nsrecover Password

ADM 13.0 build 61 and newer let you change the nsrecover password from the ADM GUI.

In older ADM, putty (SSH) to the ADM Agent appliance, login as nsrecover and then run the script at /mps/change_agent_system_password.py

ADM Management Certificate

  1. The certificate to upload must already be in PEM format. If you have a .pfx, you must first convert it to PEM (Base64 certificate and key files). You can use a ADC’s Import PKCS#12 feature to convert the .pfx to PEM, and then download the converted certificate from the appliance.
    1. On any Citrix ADC, go to Traffic Management > SSL.
    2. On the right, click Import PKCS#12.
    3. Enter a name for a new file that will contain the PEM certificate and PEM key.
    4. Browse to the .pfx file and enter the password.
    5. You can optionally encrypt the PEM key by selecting an Encoding Format and entering an encryption key.
    6. Click OK.
    7. To download the PEM file, go to Manage Certificates / Keys / CSRs.
    8. Scroll to the bottom of the list, right-click the new file, and click Download.
  2. Back in ADM, go to System > Administration.
  3. On the right, in the SSL Settings section, click Install SSL Certificate.
  4. Click Choose File to browse to the PEM format certificate and key files. If the PEM certificate and PEM key are in the same file, then browse to the same file for both fields.
  5. If the keyfile is encrypted, enter the password.
  6. Click OK.
  7. Click Yes to reboot the system.

  8. To force users to use https when accessing the ADM management page, go to System > Administration. On the right, click System, Time zone, Allowed URLs and Message of the day.
  9. On the Basic Settings page, check the box next to Secure Access Only and click Save.

System Configuration

  1. Go to System > Administration.
  2. On the right, click System, Time zone, Allowed URLs and Message of the day.

    1. Check the box next to Enable Session Timeout, and specify a value.
    2. By default, at Networks > Instances > Citrix ADC , if you click a blue IP address link, ADM does single sign on to the instance using the nsroot credentials. If you want to force ADM users to login using non-nsroot credentials, then in check the bottom box for Prompt Credentials for Instance Login.

    3. Click Save.
    4. On the Time Zone page, configure Time Zone, and then click Save.
    5. On the left, click the Message of the day tab.
    6. On the right, check the box next to Enable Message.
    7. Enter a message, and then click Save.
    8. Click the back arrow when done.
    9. When you login to ADM, you’ll be shown the message.
  3. Configure SSL Settings lets you disable TLS 1 and TLS 1.1.

    1. On the right, click the Protocol Settings section in the Edit Settings section on the right side of the screen.
    2. On the left, uncheck TLSv1 and TLSv1.1. Then click OK.
    3. Click Yes when asked to confirm the restart.

Prune Settings

  1. At System > Administration, on the right, in the left column, is System and Instance Data Pruning.
  2. System Pruning defaults to deleting System Events, Audit Logs, and Task Logs after 15 days. System events are generated by the ADM appliance, which is different than Instance events (SNMP traps) that are generated by ADC appliances.
    1. If you change anything on these pages, click the Save button before switching to a different tab/node/page.
    2. ADM can initiate a purge automatically as the database starts to get full.
    3. To see the current database disk usage, go to System > Performance and wait a few seconds.
  3. Instance Events page controls when instance SNMP traps are pruned, which defaults to 40 days.
  4. If you are sending Syslog from instances to ADM, then Instance Syslog page controls when the log entries are purged.

Backup Settings

  1. In System > Administration, in the middle column, under Backup, click Configure System and Instance backup.
  2. System Backup Settings defines how many ADM backups you want to keep. These are ADM backups, not ADC backups.
    1. There’s an option for External Transfer.
    2. System backups (not Instance Backups) are at System > Backup Files.
  3. The Instance page lets you configure how often the instances are backed up.
    1. You probably want to increase the number of instance backups, or decrease the backup interval. The backups are quite small (e.g. 700 KB).
    2. There is an option to perform a backup whenever the ADC configuration is saved.
    3. The Enable External Transfer checkbox lets you transfer the backups to an external system so it can be backed up by your backup tool.
    4. Instance backups can be found at Networks > Instances > Citrix ADC. Right-click an instance, and click Backup/Restore.
    5. You can Restore a backup, Download the backup, or Transfer it to an external system.

Analytics Settings

  1. There are more settings at Analytics > Settings.
  2. ICA Session Timeout can be configured by clicking the link.

    • If ADM doesn’t receive AppFlow records for a session, it will consider that session has got terminated in ADC and stops monitoring that session further. The time for which ADM needs to wait before considering a session terminated is ICA session timeout. This is configurable in ADM, by default it is set to 15 minutes. (source = Citrix Discussions)
  3. You can configure how the App Score (Application Dashboard) is calculated.

  4. Analytics > Settings > Data Persistence lets you configure how long Analytics data is retained. Adjusting these values could dramatically increase disk space consumption. See CTX224238 How Do I Increase Granularity of Data Points Stored on NetScaler MAS Analytics?.

    • To see the current database disk usage, go to System > Performance and wait a few seconds.

NTP Servers

  1. On the left, click System > Administration.
  2. On the right, click NTP Servers.
  3. Click Add.
  4. Enter an NTP server, and click Create.

  5. After adding NTP servers, click the NTP Synchronization button.
  6. Check the box next to Enable NTP Synchronization, and click OK.
  7. Click Yes to restart.

Syslog

This is for syslog entries generated by ADM server, and not for syslog entries generated by the instances.

  1. Go to System > Audit Log Messages > Syslog Servers.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. Enter the syslog server IP address, and select Log Levels. Click Create.
  4. You can click Syslog Parameters to change the timezone and date format.

Email Notification Server

  1. Go to System > Notifications.
  2. On the right, on the Email tab, click the button named Email Servers.

    1. Click Add.
    2. Enter the SMTP Email server address, and click Create.
  3. In the breadcrumb, click Notifications.
  4. On the right, on the Email tab, and click Add.

    1. Enter an information for a destination distribution list, and click Create.
  5. You can highlight a Distribution List and click the Test button.


  6. On the left, click System > Administration.
  7. On the right, click Change Event Notification and Digest.

    1. Move notification categories (e.g. UserLogin) to the right.
    2. Check the box next to Send Email. Select a notification distribution list. Then click Save.

Authentication

  1. Go to System > Authentication.
  2. On the right, switch to the tab named LDAP.
  3. Click Add.
  4. This is configured identically to ADC.
    1. Enter a Load Balancing VIP for LDAP.
    2. Change the Security Type to SSL, and Port to 636. Scroll down.
    3. Enter the Base DN in LDAP format.
    4. Enter the bind account credentials.
    5. Check the box for Enable Change Password.
    6. Click Retrieve Attributes, and scroll down.
    7. For Server Logon Attribute, select sAMAccountName.
    8. For Group Attribute, select memberOf.
    9. For Sub Attribute Name, select cn.
    10. To prevent unauthorized users from logging in, configure a Search Filter. Scroll down.
    11. If desired, configure Nested Group Extraction.
  5. Click Create.
  6. On the left, go to System > User Administration.
  7. On the right, click the tab named Groups.
  8. On the right, click Add.

    1. Enter the case sensitive name of your Citrix ADC Admins AD group.
    2. Move the admin Role to the right.
    3. The Configure User Session Timeout checkbox lets you configure a session timeout.
    4. Click Next.
    5. On the Authorization Settings page, if you are delegating limited permissions, you can uncheck these boxes and delegate specific entities.
      • All DNS Domain Names (GSLB) is an option for Stylebooks in ADM 12.1 build 49 and newer.
    6. Click Create Group.
    7. In the Assign Users page, click Finish. Group membership comes from LDAP, so there’s no need to add local users.
  9. On the top right, click the button named Settings.

    1. If desired, check the box next to Enable User Lockout, and configure the maximum logon attempts. Click OK.
  10. On the left, go to System > Authentication.
  11. On the top right, click the button named Settings.
  12. Change the Server Type to EXTERNAL, and click Insert.
  13. Select the LDAP server you created, and click OK.
  14. Make sure Enable fallback local authentication is checked, and click OK.

Analytics Thresholds

  1. Go to Analytics > Settings > Thresholds.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. Enter a name.
  4. Use the Traffic Type drop-down to select HDX, WEB, SECURITY, or APPANALYTICS.
  5. Use the Entity drop-down to select a category of alerts. What you choose here determines what’s available as Metrics when you click Add Rule.

    1. With HDX as the Traffic Type, to add multiple rules for multiple Entity types, simply change the Entity drop-down before adding a new rule.
    2. If the Traffic Type is HDX, and the Entity drop-down is set to Users, on the bottom in the Configure Geo Details section, you can restrict the rule so it only fires for users for a specific geographical location.
  6. In the Notification Settings section, check the box to Enable Threshold.
  7. Check the box to Notify through Email, and select an existing Email Distribution List.
  8. Click Create.

Private IP Blocks

You can define Geo locations for internal subnets.

  1. Go to Analytics > Settings > IP Blocks.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. In the Create IP Blocks page:
    1. Enter a name for the subnet.
    2. Enter the starting and ending IP address.
    3. Select a Geo Location (Country, Region, City). As you change the fields, the coordinates are automatically filled in.
  4. Click Create.

SSL Certificate Expiration Notification

SSL Dashboard can notify you when certificates will expire soon.

  1. In the ADM menu, expand Networks, and click SSL Dashboard.
  2. On the top right, click the button named Settings.
  3. In the Certificate is expiring in (days) field, enter the number of days before expiration that you want to receive a notification. The default is 30 days.
  4. Check one of the boxes (e.g. Email) below How would you like to be notified.
  5. Select a notification profile (e.g. Mail Profile) or Add one.
  6. Click Save and Exit, or click Next to see more SSL Dashboard settings.

Instance Email Alerts (SNMP Traps)

You can receive email alerts whenever a ADC appliance sends a critical SNMP trap.

  1. On the left, go to Networks > Events > Rules.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. Give the rule a name.
  4. Move Severity filters (e.g. Major, Critical) to the right by clicking the plus icon next to each Severity.
  5. While scrolling down, you can configure additional alert filters. Leaving them blank will alert you for all categories, objects, and instances.
  6. On the bottom of the page, in the Event Rule Actions section, click Add Action.
  7. In the Add Event Action page:
    1. Select an Action Type (e.g. Send e-mail Action).
    2. Select the recipients (or click the Add button to add recipients).
    3. Optionally, enter a Subject and/or Message.
    4. If you enter a Subject, you can check Prefix severity, category, and failure object information to the custom email subject.
    5. Emails can be repeated by selecting Repeat Email Notification until the event is cleared.
  8. Click OK.
  9. Then click Create.
  10. See the Event Management section at All how to articles at Citrix Docs.

Events Digest

ADM can email you a daily digest (PDF format) of system and instance events

To enable the daily digest:

  1. Go to System > Administration.
  2. On the right, click Configure Event Notification and Digest.
  3. Switch to the Event Digest page.
  4. Uncheck the box next to Disable Event Digest.
  5. Configure the other settings as desired, and click OK.

Director Integration

Integrating Citrix ADM with Director adds Network tabs to Director’s Trends and Session Details views. Citrix Blog Post Configure Director with Netscaler Management & Analytics System (MAS)

Requirements:

  • Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops (CVAD) must be licensed for Premium Edition (formerly known as Platinum Edition). This is only required for the Director integration. Without Premium, you can still access the HDX Insight data by going visiting the Citrix ADM web site instead of from Director.
  • Director must be 7.11 or newer for Citrix ADM support.

To link Citrix Director with Citrix ADM:

  1. On the Director server, run C:\inetpub\wwwroot\Director\tools\DirectorConfig.exe /confignetscaler.
  2. Enter credentials for a user that only has HDX Insight permissions. 
    User Role for ADM Director Integration
  3. If HTTPS Connection (recommended), the Citrix ADM certificate must be valid and trusted by both the Director Server and the Director user’s browser.
  4. Enter 1 for Citrix ADM (aka MAS).
  5. Do this on both Director servers.

Use Citrix ADM

Networks

Everything under the Networks node is free.

Infrastructure Analytics – ADM 13 and newer has an Infrastructure Analytics node under the Networks node. For details, see Infrastructure Analytics at Citrix Docs.

  • On the right, if you click the gear icon above the table, then the right panel changes to the Settings Panel instead of the Summary Panel. In the right panel, you can then switch to the tab named Score Thresholds to adjust how Infrastructure Analytics scores instance CPU, Memory, Disk, etc.
  • You can click the Circle Pack button to change to the Circle Pack view.

At Networks > Instances, select an instance and view its Dashboard.

  • The Instance Dashboard has tabs.

Backups are available by selecting an instance, and clicking Backup/Restore.

Networks > Network Reporting lets you create Dashboards where you can view Instance performance data.

Networks > Network Reporting > Thresholds lets you create thresholds when counters cross a threshold. For example, you might want a notification when Throughput gets close to the licensed limit.

Configuration Record and Play

Use ADM to record a configuration change on one instance, and push to other instances.

  1. Go to Networks > Configuration Jobs.
  2. On the right, click Create Job.
  3. Give the job a name.
  4. Change the Configuration Source drop-down to Record and Play.
  5. Change the Source Instance drop-down to the instance you want to record.
  6. Click Record.
  7. ADM opens the instance GUI. Make changes as desired.
  8. When done, go back to ADC, and click Stop.
  9. ADC retrieves the changed config.
  10. On the left, you’ll see the changed commands. Drag them to the right.
  11. On the right, you can change instance-specific values to variables by simply highlighting the values. This allows you to change the values for each instance you push this config to.
  12. Proceed through the rest of the Configuration Job wizard like normal. You’ll select instances, specify variable values for each instance, and schedule the job.

Dave Brett Automating Your Netscaler 11.1 Vserver Config Using Netscaler Management and Analytics System uses a Configuration Job to deploy StoreFront load balancing configuration to an instance.

Analytics and Applications

This functionality requires Virtual Server licenses, which can come from your built-in 30 free licenses.

The AppFlow Analysis tools (e.g. HDX Insight) are located under the Analytics node. See Viewing HDX Insight Reports and Metrics at Citrix Docs.

Applications > Dashboard automatically includes all licensed Virtual Servers.

  • On the top middle, click Define Custom App to group Virtual Servers together into an application. The grouped Virtual Servers are removed from the Others list.

  • You can then click any Application’s box to view stats. For Custom Applications, it combines stats about all of the vServers in that Custom Application. On the top right-click the name of the Application to view more details.
  • ADM 13 adds a Transaction Log tab.

Applications > Configurations > StyleBooks lets you use StyleBooks to create new ADC configurations.

There are built-in StyleBooks for Exchange, SharePoint, Oracle, ADFS, etc. Or you can create your own StyleBook and use it to create ADC configurations. For details, see StyleBooks at Citrix Docs.

The Applications Node has quite a bit of functionality. See Application Analytics and Management at Citrix Docs for details.

Link:

HDX Insight

HDX Insight Dashboard displays ICA session details including the following:

  • WAN Latency
  • DC Latency
  • RTT (round trip time)
  • Retransmits
  • Application Launch Duration
  • Client Type/Version
  • Bandwidth
  • Licenses in use

Citrix CTX215130 HDX Insight Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Guide contains the following contents:

  • Introduction
  • Prerequisites for Configuring HDX Insight
  • Troubleshooting
    • Issues Related to ICA parsing
    • Error Counter details
  • Checklist before Contacting Citrix Technical Support
  • Information to collect before Contacting Citrix Technical support
  • Known Issues

Gateway Insight

In the Analytics node is Gateway Insight.

This feature displays the following details:

  • Gateway connection failures due to failed EPA scans, failed authentication, failed SSON, or failed application launches.
  • Bandwidth and Bytes Consumed for ICA and other applications accessed through Gateway.
  • # of users
  • Session Modes (clientless, VPN, ICA)
  • Client Operating Systems
  • Client Browsers

More details at Gateway Insight at Citrix Docs.

Security Insight

The Security Insight dashboard uses data from Application Firewall to display Threat Index (criticality of attack), Safety Index (how securely ADC is configured), and Actionable Information. More info at Security Insight at Citrix Docs.

Troubleshooting

Citrix CTX215130 HDX Insight Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Guide: Syslog messages; Error counters; Troubleshooting checklist, Logs

Citrix CTX224502 Frequently Asked Questions During NetScaler MAS Troubleshooting

Upgrade Citrix ADM

  1. If you are upgrading from MAS 12.0 build 56 and older, you must upgrade to MAS 12.0 build 57.24 before you can upgrade to ADM 12.1. Then upgrade from ADM 12.1 to ADM 13. (Source = Before you upgrade at Citrix Docs)
  2. Citrix recommends upgrading to ADM 13.0 build 61.48 before you upgrade to later builds.
  3. Download the latest Citrix Application Delivery Management (ADM) Upgrade Package. You want the ADM Upgrade Package, not a ADM image. It’s around halfway down the page.
  4. Login to Citrix ADM Floating IP or Active Node. Upgrading the Active Node automatically upgrades the Passive Node.
  5. Go to System > Deployment and make sure both nodes are online and replicating.
  6. Go to System > Administration.
  7. On the right, in the far right column, click Upgrade Citrix ADM.
  8. Browse to the build-mas-13.0…tgz Upgrade Package, and click OK. The file name starts with build-mas-13.0 (not masagent).

  9. Click Upgrade. Note: the upgrade screens changed in ADM 13.0 build 61 and newer. Upgrading to 67 and newer takes a while due to the database upgrade.

  10. Click Yes to reboot the appliance.





  11. After it says that upgrading is complete, login.
  12. In 13.0 build 67 and newer, you can click the link to see the database migration status.
  13. If you upgraded to ADM 13.0 build 58 or newer, you might see the CUXIP banner at the top of the screen.
  14. If you upgraded from a version older than 12.1 build 50 to ADM 13 or newer, you might be prompted to Configure Customer Identity. Make your choice.

    • You can return to the Configure Customer Identity screen by going to System > Administration.
  15. After upgrading to 13.0 build 41 or newer, you might see a banner asking you to configure System Notifications.

    1. Notice that all categories are configured.
    2. Check the box next to Send Email, select a Distribution List, and click Save.
  16. The new firmware version can be seen by clicking your username in the top right corner.

Upgrade Disaster Recovery Node

After you upgrade the HA pair in the primary datacenter, you can upgrade the DR node.

  1. Use WinSCP or similar to connect to the DR node using the nsrecover credentials.
  2. On the ADM DR node, navigate to /var/mps/mps_images.
  3. Create a new Directory with the same name as the 13.0 build number. Then double-click the new directory to open it.

  4. Upload the file named build-mas-13.0-##.##.tgz to the version-specific directory. This is the regular ADM upgrade file with a name starting with build-mas-13.0. It’s not the Agent upgrade file.
  5. SSH (Putty) to the DR node and login as nsrecover.
  6. Enter the following. Replace the # with the version number. 
    cd /var/mps/mps_images/13.0-##.##
tar xvzf build-mas-13.0-##.##.tgz

  7. Then enter the following. The appliance will reboot automatically. 
    ./installmas

  8. After the reboot, the file /var/mps/log/install_state…
  9. …shows you the installed version.

Upgrade ADM Agents

After you upgrade the ADM HA pair in the primary datacenter, and after you upgrade the DR node, you can then upgrade the ADM Agents.

  1. From the ADM 13.0 download page, at the bottom of the page, download the ADM Agent Upgrade Package. This Agent Upgrade file is different than the regular ADM upgrade file. And it is different than the files to deploy a new Agent. Find it at the bottom of the downloads page.
  2. Use WinSCP or similar to connect to the ADM Agent using the nsrecover credentials.
  3. On the ADM Agent, navigate to /var/mps/mps_images.
  4. Create a new Directory with the same name as the 13.0 build number. Then double-click the new directory to open it.

  5. Upload the file named build-masagent-13.0-##.##.tgz to the version-specific directory. This is the ADM Agent upgrade file, and not the regular ADM upgrade file.
  6. SSH (Putty) to the ADM Agent and login as nsrecover.
  7. Enter the following. Replace the # with the version number. 
    cd /var/mps/mps_images/13.0-##.##
tar xvzf build-masagent-13.0-##.##.tgz

  8. Then enter the following. The appliance will reboot automatically. 
    ./installmasagent

  9. After the reboot, the file /var/mps/log/install_state…
  10. …shows you the installed version.
  11. Repeat for any additional ADM Agents.
  12. If you login to ADM and go to Networks > Agents, you should see the new Version. It will take several minutes for the version number to update.

nFactor Authentication – Citrix Gateway 13

Last Modified: Oct 17, 2023 @ 9:57 am

66 Comments

Navigation

💡 = Recently Updated

Change Log

nFactor Overview

nFactor lets you configure an unlimited number of authentication factors. You are no longer limited to just two factors.

nFactor seems to be Citrix’s preferred authentication architecture. All authentication mechanisms are moving from Citrix Gateway to nFactor.

Citrix Tech Zone Citrix ADC nFactor Basics Cheat Sheet.

Each authentication factor performs the following tasks:

  1. Collect credentials or data from the user. These credentials can be anything supported by Citrix ADC, including:
    • SAML assertion
    • Client Certificate
    • Forms-based authentication (traditional web-based logon page) for LDAP, RADIUS, TACACS, etc. – aka Login Schema
    • Native OTP Push authentication
    • OAuth OpenID Connect
    • Kerberos ticket
    • StoreFrontAuth – authentication is delegated to Citrix StoreFront
    • Endpoint Analysis Scan – either pre-authentication, or post-authentication.
    • EULA
    • Google reCAPTCHA
    • Swivel
    • Use a drop-down to select an authentication method
    • Cookie – e.g. NSC_TASS cookie containing URL path entered after the Gateway/AAA’s FQDN
    • Client IP address
    • No credentials/data – ADC policy expression uses criteria it already has (e.g. collected from a prior factor)
  2. Evaluate the collected credentials. The results can be:
    • No authentication – policy expression is evaluated only to determine next factor
    • Authentication success
    • Authentication failure
    • Group extraction
    • Attribute extraction from SAML, Certificate, JWT, etc.
  3. Based on the evaluation results, do one of the following:
    • Allow access to Gateway or Web site
    • Select next factor
    • Deny access
  4. If there’s a Next Factor, repeat these steps, until there are no more Next Factors to evaluate.

Factors can also be configured only a decision point meaning that the factor does not perform any authentication and instead uses Citrix ADC Policy expressions to select the Next Factor. For example:

  • If client IP is internal, next factor is LDAP only.
  • If client IP is external, next factor is LDAP and then another factor for RADIUS.

Here are some nFactor use cases, but the combinations are almost limitless:

  • Choose Authentication method based on Active Directory group: Logon screen asks for user name only. Extract user’s groups from Active Directory. Based on user’s Active Directory groups, either ask user for client certificate, or ask user for LDAP password. If LDAP, the username doesn’t need to be entered again.
  • Ask for Certificate first:
    • If client certificate is valid, perform LDAP only.
    • If no client certificate, perform LDAP + RADIUS
  • Two-factor with passwords checked in specific order: Display logon screen with two password fields. Check the first password. If the first password succeeds, then check the second password. This lets you check RADIUS before LDAP.
  • Run Endpoint Analysis first:
    • If EPA passes, perform LDAP only.
    • If EPA fails, perform LDAP + RADIUS
  • See Sample Configurations later for many more combinations.

All new authentication methods added to Citrix ADC require nFactor configuration and are not supported on native Citrix Gateway. These new authentication methods include:

nFactor is a AAA feature, which means you need Citrix NetScaler ADC Advanced Edition or Citrix NetScaler ADC Premium Edition.

  • ADC 13.0 build 67 and newer support nFactor in NetScaler ADC Standard Edition licensing.
  • To configure nFactor in NetScaler Standard Edition, go to Citrix Gateway > Virtual Servers and edit a Virtual Server. On the right, add the Authentication Profile section. Click Add to create an Authentication Profile. Then click Add to create an Authentication Virtual Server.


  • Not all Authentication Policy types are supported in Standard Edition. See Citrix Docs for the list.

Citrix ADC supports two types of authentication policies – Classic, and Advanced (aka Default). You can bind Classic Authentication Policies directly to Citrix Gateway Virtual Servers, but today you cannot bind Advanced Authentication Policies to Citrix Gateway. The only way to use Advanced Authentication Policies with Citrix Gateway is to configure nFactor on a AAA Virtual Server and then link the AAA Virtual Server to the Gateway Virtual Server.

Workspace app 1809 and newer with Citrix Gateway 12.1 build 49 and newer support nFactor authentication. Older Receivers and older NetScalers don’t support nFactor, so you’ll instead have to use a web browser.

nFactor High-level Configuration

Here’s a high level summary of nFactor configuration objects. Detailed instructions are provided later in this article.

Each factor is a Policy Label that combines Advanced Authentication Policies and Login Schema.

  • Login Schema is a XML file that nFactor uses to create a custom HTML form where users enter credentials.
    • Login Schemas are optional depending on the authentication method you are configuring.
  • If an Advanced authentication policy expression evaluates to true, then an authentication action is performed.
    • Citrix ADC has many different types of authentication actions.
    • nFactor authentication policy expressions use Advanced Syntax (Default Syntax) instead of the older Classic Syntax expression traditionally used in Citrix Gateway authentication policies. An example Advanced syntax expression is true. An example classic syntax expression is ns_true.
    • When binding an Advanced authentication policy to a Policy Label or AAA vServer, you can optionally select a Next Factor, which is another Policy Label.
      • If the authentication action is successful, then nFactor processes the configured Next Factor.
      • If Next Factor is not configured, then nFactor is complete and authentication is successful.
    • If the authentication action fails, then the next lower priority (higher priority number) authentication policy in the same factor is evaluated. If there are no more authentication policies in the same factor, then the entire nFactor authentication flow failed.

AAA vServer – nFactor configuration is always bound to a AAA vServer, even if you want to use nFactor with Citrix Gateway.

  • An Authentication Profile links the AAA vServer with Citrix Gateway.

nFactor Configuration methods – Citrix ADC 13 has two methods of configuring nFactor:

  • ADC 13 adds nFactor Flow Visualizer, which makes it easy to link the Factors (Policy Labels) together.
    • After creating a Flow, you bind the Flow to a AAA Virtual Server.
  • Manually – Create Policy Labels, Login Schemas, Authentication Policies/Actions, and manually bind them together and to a AAA Virtual Server. This is the only method available in ADC 12.1 and older.
    • For the first factor, you bind Authentication Policies/Actions and Login Schemas directly to a AAA Virtual Server without using a Policy Label.
    • All other factors are Policy Labels linked using the Next Factor bind points.

The Visualizer is a better option for understanding the nFactor flow, but neither method is flexible:

  • If you want to rename factors, then you have to delete the factor and remake it.
  • You can’t change a factor’s Login Schema without deleting and remaking the factor.
  • Visualizer does not let you delete factors. Instead, you can either delete the Policy Label outside of the flow configuration, or you can delete the entire flow and start over.
  • With Manual method, it is difficult to rearrange factors, especially since the first factor is not a Policy Label like the other factors. Visualizer lets you graphically change how the factors are linked together.
  • The Manual method is typically configured from bottom up which makes it difficult to understand the entire nFactor flow.

Also see:

This article will detail how to use the Manual method to configure nFactor from top to bottom:

  1. Create AAA vServer
  2. Create First Factor:
    1. Create Login Schema Profile
    2. Create Login Schema Policy – only for first factor – if policy expression is true, then display Login Schema
    3. Create Authentication Actions – LDAP, RADIUS, etc.
    4. Create Advanced Authentication Policies – if policy expression is true, then perform authentication action
    5. Edit AAA vServer, bind Login Schema, and bind Authentication Policies
  3. Create Next Factor:
    1. Create Login Schema Profile
    2. Create Authentication Actions – LDAP, RADIUS, etc.
    3. Create Advanced Authentication Policies – if policy expression is true, then perform authentication action
    4. Create Authentication Policy Label, select Login Schema, and bind Advanced Authentication Policies
    5. Edit AAA vServer, edit Authentication Policy binding, and configure Next Factor to this Policy Label
  4. Create Next Factor:
    1. Create Login Schema Profile
    2. Create Authentication Actions – LDAP, RADIUS, etc.
    3. Create Advanced Authentication Policies – if policy expression is true, then perform authentication action
    4. Create Authentication Policy Label, select Login Schema, and bind Advanced Authentication Policies
    5. Edit other Policy Label, edit Authentication Policy binding, and configure Next Factor to this Policy Label
  5. Continue creating Factors and linking them until the flow configuration is complete.
  6. Create Citrix Gateway Traffic Policy for Single Sign-on to StoreFront.
  7. Edit existing Citrix Gateway, create Authentication Profile, and bind Traffic Policy

Once you are familiar with nFactor, due to the way the objects are linked together, it’s probably easier to configure nFactor from the bottom up:

  1. Create Authentication Actions for all factors – LDAP, RADIUS, etc.
  2. Create Advanced Authentication Policies for all factors
  3. Create Login Schema Profiles for all factors
  4. Create Authentication Policy Labels for all factors except the first factor.
    1. Start with leaf (bottom) factors so you can configure Next Factor when binding authentication policies in higher branch factors. For example, if your flow is Collect Username –> Perform LDAP –> Perform RADIUS, then create the RADIUS Policy Label first so you can link to it when creating the LDAP Policy Label.
  5. Create Login Schema Policy for first factor
  6. Create AAA vServer – bind Login Schema, bind Authentication Policies, and select Next Factor Policy Label
  7. Create Citrix Gateway Traffic Policy for Single Sign-on to StoreFront.
  8. Create Authentication Profile
  9. Edit existing Citrix Gateway, create Authentication Profile, and bind Traffic Policy

It can be difficult to visualize a manually-created nFactor configuration, so my ADC Virtual Server Configuration Extractor script now includes a nFactor visualizer. Here’s an example for a Native OTP configuration.

AAA Virtual Server

Create AAA Virtual Server

This section applies to NetScaler ADC Advanced Edition and Premium Edition. For NetScaler ADC Standard Edition, go to Citrix Gateway > Virtual Servers, edit a Gateway, add the Authentication Profile section, create an Authentication Profile, and then create a Authentication Virtual Server from there.

nFactor is configured on a AAA Virtual Server. Then you later link the AAA Virtual Server to the Citrix Gateway Virtual Server.

  1. If the AAA feature is not already enabled, on the left menu, expand Security, right-click AAA – Application Traffic, and click Enable Feature.
  2. Go to Security > AAA – Application Traffic. On the right, click Change authentication AAA settings.
  3. Find Login Encryption and enable it. Click OK.
  4. Go to Security > AAA > Virtual Servers.
  5. On the right, click Add.
  6. Give the Virtual Server a name.
  7. If this AAA Virtual Server is only for Citrix Gateway, then you can change the IP address Type to Non Addressable.
  8. Click OK.
  9. For a non-addressable AAA vServer, configuring the certificate is optional, but the AAA vServer will be DOWN (red) without a certificate. The AAA vServer still works even if its status is DOWN. Binding a certificate will change the AAA vServer’s status from DOWN to UP (green).
    1. In the Certificates section, click where it says No Server Certificate.
    2. In the Server Certificate Binding page, click where it says Click to select.
    3. Click the radio button next to a certificate for the AAA Virtual Server, and click Select. Since this AAA Virtual Server is not directly addressable, the chosen certificate doesn’t matter.
    4. Click Bind.
  10. Click Continue to close the Certificate section.
  11. You probably haven’ts created any Advanced Authentication Policies yet, so just click Continue. Note that this is where you bind the authentication policies for the first factor.

Bind Portal Theme to AAA Virtual Server

If this AAA Virtual Server is used not just for Citrix Gateway but also directly addressable for traffic management (Load Balancing, Content Switching), then you might want to change the AAA Portal theme.

  1. Go to Citrix Gateway > Portal Themes, and add a theme. You create the theme under Citrix Gateway, and then later bind it to the AAA Virtual Server.
  2. Create a theme based on the RfWebUI Template Theme.
  3. After adjusting the theme as desired, at the top of the portal theme editing page, click the link labelled Click to Bind and View Configured Theme.
  4. Change the selection to Authentication.
  5. Use the Authentication Virtual Server Name drop-down to select the AAA Virtual Server, and click Bind and Preview. You can close the preview window.

Client Certificate Authentication

If one of your authentication Factors is client certificate, then you must perform some SSL configuration on the AAA Virtual Server:

  1. Go to Traffic Management > SSL > Certificates > CA Certificates, and install the root certificate for the issuer of the client certificates. Root certificates do not have a key file.


  2. Go to Traffic Management >SSL > Change advanced SSL settings.

    1. Scroll down. If you see Default Profile: ENABLED, then you must use an SSL Profile to enable Client Certificate Authentication. Otherwise, you can enable Client Certificate Authentication directly on the AAA Virtual Server in the SSL Parameters section.
  3. If Default SSL Profiles are enabled, then create a new SSL Profile with Client Authentication enabled:
    1. On the left menu, expand System, and click Profiles.
    2. On the top right, switch to the tab named SSL Profile.
    3. Right-click the ns_default_ssl_profile_frontend profile, and click Add. This copies settings from the default profile.
    4. Give the Profile a name based on this goal: enable Client Certificates.
    5. Scroll down and find the Client Authentication checkbox. Check the box.
    6. Change the Client Certificate drop-down to OPTIONAL.
    7. Scroll down and click OK to close the Basic Settings section.
    8. Copying the default SSL Profile does not copy the SSL Ciphers so you’ll have to redo them.
    9. Click Done when done creating the SSL Profile.
    10. Go to Security > AAA – Application Traffic > Virtual Servers, and edit a AAA vServer.
    11. Scroll down to the SSL Profile section and click the pencil.
    12. Change the SSL Profile drop-down to the profile that has Client Certificates enabled. Click OK.
    13. Scroll down this article until you reach the instructions to bind the CA certificate.
  4. Go to Security > AAA > Virtual Servers, and edit an existing AAA Virtual Server you’re using for nFactor.
  5. If default SSL Profiles are not enabled:
    1. On the left, scroll down to the SSL Parameters section, and click the pencil icon.
    2. Check the box next to Client Authentication.
    3. Make sure Client Certificate drop-down is set to Optional.
    4. Click OK to close the SSL Parameters section.
  6. On the left, scroll up to the Certificates section, and click where it says No CA Certificate. Do this whether you are using SSL Profiles or not.

    1. In the CA Certificate Binding page, click Click to select.
    2. Click the radio button next to the root certificate for the issuer of the client certificates, and then click the blue Select button on the top of the page.
    3. Click Bind.

Login Schema

Login Schema XML File

Login Schema is an XML file providing the structure of forms-based authentication logon pages.

nFactor implies multiple authentication Factors that are chained together. Each Factor can have different Login Schema pages/files. In some authentication flows, users could be presented with multiple logon screens.

Or you can have one Login Schema gather information that can be passed on to multiple Factors, so that the later Factors don’t need to display another Login Schema. This is particularly useful for traditional two-password logon screens (LDAP + RADIUS), since each password is evaluated in a separate Factor:

  • The first password is evaluated in the first factor (e.g. LDAP). If successful, then evaluate the Next Factor.
  • The second factor (e.g. RADIUS) evaluates the second password. However, the second password has already been entered, so there’s no need to ask the user for it again. To prevent the second factor from showing another Login Schema to the user, select noschema (LSCHEMA_INT) in the Authentication Policy Label.

Several Login Schema .xml files are included with Citrix ADC under /nsconfig/loginschema/LoginSchema.

In the Citrix ADC management GUI, when creating or editing a Login Schema entity, you can Edit the labels. Citrix ADC copies the modified Login Schema to a new .xml file based on the Schema Name entered in this widow, or based on the original file name.

Or you can use WinSCP to connect to the appliance, duplicate one of the existing .xml files, and edit it as desired. For example, you can configure fields (InitialValue tag) to pre-fill information from previous Factors, as shown below:

The structure of the Login Schema file is documented at Citrix Common Authentication Forms Language Citrix Developer Documentation.

nFactor Extensibility at Citrix Docs explains how to use JavaScript to add custom login labels, add custom login credentials, customizing UI displays and so on.

CTP Sam Jacobs at SYN229 – nFactor and Login Schemas explains how to customize the .xml file.

The login schema can contain a domain drop-down. See CTX201760 nFactor – Domain Drop-Down in First Factor then Different Policy Evaluations Based on Groups for a sample configuration.

Login Schema and Authentication Factor can be a EULA. See Configure EULA as an authentication factor in NetScaler nFactor system at Citrix Docs.

Citrix CTX219545 Custom Login Labels in NetScaler nFactor Authentication: add a Requirement element with a Label sub-element to the Login Schema .xml file. Then use JavaScript to populate the label with any desired HTML. Another example is Morten Kallesoee nFactor – adding custom links.

Several more samples can be found later.

Login Schema Profile

Login Schemas define a user interface (web page form) that is shown to the user. Login Schema Profiles are bound directly to Policy Labels (aka Factors). After the user fills out the form and submits it, nFactor uses the submitted form fields to evaluate the authentication policies bound to the same Policy Label.

To create a Login Schema Profile:

  1. Create or Edit a Login Schema .XML file based on your nFactor design.
  2. Go to Security > AAA > Login Schema.
  3. On the right, switch to the tab named Profiles and click Add.
  4. Name the Login Schema.
  5. In the Authentication Schema field, click the pencil icon.
  6. The window expands to show Login Schema Files. Click the LoginSchema folder to see the files in it.
  7. Select one of the files. You can see a preview on the right.
  8. The labels can be changed by clicking the Edit button on the top right.
  9. When you Save the changes, a new file is created under /nsconfig/LoginSchema.
  10. The top of the screen shows the new file name. You’ll have to go up a folder and select the new file instead of the folder you’re looking at.
  11. Next to each file is an icon to download the file so you can modify the XML and then upload a new copy.
  12. Once you’ve found the file you want and clicked it to preview it, then on the top right, click the blue Select button. You might be tempted to click the blue Create button on the bottom of the screen but don’t do that until you have clicked the blue Select button.
  13. After you click the blue Select button, the window collapses. Look in the Authentication Schema field to make sure you selected the correct file.
  14. Click More.
  15. You typically need to save the entered credentials so you can use them later in a Single Sign-on flow to a back-end server (e.g. Citrix StoreFront). Near the bottom of the Login Schema Profile, enter a unique value between 1 and 16 for the Password Credential Index .

    • Later you reference the index value in a Traffic Policy/Profile by using the expression AAA.USER.ATTRIBUTE(#).
    • Each Login Schema can store different credentials in different indexes.
  16. Click Create to create the Login Schema profile.

If you later edit the Login Schema .xml file using WinSCP or similar, then the changes to the file might not be reflected until you edit the Login Schema Profile, and click the blue Select button for the .xml file again.

Login Schema Policy

For most factors, you can bind a Login Schema Profile directly to a Policy Label. However, the first factor is bound directly to the AAA vServer and does not use a Policy Label. To bind a Login Schema directly to a AAA vServer, you must first create a Login Schema Policy. You don’t need Login Schema Policies for any factor other than the first one.

To create a first factor Login Schema Policy:

  1. In the left menu, go to Security > AAA > Login Schema.
  2. On the right, switch to the tab named Policies, and click Add.
  3. Use the Profile drop-down to select the Login Schema Profile you already created.
  4. Enter a Default Syntax expression (e.g. true) in the Rule box.
    1. For the first factor, you can use policy expressions to control whether a Login Schema is shown to the user or not. For example, you might bind two Login Schemas to the AAA vServer but have a policy expression that only shows a Login Schema if the client IP is in the internal network instead of from the Internet.
    2. Policy expressions only apply to the first factor; subsequent factors (Policy Labels) always show their Login Schema.
  5. Click the blue Create button when done.

Bind first factor Login Schema to AAA vServer:

  1. On the left, go to Security > AAA > Virtual Servers, and edit an existing AAA Virtual Server.
  2. On the right, in the Advanced Settings column, click Login Schemas.
  3. On the bottom left, in the Login Schemas section, click where it says No Login Schema.
  4. In the Policy Binding window, click where it says Click to select.
  5. Click the radio button next to the Login Schema policy, and then click the blue Select button on the top of the window. Only Login Schema Policies appear in this list. Login Schema Profiles (without a policy) do not appear.
  6. Click Bind.

Authentication Policies

Authentication policies are a combination of policy expression, and policy action. If the expression is true, then perform the authentication action.

  • The Action is an authentication server (LDAP, RADIUS, etc.), or no authentication (i.e. do nothing, typically for selecting a Next Factor).
  • For nFactor, the policy expression must be in the newer default syntax, not the older classic syntax.

You typically create at least one Authentication Policy for each Factor. When you bind multiple Authentication Policies to one Factor, Citrix ADC checks each authentication policy in priority order until one of them succeeds.

Note: Citrix Gateway 12.0 and newer have deprecated Basic Authentication Policies (Classic Syntax). The only way to bind an Advanced Authentication Policy (Default Syntax) to Gateway is through nFactor and AAA.

Create Authentication Actions

Authentication Policies need configured Authentication Servers (e.g. LDAP, RADIUS, CERT, SAML, etc.). You can create Authentication Actions (Servers) prior to creating the Authentication Policy.

  • In the left menu, go to Authentication > Dashboard. On the right, click Add.

    • Select a Server Type. The instructions for creating these Authentication Servers are not detailed here. Some of them are detailed at the Authentication – Citrix ADC 13 procedures.
  • Or in the left menu, you can find all of the Action types under Security > AAA – Application Traffic > Policies > Authentication > Advanced Policies > Actions.
  • Or when creating an Authentication Policy, there’s a Add button that lets you create Authentication Actions/Servers.

LDAP Group Extraction

Sometimes you need to extract a user’s groups from Active Directory without authenticating. These extracted groups can then be used to select the next authentication Factor.

To configure an LDAP Action/Server for only group extraction:

  1. When creating or editing an LDAP Server/Action for only group extraction, make sure Authentication is unchecked.
  2. On the left, in the Other Settings section, make sure Group Attribute and Sub Attribute Name are filled in.

Create Authentication Policies

Once you’ve created your Authentication Actions, you can now create an Advanced Authentication Policy that links an expression to the Action:

  1. Go to Security > AAA > Policies > Authentication > Advanced Policies > Policy.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. Name your Authentication Policy.
  4. Use the Action Type drop-down to select the Action Type (e.g. LDAP). Typically each Factor is a different type of Authentication Action.

    1. If you don’t want to perform authentication, then select NO_AUTHN as the Action Type. This is useful if you only want to use this Authentication Policy expression to choose a Next Factor.
  5. If you don’t currently have any Actions configured, or if you want to create a new one, click the Add button next to the Action drop-down. The Actions/Servers are created in the normal fashion (not detailed here).
  6. In the Expression box, enter an expression using the Default Syntax. ns_true won’t work because that’s Classic syntax. There’s an Expression Editor link on the right. Or hit Ctrl+Space to see your options. true is a valid Default expression.
  7. Click Create when done.
  8. Continue creating one or more Authentication Policies for each of your Factors.

Bind First Factor to AAA

For all factors except the first factor, the Authentication Policies are bound to Authentication Policy Labels as detailed in the next section.

However, since the first factor doesn’t use a Policy Label, you instead bind the first factor’s Authentication Policies directly to the AAA vServer.

  1. Go to Security > AAA > Virtual Servers.
  2. Edit an existing AAA Virtual Server.
  3. On the left, in the Advanced Authentication Policies section, click where it says No Authentication Policy.
  4. In the Policy Binding page, click where it says Click to select.
  5. Click the radio button next to the first factor’s Advanced Authentication Policy, and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page. Only Advanced Authentication Policies appear in this list. Classic Authentication Policies do not appear.
  6. In the Binding Details section, if this Advanced Authentication Policy fails, then the Goto Expression determines what happens next. If it is set to NEXT, then the next Advanced Authentication Policy bound to this AAA Virtual Server is evaluated. If it is set to END, or if there are no more Advanced Authentication Policies bound to this AAA Virtual Server, then authentication is finished and marked as failed.
  7. The Select Next Factor field can optionally point to an Authentication Policy Label as detailed in the next section. The Next Factor is only evaluated if this Advanced Authentication Policy succeeds. You can bind a Policy Label later since you probably don’t have any yet.
  8. Click Bind.
  9. You can optionally bind more Authentication Policies and they will be evaluated in priority order. If one of the Authentication Policies succeeds, then nFactor moves to the Next Factor and the remaining Authentication Policies in this factor are ignored.

Authentication Policy Label

For all factors except for the first factor, you create a Policy Label for each factor, and then bind the Policy Labels to the various Next Factor authentication policy bind points in the nFactor flow.

Authentication Policy Labels contain two objects:

  • Login Schema
  • Advanced Authentication Policies

The Authentication Policies can have a Next Factor link to a different Policy Label. Factors are chained together through the Next Factor links.

Here’s the nFactor authentication flow:

  1. User connects to a AAA or Citrix Gateway Virtual Server.
    1. Citrix Gateway uses an Authentication Profile to select a AAA vServer than has a nFactor configuration.
  2. The Login Schema bound to the AAA Virtual Server is displayed to the user.
  3. Advanced Authentication Policies bound to the AAA Virtual Server are evaluated.
    1. If the Advanced Authentication Policy succeeds, go to the configured Next Factor, which is an Authentication Policy Label.
      1. If Next Factor is not configured, then authentication is complete and successful.
    2. If the Advanced Authentication Policy fails, and if Goto Expression is Next, then evaluate the next bound Advanced Authentication Policy.
    3. If none of the Advanced Authentication Policies succeed, then authentication failed.
  4. If the Next Factor Authentication Policy Label has a Login Schema bound to it, display it to the user.
  5. Evaluate the Advanced Authentication Policies bound to the Next Factor Authentication Policy Label.
    1. If the Advanced Authentication Policy succeeds, go to the configured Next Factor, which is an Authentication Policy Label.
      1. If Next Factor is not configured, then authentication is complete and successful.
    2. If the Advanced Authentication Policy fails, and if Goto Expression is Next, then evaluate the next bound Advanced Authentication Policy.
    3. If none of the Advanced Authentication Policies succeeds, then authentication failed.
  6. Continue evaluating the Next Factor Authentication Policy Label until authentication succeeds or fails. You can chain together an unlimited number of Authentication Policy Labels.

When binding a Login Schema to an Authentication Policy Label, you only need the Login Schema Profile. There’s no need to create a Login Schema Policy.

Not every Factor needs a Login Schema. It’s possible for a prior Factor to gather all of the credential information and simply pass it on to the next Factor. If you don’t need a Login Schema for a particular Authentication Policy Label, simply select LSCHEMA_INT, which is mapped to noschema. Or create a new Login Schema Profile based on noschema.

Create Authentication Policy Label

To create an Authentication Policy Label:

  1. Authentication Policy Labels (Factors) are configured at Security > AAA > Policies > Authentication > Advanced Policies > Policy Label.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. Give the Policy Label a name which identifies this factor.
  4. Select a Login Schema Profile or click the Add button to create one.
    • If you don’t want this factor to display anything to the user, then select LSCHEMA_INT.
  5. Click Continue. Note: you won’t be able to change the Login Schema later. But you can create a new Policy Label with a different Login Schema.
  6. In the Policy Binding section, click where it says Click to select.
  7. Click the radio button next to an Advanced Authentication Policy that evaluates this Factor and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
  8. Use the Goto Expression drop-down to select NEXT or END. If you want to bind more Advanced Authentication Policies to this Factor, then select NEXT.
  9. In the Select Next Factor field, if you want to chain to another Factor, click where it says Click to select, and bind the next Authentication Policy Label (Next Factor).

    • If you haven’t created the Policy Label for the next factor yet, you can either do it now by clicking the Add button, or return here later after you create the next Policy Label.
    • If you don’t configure a Next Factor, and if this Advanced Authentication Action succeeds, then authentication is successful and complete.
  10. Click Bind when done.
  11. You can optionally click Add Binding to add more Advanced Authentication Policies to this Policy Label (Factor). If any one of the Authentication Policies succeeds, then nFactor moves to the Next Factor and ignores the remaining Authentication Policies in this factor.
  12. When done, click Done.
  13. If you edit the Policy Label you created, notice that it’s not possible to change the Login Schema. The only way to change the Login Schema is to create a new Policy Label.

Bind Authentication Policy Label to Next Factor

Once the Policy Label (Factor) is created, you link to it from an existing Authentication Policy binding. You can select a Next Factor (Policy Label) in two places:

  • Edit an existing AAA Virtual Server that has an Authentication Policy (first factor) already bound to it and edit the binding to include the Next Factor.
  • Edit a different Policy Label, and edit an Advanced Authentication Policy binding to include the Next Factor.

To link to a Policy Label Next Factor from a AAA Virtual Server first factor:

  1. Edit an existing AAA Virtual Server that has an Advanced Authentication Policy already bound to it.
  2. On the left, in the Advanced Authentication Policies section, click the existing Authentication Policy bindings.
  3. Right-click an existing binding, and click Edit Binding.
  4. In the Select Next Factor field, click where it says Click to select.
  5. Click the radio button next to the Policy Label for the Next Factor, and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
  6. Click Bind.
  7. In the list of bound Authentication Policies, the far right shows the Next Factor.
  8. Click Close.

To link to a Policy Label Next Factor from a different Policy Label:

  1. Go to Security > AAA – Application Traffic > Policies > Authentication > Advanced Policies > Policy Label.
  2. On the right, edit a different Policy Label.
  3. Right-click an existing Authentication Policy binding and click Edit Binding.
  4. In the Binding Details section, next to Select Next Factor, click Click to select.
  5. Click the radio button next to a Policy Label for the next factor, and then click the blue Select button at the top of the window.
  6. Click Bind.
  7. In the list of bound Authentication Policies, on the far right, you can see the configured Next Factor.
  8. Click Done to close the Policy Label.
  9. Repeat linking Policy Labels (Factors) together until your nFactor flow configuration is complete.

nFactor Flow Visualizer

ADC 13 and newer have a nFactor Flow Visualizer that you can use to create flows like this:

Find the Visualizer under Security > AAA – Application Traffic > nFactor Visualizer > nFactor Flows

For an example usage of this tool, see Native One Time Passwords (OTP) – Citrix Gateway 13.

Here are some differences for the Visualizer method vs the manual method detailed in this article:

  • Manual: First factor without Policy Label – With the manual method, the first factor is bound to the AAA vServer without using a Policy Label.
    • Visualizer: First Factor is a Policy Label – The Visualizer creates a Policy Label for the first factor. Then it binds the Policy Label to the AAA vServer.
  • Manual: Login Schema Policies for First Factor – With the manual method, you create Login Schema Policies to bind the first factor’s Login Schema to the AAA vServer. Login Schema Policies have expressions that are evaluated to determine if the Login Schema should be shown or not. This lets you bind multiple Login Schemas to the AAA vServer and a policy expression determines which Login Schema is shown to the user.
    • Visualizer: no Login Schema Policies – The Visualizer does not support Login Schema Policies and thus the Login Schema configured for a Factor is always shown.

For more information, see nFactor Visualizer for simplified configuration at Citrix Docs.

nFactor for Citrix Gateway

All nFactor configuration is performed in the menu under Security > AAA – Application Traffic. When done, your nFactor Flow should be bound to a AAA vServer.

To enable nFactor for a Citrix Gateway Virtual Server, you simply create an Authentication Profile and bind it to the Gateway Virtual Server. If you unbind the Authentication Profile from the Gateway Virtual Server, then nFactor is no longer used by that Gateway.

AAA Authentication Profile

Authentication Profile links a AAA Virtual Server to Citrix Gateway and enables nFactor on Citrix Gateway.

  1. Go to Citrix Gateway > Virtual Servers.
  2. On the right, edit an existing Citrix Gateway Virtual Server.
  3. On the right, in the Advanced Settings column, click Authentication Profile.
  4. On the bottom left, click the Add button next to the Authentication Profile drop-down.
  5. Give the Authentication Profile a name.
  6. In the Authentication Virtual Server field, click where it says Click to select.
  7. Click the radio button next to the AAA Virtual Server that has nFactor configured. The AAA Virtual Server does not need an IP address. Then click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
  8. Then click Create.
  9. And click OK to close the Authentication Profile section. The Authentication Profile isn’t enabled until you click this OK button.
  10. Note: the Authentication Profile enables nFactor, which overrides any authentication policies that are bound to the Gateway Virtual Server.
  11. If one of your Factors is client certificates, then you’ll need to configure SSL Parameters and CA certificate as detailed in the next section.
  12. When you browse to your Gateway, you’ll see the Login Schema that is bound to the AAA Virtual Server.
  13. Workspace app 1809 and newer with Gateway/ADC 12.1 build 49 and newer should support nFactor authentication. Older clients with older builds do not support nFactor, so those users will have to use a web browser.

Gateway and Client Certificate Authentication

If one of your authentication Factors is certificate, then you must perform some SSL configuration on the Citrix Gateway Virtual Server:

  1. Go to Traffic Management > SSL > Certificates > CA Certificates, and install the root certificate for the issuer of the client certificates. Certificate Authority certificates do not need key files.
  2. If default SSL Profiles are enabled, then you should have already created an SSL Profile that has Client Authentication enabled.
  3. Go to Citrix Gateway > Virtual Servers, and edit an existing Citrix Gateway Virtual Server that is enabled for nFactor.
  4. If default SSL Profiles are enabled:
    1. Scroll down to the SSL Profile section, and click the pencil icon.
    2. In the SSL Profile drop-down, select the SSL Profile that has Client Authentication enabled and set to OPTIONAL. Then click OK.
  5. If default SSL Profiles are not enabled:
    1. On the left, in the SSL Parameters section, click the pencil icon.
    2. Check the box next to Client Authentication.
    3. Make sure Client Certificate drop-down is set to Optional, and click OK.
  6. For both Default SSL Profile and SSL Parameters, on the left, in the Certificates section, click where it says No CA Certificate.
  7. In the CA Certificate Binding page, click where it says Click to select.
  8. Click the radio button next to the root certificate for the issuer of the client certificates, and click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
  9. Click Bind.
  10. You might have to also bind any Intermediate CA Certificates that issued the client certificates.

Traffic Policy for nFactor Single Sign-on to StoreFront

When performing Single Sign-on to StoreFront, nFactor defaults to using the last entered password. If LDAP is not the last entered password (e.g. RADIUS), then you need to create a Traffic Policy/Profile to override the default nFactor behavior.

  1. Go to Citrix Gateway > Policies > Traffic.
  2. On the right, switch to the tab named Traffic Profiles.
  3. Click Add.

    1. Give the Traffic Profile a name.
    2. In the Protocol section, select HTTP.
    3. Set the Single Sign-on drop-down to ON. Scroll down.
    4. In the SSO Expression fields, enter an AAA.USER.ATTRIBUTE(#) expression that matches the indexes specified in the Login Schema.
    5. Click Create.
  4. On the right, switch to the tab named Traffic Policies, and click Add.

    1. Give the policy a name.
    2. Select the previously created Traffic Profile.
    3. Enter an Advanced Expression (e.g. true), and click Create.
  5. Edit an existing Citrix Gateway Virtual Server.
  6. Scroll down to the Policies section and click the plus icon.
  7. In the Choose Type page, select Traffic > Request, and click Continue.
  8. Select the previously created Traffic Policy, and click Bind.

Sample Configurations

From Citrix Docs: Sample deployments using nFactor authentication:

  • Get two passwords up-front, then pass-through the second password to the next factor. Read
  • Username and 2 passwords, then group extraction in third factor. Read
  • Configure nFactor to process the second password before the first password, Read
  • Modify first factor username for use by second factor. Read
    • NO_AUTHN authentication policy expression checks first factor POST Body login value for UPN format. If true, Next Factor is noschema Login Schema with User Expression that transforms the HTTP.REQ.USER.NAME to DOMAIN\Username before passing to second factor authentication policy.
  • Group extraction followed by certificate or LDAP authentication, based on group membership. Read

  • SAML followed by LDAP or certificate authentication, based on attributes extracted during SAML. Read
  • SAML in first factor, followed by group extraction, and then LDAP or certificate authentication, based on groups extracted. Read
  • Capture email address in first factor, and then choose one of multiple SAML iDP based on email address suffix. Read (Manuel Kolloff)

  • Prefill user name from certificate. Read
  • Certificate authentication followed by group extraction for 401 enabled traffic management virtual servers. Read
  • Certificate fallback to LDAP in same cascade; one virtual server for both certificate and LDAP authentication. Read
  • LDAP in first factor and WebAuth in second factor. Read
  • WebAuth in first factor, LDAP in second factor. Read
  • Domain drop down in first factor, then different policy evaluations based on selected domain. Read

    • Domain drop-down, then send Domain\Username to RADIUS.  Read
  • ADC 13 has a CAPTCHA authentication action instead of WEBAUTH as described in the following reCAPTCHA guides. (source = Graham Constantine in the comments) 💡

    • Google reCAPTCHA first factor, LDAP second. Read (George Spiers).
    • Supporting reCaptcha with Citrix ADC nFactor. Read
  • CTX225938 nFactor – Customizing UI to Display Images – e.g. Swivel
  • Use EPA (Endpoint Analysis) in nFactor flows . See CTX223597 Concepts and Entities Used for EPA in nFactor Authentication Through NetScaler.
  • Configure Post-Authentication EPA (Endpoint Analysis) Scan as a Factor. Read
  • Configure Pre-Authentication EPA (Endpoint Analysis) Scan as a Factor. Read
  • Configure EPA domain check combined with Smartaccess feature.  Read
  • Configure EULA (End User License Agreement) as an Authentication Factor. Read
  • Show a drop-down box in the logon form and automatically hide or show certain fields based on drop-down selection. Read

  • Step-up authentication – i.e. one Unified Gateway website needs single factor, while other website needs multi-factor. Read
  • RADIUS authentication with reversed PIN – if user enters reversed PIN, then user is under duress. This sample configuration has some interesting components:  Read
    • Policy Extension Function using the Lua language
      • Usage = HTTP.REQ.BODY(1000).TYPECAST_NVLIST_T(’=’,’&’).VALUE(”passwd1”).RPIN
    • Citrix ADC Variable of type Map with Expiration timer
      • Responder to set the variable
      • Variable identifies duress state for four hours
    • Custom syslog message (audit messageaction) triggered by a Responder
    • Default Authentication Group to put duressed user on site/farm with Session Recording enabled
    • nFactor sequence:
  • nFactor Extensibility at Citrix Docs explains how to use JavaScript to add custom login labels, add custom login credentials, customizing UI displays and so on.

Certificate auth: If Successful, LDAP only. If Failure, LDAP+RADIUS

This scenario is described in Citrix Blog Post Configuration Notes on nFactor

The authentication process flows like this:

  1. User connects to Citrix Gateway.
  2. Citrix Gateway asks user for certificate.
  3. If user selects a certificate, Citrix Gateway compares certificate signature to the CA certificate that is bound to the Citrix Gateway. If it doesn’t match, then user certificate is ignored.
  4. Bound to the Citrix Gateway Virtual Server is an Authentication Profile, which links Citrix Gateway to AAA nFactor.
  5. Certificate authentication: The lowest priority number authentication policy on the AAA Virtual Server is Certificate. If there’s a valid user certificate:
    1. Extract the user’s userPrincipalName from the certificate.
    2. Next Factor = policy label that displays a logon screen (Single-factor Login Schema)
    3. The username field is pre-populated with the userPrincipalName attribute extracted from the certificate.
    4. User is prompted to enter the LDAP password only.
    5. LDAP policy/server is configured to use userPrincipalName to login to LDAP.
    6. If successful, Citrix Gateway authentication is complete. Next step is to Single Sign-on to StoreFront.
    7. If LDAP authentication fails, then Citrix Gateway authentication fails, and the user is prompted to try LDAP-only authentication again.
  6. LDAP authentication: If certificate authentication fails, try next authentication policy bound to the AAA Virtual Server, which is a different LDAP Policy.
    1. Bound to the AAA Virtual Server is a Dual Factor Login Schema that asks for username, LDAP password, and RADIUS password.
    2. LDAP policy/server is configured to use sAMAccountName to login to LDAP. SAMAccountName means users don’t have to enter full userPrincipalName.
    3. If LDAP authentication is successful:
      1. Put username in Credential Index 1 and put password in Credential Index 2. These will later be used by a Traffic Policy to Single Sign-on to StoreFront.
      2. Proceed to next factor (Policy Label), which is RADIUS.
    4. If LDAP authentication fails, Citrix Gateway login fails, and the user is prompted to try two-factor authentication again.
  7. RADIUS authentication: the second factor Policy Label is configured with Noschema. This means no additional logon form is displayed because the RADIUS password was already collected in the previous factor.
    1. When multiple passwords are collected, they are tried in order. The first password was used by the previous factor. The second password is tried by this factor (Policy Label).
    2. RADIUS policy/profile attempts authentication.
    3. If RADIUS authentication is successful, Citrix Gateway authentication is complete. Next step is Single Sign-on to StoreFront.
    4. If RADIUS authentication fails, Citrix Gateway login fails, and the user is prompted to try two-factor authentication again.
  8. Single Sign-on to StoreFront: Citrix Gateway uses the last password collected by nFactor to Single Sign-on with StoreFront. If the last password is LDAP, then no additional configuration is needed. If the last password is not LDAP, then a Traffic Policy/Profile is needed.
    1. Bound to the Citrix Gateway Virtual Server is a Traffic Policy.
    2. The Traffic Policy/Profile users Credential Index 1 for username and Credential Index 2 for Password. These are the same indexes configured in the Dual Factor Login Schema.

The order of configuration shown below doesn’t match the authentication flow because some objects have to be created before others. This is the bottom-up approach.

# Create Auth vServer, bind server cert, bind CA cert for client certificates
# Enable Optional client certificates
add authentication vserver nFactorAAA SSL 0.0.0.0 443
bind ssl vserver nFactorAAA -certkeyName WildCorpCom
bind ssl vserver nFactorAAA -certkeyName CorpRoot -CA -ocspCheck Optional
set ssl vserver nFactorAAA -clientAuth ENABLED -clientCert Optional -ssl3 DISABLED

# Create auth policy for LDAP-UPN. UPN is extracted from certificate.
add authentication ldapAction Corp-UserPrincipalName -serverIP 10.2.2.220 -serverPort 636 -ldapBase "dc=corp,dc=local" -ldapBindDn "corp\\ctxsvc" -ldapBindDnPassword "MyPassword" -ldapLoginName userPrincipalName -groupAttrName memberOf -subAttributeName CN -secType SSL -passwdChange ENABLED
add authentication Policy Corp-UserPrincipalName -rule true -action Corp-UserPrincipalName

# Create PolicyLabel LDAPPasswordOnly with Single-factor Login Schema
# Login Schema has InitialValue with username from certificate.
add authentication loginSchema SingleAuth -authenticationSchema "/nsconfig/loginschema/LoginSchema/SingleAuth-Corp.xml"
add authentication policylabel LDAPPasswordOnly -loginSchema SingleAuth
bind authentication policylabel LDAPPasswordOnly -policyName Corp-UserPrincipalName -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT

# Create Cert policy and bind to AAA vServer with LDAPPasswordOnly PolicyLabel as Next Factor
# Cert policy must have lower priority number (higher priority) than LDAP-SAM policy
# Cert is evaluated first. If succeed, ask for LDAP password. If fails, ask for two factor.
add authentication certAction Cert_Auth_Profile -userNameField SubjectAltName:PrincipalName
add authentication Policy Cert_Auth_Policy -rule true -action Cert_Auth_Profile
bind authentication vserver nFactorAAA -policy Cert_Auth_Policy -priority 100 -nextFactor LDAPPasswordOnly -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT

# Create LDAP-SAM Auth Policy for two-factor
# Only evaluated if cert auth fails. Login Schema asks for user, password, and passcode.
add authentication ldapAction Corp-Gateway -serverIP 10.2.2.220 -serverPort 636 -ldapBase "dc=corp,dc=local" -ldapBindDn "corp\\ctxsvc" -ldapBindDnPassword "MyPassword" -ldapLoginName samaccountname -groupAttrName memberOf -subAttributeName CN -secType SSL -passwdChange ENABLED
add authentication Policy Corp-SAMAccountName -rule true -action Corp-Gateway

# Create RADIUS Auth Policy for two-factor
add authentication radiusAction RADIUS-Action -serverIP 10.2.2.42 -serverPort 1812 -radKey MyKey
add authentication Policy RADIUS-Policy -rule true -action RADIUS-Action

# Create Dual-factor Login Schema and bind directly to AAA vServer
# This Login Schema is only shown if Cert auth fails
add authentication loginSchema DualAuth -authenticationSchema "/nsconfig/loginschema/LoginSchema/DualAuth.xml" -userCredentialIndex 1 -passwordCredentialIndex 2
add authentication loginSchemaPolicy DualAuth -rule true -action DualAuth
bind authentication vserver nFactorAAA -policy DualAuth -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression END

# Create RADIUS Policy Label with noschema and RADIUS Auth Policy
# Already got passcode from previous factor so don't show Login Schema again
add authentication loginSchema Noschema -authenticationSchema noschema
add authentication policylabel NoSchema-RADIUS -loginSchema Noschema
bind authentication policylabel NoSchema-RADIUS -policyName RADIUS-Policy -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT

# Bind LDAP-SAM Auth Policy to AAA vServer with RADIUS as next factor
# LDAP-SAM Auth Policy must have higher priority number (lower priority) than Cert Policy
bind authentication vserver nFactorAAA -policy Corp-SAMAccountName -priority 110 -nextFactor NoSchema-RADIUS -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT

# Create Authentication Profile to link AAA with Gateway. Bind to Gateway.
add authentication authnProfile nFactor -authnVsName nFactorAAA -AuthenticationHost aaa.corp.com
add vpn vserver gateway.corp.com SSL 10.2.2.220 443 -icaOnly ON -dtls ON -Listenpolicy NONE -tcpProfileName nstcp_default_XA_XD_profile -appflowLog ENABLED -authnProfile nFactor

# Enable Optional Client certs on Gateway
set ssl vserver gateway.corp.com -clientAuth ENABLED -clientCert Optional -ssl3 DISABLED
bind ssl vserver gateway.corp.com -certkeyName CorpRoot -CA -ocspCheck Optional

# Create Traffic Policy to SSON to StoreFront. Bind to Gateway.
add vpn trafficAction nFactorSSO http -kcdAccount NONE -userExpression "http.req.user.attribute(1)" -passwdExpression "http.req.user.attribute(2)"
add vpn trafficPolicy nFactorSSO ns_true nFactorSSO
bind vpn vserver gateway.corp.com -policy nFactorSSO -priority 100

Group Extraction, followed by LDAP (Active Directory), or Azure MFA (NPS)

Also see Mark DePalma Running RSA SecurID/Azure MFA side-by-side using an AD group on NetScaler Gateway 💡

Azure MFA is available as a plug-in for Microsoft Network Policy Server (NPS), which is a Microsoft RADIUS server and a built-in Windows Server Role.

NPS performs both AD authentication and Azure MFA authentication. Citrix Gateway sends the user’s AD password to NPS. NPS verifies AD, and then the NPS Azure MFA plug-in calls the user (or push notification to the user). If both AD and MFA are successful, then NPS sends back RADIUS-Accept.

This sample nFactor configuration will first ask for username only. Depending on the user’s group membership and client IP address, nFactor will either perform RADIUS NPS authentication (multi-factor), or nFactor will do LDAP only (single-factor).

Summary:

  1. First factor Login Schema asks for Username only.
    1. LDAP Group Extraction (with Authentication disabled) reads the user’s groups from AD.
  2. Second factor checks for group membership and sends to one of two different third factors.
  3. If user is in LDAP Group, or Client IP is on internal network, then perform LDAP-only authentication.
    1. Login schema asks for AD password.
    2. LDAP Policy authenticates with LDAP Server (Active Directory).
  4. Otherwise, perform RADIUS (two-factor) authentication.
    1. Login schema asks for AD password.
      • Note: NPS with MFA plugin only needs the AD password. Alternatively, you could use a Login Schema that asks for both LDAP password and RADIUS password.
    2. RADIUS Policy uses the entered AD password to authenticate to Microsoft NPS and Azure MFA.

CLI Commands. Note, these objects are created in the required order, which is backwards from how you would want to configure them.

  1. Add cert for AAA vServer. Link the cert to Intermediate. 
    add ssl certKey WildcardCorpCom -cert WildcardCorpCom.pfx -key WildcardCorpCom.pfx -inform PFX -passcrypt "myPassword"

link ssl certKey WildcardCorpCom Intermediate
  2. Enable AAA feature if not already enabled. 
    enable ns feature AAA
  3. Create first factor LDAP Action (LDAP Server) and LDAP Policy (expression) for Group Extraction. Authentication is disabled. This is the first factor that is bound directly to the AAA vServer. 
    add authentication ldapAction LDAP-Corp-GroupExtract -serverIP 10.2.2.11 -serverPort 636 -ldapBase "dc=corp,dc=local" -ldapBindDn ctxsvc@corp.local -ldapBindDnPassword MyPassword -ldapLoginName sAMAccountName -groupAttrName memberOf -subAttributeName cn -secType SSL -authentication DISABLED

add authentication Policy LDAP-Corp-GroupExtract -rule true -action LDAP-Corp-GroupExtract
  4. Create a third-factor LDAP Action (LDAP Server) and Authentication Policy (expression) for Active Directory Authentication. This is the authentication factor if user is in the LDAP Users group. 
    add authentication ldapAction LDAP-Corp -serverIP 10.2.2.11 -serverPort 636 -ldapBase "dc=corp,dc=local" -ldapBindDn ctxsvc@corp.local -ldapBindDnPassword MyPassword -ldapLoginName sAMAccountName -groupAttrName memberOf -subAttributeName cn -secType SSL -passwdChange ENABLED

add authentication Policy LDAP-Corp -rule true -action LDAP-Corp
  5. Create a third-factor RADIUS Action (RADIUS Server) and Authentication Policy (expression) for NPS. 
    add authentication radiusAction NPS -serverIP 10.2.2.42 -serverPort 1812 -radKey MySecret

add authentication Policy NPS -rule true -action NPS
  6. Create the second factor NO_AUTHN authentication policies to determine the next factor based on the user’s group membership. NO_AUTHN means don’t authenticate. Instead, these policies will have a Next Factor that points to the Authentication Policies that we created earlier. If the policy expression is true, then go to Next Factor. Next Factor is configured later when binding these policies to the second factor PolicyLabel. Note: the group name is case sensitive and must match the Active Directory group name. 
    add authentication Policy LDAP-Only -rule "http.REQ.USER.IS_MEMBER_OF(\"LDAP\") || client.IP.SRC.IN_SUBNET(10.2.2.0/24)" -action NO_AUTHN

add authentication Policy TwoFactor -rule "client.IP.SRC.IN_SUBNET(10.2.2.0/24).NOT" -action NO_AUTHN
  7. Create first factor Login Schema Profile for username-only group extraction. You can copy the built-in OnlyUsername.xml and modify it with your desired labels. Since this Login Schema Profile is bound to the AAA vServer, it needs a Login Schema Policy (expression). The other two Login Schema Profiles are bound to PolicyLabels and thus don’t need Login Schema Policies. 
    add authentication loginSchema OnlyUsername -authenticationSchema "/nsconfig/loginschema/LoginSchema/OnlyUsername.xml"

add authentication loginSchemaPolicy OnlyUsername -rule true -action OnlyUsername
  8. Create third factor Login Schema Profile for AD Authentication. The .xml file is copied from the built-in PrefillUserFromExpr.xml but with modified labels for AD authentication. The username is pre-filled in from the first factor. 
    add authentication loginSchema LDAPPasswordOnly -authenticationSchema "/nsconfig/loginschema/LDAPPassword.xml"
  9. Create third factor Login Schema Profile for NPS Authentication. The .xml file is copied from the built-in PrefillUserFromExpr.xml but with modified labels for NPS authentication. The username is pre-filled in from the first factor. 
    add authentication loginSchema NPSPasswordOnly -authenticationSchema "/nsconfig/loginschema/NPSPassword.xml"
  10. Create third factor PolicyLabel for Active Directory authentication with Active Directory Login Schema and Active Directory Authentication Policy. 
    add authentication policylabel LDAPPasswordAuth -loginSchema LDAPPasswordOnly

bind authentication policylabel LDAPPasswordAuth -policyName LDAP-Corp -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT
  11. Create third factor PolicyLabel for NPS authentication with NPS Login Schema and NPS Authentication Policy. 
    add authentication policylabel NPSPasswordAuth -loginSchema NPSPasswordOnly

bind authentication policylabel NPSPasswordAuth -policyName NPS -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT
  12. Create second factor PolicyLabel with Policies that choose Next Factor. This PolicyLabel is processed before the two we just created. 
    add authentication policylabel CheckForAuthType -loginSchema LSCHEMA_INT

bind authentication policylabel CheckForAuthType -policyName TwoFactor -priority 90 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT -nextFactor NPSPasswordAuth

bind authentication policylabel CheckForAuthType -policyName LDAP-Only -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT -nextFactor LDAPPasswordAuth
  13. Create AAA vServer. Bind Login Schema Policy (username only) and Group Extraction Policy. 
    add authentication vserver AAA SSL 10.x.x.218 443
bind authentication vserver AAA -policy OnlyUsername -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression END
bind authentication vserver AAA -policy LDAP-Corp-GroupExtract -priority 100 -nextFactor CheckForAuthType -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT
  14. Perform additional steps not detailed here:
    1. For Traffic Management:
      1. Create a Session Policy and bind it to the AAA vServer.
      2. Enable authentication on the Load Balancing or Content Switching vServer.
    2. For Citrix Gateway, create an Authentication Profile, and bind it to the Gateway vServer.

Native One Time Passwords (OTP) – Citrix Gateway 13

Last Modified: Mar 17, 2023 @ 8:12 am

133 Comments

Navigation

Change Log

Overview

Citrix ADC 13 Native OTP lets you enable two-factor authentication without purchasing any other authentication product. A typical configuration uses Citrix SSO app (mobile VPN Client) to receive push notifications, or Google Authenticator to generate Passcodes. See the following for an overview:

Here are some notes and requirements for Native OTP:

  • Licensing – Citrix ADC Native OTP is part of nFactor, and thus requires Citrix ADC Advanced Edition or Citrix ADC Premium Edition licensing. Citrix ADC Standard Edition licensing is not sufficient.
    • OTP Push Notifications require ADC Premium Edition
  • Workspace app 1809 and newer with Citrix Gateway 12.1 build 49 and newer support nFactor authentication. Older Receivers and older NetScalers don’t support nFactor with Receiver, so you’ll instead have to use a web browser.

  • Citrix Gateway VPN Plug-in 12.1 build 49 and later support nFactor when authenticating from the VPN Plug-in.

  • Push notifications – Citrix ADC 13 and newer supports OTP push notifications of logon request to the mobile (iOS, Android) Citrix SSO app. Other authenticator apps are not supported for OTP Push, but they can be used with OTP Passcode.
  • Authenticator – If not using Citrix SSO app, then Google Authenticator can generate passcodes. Christian in the comments indicated that Microsoft Authenticator also works. Click on plus sign -> other (Google,…).
  • Internet for Push – Push notifications requires the Citrix ADC appliance to be able to send API calls across the Internet to Citrix Cloud.
  • Active Directory attribute – Citrix ADC stores OTP device enrollment secrets in an string-based Active Directory attribute. Citrix’s documentation uses the userParameters Active Directory attribute.
    • The LDAP bind account must have permission to modify this attribute on every user.
    • The userParameters attribute must not be populated. Active Directory Users & Computers might set the userParameters attribute if you modify any of the RDS property pages.
  • Enroll multiple devices – Citrix ADC 13 and newer lets you control the number of devices that a user can enroll.
  • Manageotp is difficult to secure – The manageotp website is usually only protected by single factor authentication so external access must be blocked.
    • Andreas Nick OTPEdit is an out-of-band tool to register OTP devices without using manageotp.

Notes on Citrix ADC Configuration Objects for OTP

Here are some notes on the Citrix ADC OTP configuration objects. Detailed instructions are provided later.

  • Make sure NTP is configured on the Citrix ADC. Accurate time is required.
  • AAA vServer – nFactor requires a AAA vServer, which can be non-addressable. You don’t need any additional public IP for OTP.
    • An Authentication Profile links the AAA vServer to the Citrix Gateway vServer.
  • Citrix Cloud – For Push notifications, create a Citrix Cloud account. No Citrix Cloud licensing needed. Citrix ADC uses Cloud API credentials to authenticate with Citrix Cloud.
  • NSC_TASS cookie – To access the manageotp web page, users add /manageotp to the end of the Gateway URL. Citrix ADC puts this URL path into a cookie called NSC_TASS. You can use this cookie and its value in policy expressions for determining which Login Schema is shown to the user.
  • Login Schema for manageotp – The built-in Login Schema file named SingleAuthManageOTP.xml has hidden fields that enable the manageotp web page. If the Login Schema Policy expression permits the SingleAuthManageOTP.xml Login Schema to be shown to the user, then after authentication the user will be taken to the manageotp web page.

    • LDAP authentication is expected to be bound to the same factor as this SingleAuthManageOTP login schema.
    • The next factor is a LDAP Policy/Server with authentication disabled (unchecked) but with arguments specifying the Active Directory attribute for the OTP Secret and Push Service configuration.

  • Login Schema for OTP authentication – The built-in Login Schema file named DualAuthPushOrOTP.xml performs the two-factor authentication utilizing the push service. There’s a checkbox that lets users choose Passcode instead of Push. This login schema has a Credential called otppush.

    • If you prefer to not use Push, then you can use a normal DualAuth.xml Login Schema file since for passcode authentication there are no special Login Schema requirements other than collecting two password fields.
    • Both methods expect an authenticating LDAP Policy/Server to be bound to the same Factor as the Login Schema.
    • The next factor should be a non-authenticating LDAP Policy/Server that optionally has the the Push Service defined and must have the OTP Secret attribute defined.
  • Single Sign-on to StoreFront – The OTP dual authentication Login Schema essentially collects two passwords (AD password plus push, or AD password plus passcode). Later, Citrix Gateway needs to use the AD password to perform Single Sign-on to StoreFront. To ensure the AD password is used instead of the OTP passcode, configure the OTP dual authentication Login Schema to store the AD password in a AAA attribute and then use a Citrix Gateway Traffic Policy/Profile to utilize the AAA attribute during Single Sign-on to StoreFront.
  • nFactor Visualizer – Citrix ADC 13 has a nFactor Visualizer to simplify the OTP configuration. Or you can manually create the LDAP Policies/Actions, the Login Schema Policies/Profiles, the PolicyLabels, and then bind them to a AAA vServer.

OTP Encryption

ADC 13.0 build 41 and newer let you encrypt the OTP secrets stored in Active Directory.

ADC uses a certificate to encrypt the contents of the Attribute. It currently is not possible to configure the certificate from the GUI, so you’ll need to SSH to the ADC and run the following command:

bind vpn global -userDataEncryptionKey MyCertificate

To enable OTP attribute encryption:

  1. In the ADC menu, go to Security > AAA – Application Traffic.
  2. On the right, click Change authentication AAA OTP Parameter.
  3. Check the box for OTP Secret encryption and then click OK.
  4. If you have a previous implementation of ADC OTP that stored unencrypted OTP secrets, then use the Python OTP encryption tool at /var/netscaler/otptool/OTP_encryption_tool to encrypt the AD attribute using the userDataEncryptionKey certificate. The same tool can be used to change the encryption certificate. More details at OTP encryption tool at Citrix Docs. Also see CTP Julian Jakob Citrix NetScaler – OTP Encryption Tool.

AAA Virtual Server

Create a AAA vServer that is the anchor point for our OTP nFactor configuration.

  1. Make sure the time is correct on the NetScaler. Click the Configuration tab to see the current System Time. Make sure NTP is configured at System > NTP Servers.
  2. Go to Security > AAA – Application Traffic.
  3. If the AAA feature is not enabled, then right-click the AAA node, and click Enable Feature.
  4. Go to Security > AAA – Application Traffic > Virtual Servers.
  5. On the right, click Add.
  6. This AAA vServer is for OTP so name it accordingly.
  7. Change the IP Address Type to Non Addressable. You don’t need to specify any additional IP address.
  8. Click the blue OK button.
  9. Click where it says No Server Certificate.

    1. In the Server Certificate Binding section, click Click to select.
    2. Click the radio button next to a certificate, and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page. You can select the same certificate as the Citrix Gateway Virtual Server.
    3. Click Bind.
  10. Click Continue to close the Certificate section.
  11. In the Advanced Authentication Policies section, don’t bind anything and just click Continue. We’ll bind a nFactor Flow later.
  12. You can optionally improve the SSL ciphers on this AAA Virtual Server but it’s probably not necessary since this AAA vServer is not directly addressable.
  13. Nothing else is needed at this time so click the blue back arrow on the top left.

Push Service

If your Citrix ADC has Internet access, then you can enable OTP Push Authentication. The ADC must be able to reach the following FQDNs:

  • mfa.cloud.com
  • trust.citrixworkspacesapi.net

Create an API Client at citrix.cloud.com:

  1. Go to https://citrix.cloud.com and login. Your cloud account does not need any licensed services.
  2. On the top left, click the hamburger (menu) icon, and then click Identity and Access Management.
  3. Switch to the tab named API Access.
  4. On this page, notice the Customer ID. You’ll need this value later.
  5. Enter a name for a new API client and then click Create Client
  6. Click Download to download the client credentials.

On ADC 13, create the Push Service:

  1. In Citrix ADC 13 management GUI, navigate to the Push Service node. The easiest way to find it is to enter Push in the search box on the top left.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. In the Create Push Service page, do the following:
    1. Enter a name for the Push Service.
    2. Enter the Client ID and Client Secret that you downloaded when creating your API Client.
    3. Enter the Customer ID shown on the Create Client web page at cloud.com. Make sure there are no hidden characters or whitespace around the Customer ID.
  4. Click Create.
  5. On the top right, click the refresh icon until the Status changes to COMPLETE. If it won’t go past CCTOKEN, then make sure you entered the API Client info correctly, especially the Customer ID, which might have hidden characters around it.

LDAP Actions/Servers

Create three LDAP Actions (aka LDAP Servers):

  • One LDAP Action for normal LDAP authentication against Active Directory
  • One LDAP Action to set the OTP Active Directory attribute and register with push
  • One LDAP Action to perform push authentication (in a dual-authentication flow)

Create normal LDAP Action

  1. Go to Security > AAA – Application Traffic > Policies > Authentication > Advanced Policies > Actions > LDAP.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. Create a normal LDAP Server if you don’t have one already. This one has Authentication enabled. There are no special instructions for this LDAP Server.

Create LDAP Action for OTP Device Registration

Create the LDAP Action for OTP device registration that sets the OTP Active Directory attribute and registers with push:

  1. Create another LDAP Action.
  2. Name it according to this goal: used by the manageotp web site to set the OTP authenticator in Active Directory.
  3. On the right, uncheck the box next to Authentication.
  4. Make sure the Administrator Bind DN has permissions to modify the OTP Secret Active Directory attribute for all users. A regular non-admin LDAP Bind account won’t work.
  5. If you cloned an existing LDAP Server, then make sure you re-enter the Administrator Password or the new LDAP Action won’t work.
  6. Click Test LDAP Reachability.
  7. Configure the Server Logon Name Attribute to match the one you configured in the normal authentication LDAP Server.
  8. In the Other Settings section, on the bottom right, find the OTP Secret field. Enter the name of the Active Directory attribute where Citrix ADC will store the user’s OTP secret. You can use the userParameters attribute if that attribute isn’t being used for anything else.
    • userParameters is populated by Active Directory Users & Computers if you set anything on the RDS tabs (e.g. RDS Roaming Profile).
  9. Select the Push Service that you created earlier.
  10. Click Create when done.

Create LDAP Action for OTP Authentication

Create a LDAP Action that performs OTP push authentication or verifies the OTP Passcode. The only difference from the prior LDAP Action is the addition of an LDAP Search Filter.

  1. Create another LDAP Action.
  2. Give the LDAP Action a name.
  3. On the right, uncheck the box next to Authentication.
  4. Make sure the Administrator Bind DN has permissions to read the OTP Secret Active Directory attribute.
  5. If you cloned an existing LDAP Server, then make sure you re-enter the Administrator Password or the new LDAP Action won’t work.
  6. Click Test LDAP Reachability.
  7. In the Other Settings section, configure the Server Logon Name Attribute to match the one you configured in the normal authentication LDAP Server.
  8. In the Search Filter field, enter the text userParameters>=#@. This syntax ensures that only users with enrolled authenticators can login. See George Spiers NetScaler native OTP for more info.
  9. In the Other Settings section, on the bottom right, find the OTP Secret field. Enter the name of the Active Directory attribute containing the user’s OTP secret.
  10. In the Push Service drop-down, select the Push Service that you already created.
  11. Click Create when done.

nFactor Visualizer

We will build a nFactor Flow that looks something like this:

  • First factor on the left chooses either OTP Device Registration or OTP Authentication. If user enters /manageotp, then nFactor Flow takes the top path. Otherwise, nFactor flow takes the bottom path.
    • Login Schema is not needed for the first factor.
  • Second factor for Manage OTP = Login Schema with Manage OTP flag and normal LDAP authentication before allowing users to add devices.
    • Third factor is just an LDAP Policy configured with the OTP Active Directory attribute and Push Service. No Login Schema needed.
  • Second factor for OTP Authentication = Login Schema with OTP Push (or OTP Passcode) and normal LDAP authentication.
    • Third factor is just an LDAP Policy with the OTP Active Directory attribute and Push Service. No Login Schema needed.

nFactor Visualizer notes:

  • nFactor Visualizer is not required. You can instead follow the older manual ADC 12.1 instructions.
  • It doesn’t seem to be possible to rename any part of the flow once it’s created. To rename, you basically remove the entire flow and rebuild it.
  • nFactor Visualizer does not support policy expressions for Login Schemas so the older ADC 12.1 instructions must be modified to support two different branches.

Create Flow and first factor that selects Manage or selects Authenticate

  1. In ADC 13, go to Security > AAA – Application Traffic > nFactor Visualizer > nFactor Flows. Or search the menu for nFactor.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. Click the blue plus icon to create a factor.
  4. Name the factor based on this goal: choose manageotp or authenticate based on whether the user entered /manageotp or not. The name of the first factor is also the name of the nFactor Flow.
  5. Click the blue Create button.
  6. The first factor does not need a Schema.
  7. In the first factor, click where it says Add Policy.
  8. In the Choose Policy to Add page, click Add to create an authentication policy.

    1. Name this policy according to this goal: if this policy’s expression is true, then select the manageotp branch (instead of OTP authentication).
    2. For the Action Type drop-down, select NO_AUTHN. This policy is merely a decision point for the next factor so no actual authentication will occur at this time. The next factor is configured later.
    3. In the Expression box, enter something similar to the following. The IP subnet expression restricts the manageotp web page to only internal users. 
      http.req.cookie.value("NSC_TASS").eq("manageotp") && client.IP.SRC.IN_SUBNET(10.2.0.0/16)
    4. In newer ADC 13, you might have to change the expression to eq /manageotp, or change it to contains manageotp. (source = Samuel LEGRAND Native OTP issues on Citrix ADC 13) 💡 
      http.req.cookie.value("NSC_TASS").eq("/manageotp") && client.IP.SRC.IN_SUBNET(10.2.0.0/16)
http.req.cookie.value("NSC_TASS").contains("manageotp") && client.IP.SRC.IN_SUBNET(10.2.0.0/16)
    5. Then click the blue Create button.
  9. Click the blue Add button to bind this policy to the factor.
  10. In the first factor, below the policy you just added, click the blue plus arrow to create another policy.
  11. In the Choose Policy to Add page, click Add to create another policy.

    1. Name the policy according to this goal: select the dual factor OTP authentication branch.
    2. For the Action Type drop-down, select NO_AUTHN. This is a decision point policy without authentication that leads to the next factor that does the actual authentication.
    3. In the Expression box, enter true to capture all OTP users that did not match the prior manageotp policy.
    4. Click the blue Create button.
  12. Click Add to bind this policy to the first factor but after (higher priority number) than the manageotp policy.

Create second factor for manageotp

  1. In the first factor, click the green plus icon to the right of the “SelectManageOTP” policy. If the “SelectManageOTP” policy is true, then this new factor will be evaluated.
  2. Name this factor according to this goal: perform single-factor LDAP authentication before allowing access to the manageotp web page.
  3. Then click the blue Create button.
  4. In the second factor, click where it says Add Schema.
  5. In the Choose Schema page, click Add to create a Login Schema.

    1. Name the Login Schema according to this goal: ask user for one password that will be verified with LDAP (Active Directory) before showing the manageotp web page.
    2. In the Authentication Schema field, click the pencil icon.
    3. The existing window expands to show the Login Schema Files. On the left, click the LoginSchema folder to see the files in that folder.
    4. In the list of files, click SingleAuthManageOTP.xml. This login schema asks for one password and has the special hidden credential to enable the manageotp web page.
    5. To actually select this file, on the top right, click the blue Select button. The Login Schema window will then collapse so that Login Schema Files are no longer shown.
    6. Make sure the Authentication Schema field shows the Login Schema file that you selected.
    7. Then click the blue Create button.
  6. Click OK to bind the Schema to the factor.
  7. In the second factor, below the Schema, click Add Policy.
  8. In the Choose Policy to Add page, if you already have a normal Advanced Expression LDAP policy, then select it.
  9. Otherwise, click Add to create one.

    1. Name this policy according to this goal: perform normal LDAP authentication against an Active Directory domain.
    2. In the Action Type drop-down, select LDAP.
    3. In the Action drop-down, select the LDAP Action/Server you created earlier that performs normal authentication.
    4. In the Expression box, enter true, which is an Advanced Expression.
    5. Click the blue Create button.
  10. Click Add to bind this LDAP Policy to the factor.

Create third factor that registers an OTP device with Active Directory and Push

  1. In the second factor, click the green plus icon to create another factor. This new factor is only evaluated if the LDAP Policy is successful.
  2. Name the factor according to this goal: register the device with Active Directory and optionally Push.
  3. This factor does not need any Schema.
  4. In the third factor, click Add Policy
  5. In the Choose Policy to Add page, click Add to create a policy.

    1. Name the policy according to this goal: Register OTP devices using LDAP Action without authentication that has the OTP Secret Attribute specified.
    2. In the Action Type drop-down, select LDAP.
    3. In the Action drop-down, select the LDAP Action you created earlier that registers new devices. Make sure authentication is disabled in the LDAP Action, and make sure it has OTP Secret and optionally OTP Push configured.
    4. In the Expression field, enter true.
    5. Click the blue Create button.
  6. Click the blue Add button to bind this policy to the factor.

The Factors for manageotp are complete. Now we build the factors for authenticating using OTP.

Create a second factor for LDAP Authentication

  1. Go back to the first factor and click the green plus icon next to the OTP Authentication policy.
  2. Name the factor according to this goal: ask user for one password + push, or two passwords, and then perform LDAP authentication. OTP authentication is performed in the next factor (see below).
  3. In the second factor, click where it says Add Schema.
  4. In the Choose Schema window, click Add.

    1. Name the Login Schema according to this goal: ask for one password + OTP push, or ask for two passwords.
    2. In the Authentication Schema field, click the pencil icon.
    3. The window expands to show Login Schema Files. On the left, click the LoginSchema folder to see the files under it.
    4. On the left, click the DualAuthPushOrOTP.xml file.
    5. Or if you don’t want push, then click a normal two password schema like DualAuth.xml. You can modify the DualAuth.xml file to indicate to the user that the OTP Passcode is expected in the second field.
    6. Then on the top right click the blue Select button. This causes the Login Schema window to collapse and no longer show the Login Schema Files.
    7. In the Authentication Schema field, makes sure the correct file name is selected.
    8. Click More.
    9. At the bottom, in the Password Credential Index field, enter a 1 to save the first password into AAA Attribute 1, which we’ll use later in a Traffic Policy that performs Single Sign-on to StoreFront.
    10. Then click the blue Create button.
  5. Click OK to bind the Schema to the factor.
  6. In the second factor, below the schema, click where it says Add Policy.
  7. In the Select Policy drop-down, select your normal LDAP Active Directory authentication policy. This is the same one you used for the second factor in the manageotp branch.
  8. Click the blue Add button to bind this LDAP policy to the second factor.

Create third factor to perform OTP authentication (Push or Passcode)

  1. In the second factor, click the green plus icon next to the LDAP Policy to create another factor.
  2. Name the factor according to this goal: perform OTP Push or Passcode authentication.
  3. Be aware that the nFactor Visualizer might swap your third factors.
  4. This third factor does not need a Login Schema.
  5. In the new third factor (probably the top one, follow the arrows), click where it says Add Policy.
  6. In the Choose Policy to Add page, click Add to create a policy.

    1. Name this policy according to this goal: perform OTP Push or OTP Passcode authentication.
    2. In the Action Type drop-down, select LDAP.
    3. In the Action drop-down, select the LDAP action you created earlier that verifies the OTP push or passcode. This is the Action that has the LDAP Filter configured.
    4. In the Expression box, enter true.
    5. Click the blue Create button.
  7. Click the blue Add button to bind this policy to the third factor.
  8. Click the blue Done button to close the Flow.

Bind nFactor Flow to AAA Virtual Server

  1. In the nFactor Flows menu node, highlight the nFactor Flow and click the button labelled Bind to Authentication Server.
  2. In the Authentication Server drop-down, select the AAA vServer you created earlier.
  3. Everything else should already be filled in so just click the blue Create button.

Maximum Number of Registered OTP Devices

ADC 13 lets you restrict the number of OTP devices each user can register:

  1. In the ADC menu, go to Security > AAA – Application Traffic.
  2. On the right, click Change authentication AAA OTP Parameter.
  3. Enter the number of devices each user can register and then click OK.
  4. When the user attempts to register more than the max number of devices, the error message is not user friendly.
  5. But you can see the actual error by grepping /var/log/ns.log for otp. which might show <Max permitted otp devices reached>.

Traffic Policy for Single Sign-on to StoreFront

Create Traffic Profile

  1. On the left, go to Citrix Gateway > Policies > Traffic.
  2. On the right, switch to the tab named Traffic Profiles, and click Add.
  3. Name the Traffic Profile according to this goal: use the AAA attribute 1 as password when doing Single Sign-on to StoreFront.
  4. Scroll down.
  5. In the SSO Password Expression box, enter the following which uses the Login Schema Password Attribute specified earlier. 
    AAA.USER.ATTRIBUTE(1)
  6. Click the blue Create button.

Create Traffic Policy

  1. On the right, switch to the tab named Traffic Policies, and click Add.
  2. In the Request Profile field, select the Traffic Profile you just created.
  3. Name the Traffic Policy.
  4. In the Expression box, enter true (Advanced Syntax).
    • If your Citrix Gateway Virtual Server allows full VPN, change the expression to the following. Source = Julien Mooren at NetScaler – Native OTP is breaking SSL VPN. 
      http.req.method.eq(post)||http.req.method.eq(get) && false
  5. Click the blue Create button.

Citrix Gateway, Traffic Policy, and Authentication Profile

Note: ADC 13.0 build 36.27 will perform a core dump if AppFlow is enabled on the appliance so make sure AppFlow is disabled under Advanced Features. The core dump seems to happen even if no AppFlow policies are bound to the Gateway Virtual Server.

Edit an existing Citrix Gateway Virtual Server

  1. Go to Citrix Gateway > Virtual Servers.
  2. Edit an existing Gateway vServer. If you don’t have one, see the other Citrix Gateway topics on this site.

Bind the Traffic Policy

  1. While editing a Gateway Virtual Server, scroll down to the Policies section, and click the plus icon.
  2. Change the Choose Policy drop-down to Traffic, and then click the blue Continue button.
  3. In the Policy Binding section, click Click to select.
  4. Click the radio button next to the Traffic Policy you created earlier, and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
  5. Click the blue Bind button.

Create Authentication Profile

Create and bind an Authentication Profile to link the Gateway Virtual Server to the AAA Virtual Server:

  1. While editing a Gateway Virtual Server, on the right, in the Advanced Settings column, click Authentication Profile.
  2. On the left, scroll down to the Authentication Profile section.
  3. Click Add to create one.
  4. Authentication Profile links the Citrix Gateway vServer with the OTP AAA vServer, so name it accordingly.
  5. In the Authentication Virtual Server section, click Click to select.
  6. Click the radio button next to the OTP AAA vServer, and then click the blue Select button at the top of the page.
  7. Click the blue Create button.
  8. Scroll down again to the Authentication Profile section, and click the blue OK button. Your selection isn’t saved until you click OK.
  9. The Portal Theme bound to the Gateway Virtual Server should be X1, RfWebUI, or a derivative.

Update Content Switching Expression for Unified Gateway

If your Citrix Gateway Virtual Server is behind a Unified Gateway (Content Switching Virtual Server), then you must update the Content Switching Expression to include the manageotp paths.

  1. In the Citrix ADC GUI, navigate to Configuration> Traffic Management > Content Switching > Policies.
  2. On the right, select the Unified Gateway Content Switching Policy, and then click Edit.
  3. Append the following expression under the Expression area, and then click OK. 
    || HTTP.REQ.URL.CONTAINS("/manageotp")

Manageotp User Experience

To access the manageotp web page:

  1. Point your browser to https://mygateway.corp.com/manageotp or similar. Add /manageotp to the end of your Gateway URL.
  2. Notice it’s only single-factor authentication. Login using normal LDAP credentials.
  3. Click Add Device.
  4. Enter a device name, and click Go.
  5. For OTP Push, on your phone, install the Citrix SSO app if it’s not already installed. Then launch it.
    1. Switch to the Password Tokens tab and tap Add New Token.
    2. Tap Scan QR Code.
    3. Then scan the QRCode shown in your browser.
    4. You should see the Device Name. Tap Save.
  6. If OTP Passcode, launch the Google Authenticator application on your phone. Click the plus icon in Google Authenticator, and scan the QRCode that is shown on the screen.
    1. Citrix SSO app also supports passcode.
    2. Christian in the comments indicated that Microsoft Authenticator also works. Click on plus sign -> other (Google,…).
  7. If you configured OTP Push, then you won’t see a Test button. To display the Test button, simply refresh your browser page.
  8. Click Test.
  9. Enter the passcode shown in your Authenticator, and click Go.

    1. Citrix SSO app shows the passcode on the main Password Tokens view.
  10. When done, on the top right, click your name and Log Off.
  11. The OTP registration info is stored in the Active Directory attribute. If users need to re-register, then help desk might need permission to clear this Active Directory attribute.

Perform OTP Authentication

  1. If you access your Gateway URL normally, you’ll be prompted for either one password or two passwords. If one password, then enter your normal LDAP credentials and Citrix Gateway will send a push notification to your phone. If two passwords, then enter the OTP passcode in the second field.
  2. The push notification is shown on the phone’s lock screen. Tap it to open the Citrix SSO app.
  3. Tap Allow to allow the authentication request.
  4. Tap OK when prompted with Logon Success.
  5. After Gateway authentication, Gateway should Single Sign-on into StoreFront with no additional password prompts.

CLI Commands

Here’s a complete OTP nFactor Flow (Visualizer) CLI configuration (except encrypted passwords):

# AAA Global Settings
# -------------------
enable ns feature AAA
set aaa otpparameter -maxOTPDevices 1


# Push Service
# ------------

add authentication pushService cloudPush -namespace "https://mfa.cloud.com/" -clientID b6effb5e-b2d3125 -clientSecret 152c84647b -encrypted -encryptmethod ENCMTHD_3 -CustomerID MyCompan -trustService "https://trust.citrixworkspacesapi.net/"

# LDAP Actions
# ------------
add authentication ldapAction LDAP-Corp -serverIP 10.2.2.11 -serverPort 636 -ldapBase "dc=corp,dc=local" -ldapBindDn ctxsvc@corp.local -ldapBindDnPassword a368c -encrypted -encryptmethod ENCMTHD_3 -ldapLoginName sAMAccountName -groupAttrName memberOf -subAttributeName cn -secType SSL -passwdChange ENABLED -nestedGroupExtraction ON -groupNameIdentifier sAMAccountName -groupSearchAttribute memberOf -groupSearchSubAttribute CN

add authentication ldapAction OTPRegisterDevice -serverIP 10.2.2.11 -serverPort 636 -ldapBase "dc=corp,dc=local" -ldapBindDn admin@corp.local -ldapBindDnPassword 1f952a81 -encrypted -encryptmethod ENCMTHD_3 -ldapLoginName sAMAccountName -groupAttrName memberOf -subAttributeName cn -secType SSL -authentication DISABLED -pushService cloudPush -OTPSecret userParameters

add authentication ldapAction LDAPOTPAuthentication -serverIP 10.2.2.11 -serverPort 636 -ldapBase "dc=corp,dc=local" -ldapBindDn admin@corp.local -ldapBindDnPassword 4319b4d7 -encrypted -encryptmethod ENCMTHD_3 -ldapLoginName sAMAccountName -searchFilter "userParameters>=#@" -groupAttrName memberOf -subAttributeName cn -secType SSL -authentication DISABLED -pushService cloudPush -OTPSecret userParameters


# Advanced Authentication Policies
# --------------------------------
add authentication Policy _OTP-AAA_OTPManageOrAuthenticate__root_0 -rule true -action NO_AUTHN

add authentication Policy SelectManageDevices -rule "http.req.cookie.value(\"NSC_TASS\").contains(\"manageotp\") && client.IP.SRC.IN_SUBNET(10.2.0.0/16)" -action NO_AUTHN

add authentication Policy SelectOTPAuthentication -rule true -action NO_AUTHN

add authentication Policy LDAPAdv -rule true -action LDAP-Corp

add authentication Policy OTPRegisterDevice -rule true -action OTPRegisterDevice

add authentication Policy LDAPOTPAuthentication -rule true -action LDAPOTPAuthentication


# Login Schemas
# -------------
add authentication loginSchema SinglePasswordForManageOTP -authenticationSchema "/nsconfig/loginschema/LoginSchema/SingleAuthManageOTP.xml"

add authentication loginSchema OTPPushOrPasscode -authenticationSchema "/nsconfig/loginschema/LoginSchema/DualAuthPushOrOTP.xml" -passwordCredentialIndex 1


# Authentication Policy Labels
# ----------------------------
add authentication policylabel OTPManageOrAuthenticate__root -loginSchema LSCHEMA_INT
bind authentication policylabel OTPManageOrAuthenticate__root -policyName SelectManageDevices -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT -nextFactor AuthenticateToManageDevices__OTPManageOrAuthenticate
bind authentication policylabel OTPManageOrAuthenticate__root -policyName SelectOTPAuthentication -priority 110 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT -nextFactor OTPAuthentication__OTPManageOrAuthenticate

add authentication policylabel AuthenticateToManageDevices__OTPManageOrAuthenticate -loginSchema SinglePasswordForManageOTP
bind authentication policylabel AuthenticateToManageDevices__OTPManageOrAuthenticate -policyName LDAPAdv -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT -nextFactor OTPDeviceRegistration__OTPManageOrAuthenticate

add authentication policylabel OTPAuthentication__OTPManageOrAuthenticate -loginSchema OTPPushOrPasscode
bind authentication policylabel OTPAuthentication__OTPManageOrAuthenticate -policyName LDAPAdv -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT -nextFactor OTPPushOrPasscode__OTPManageOrAuthenticate

add authentication policylabel OTPDeviceRegistration__OTPManageOrAuthenticate -loginSchema LSCHEMA_INT
bind authentication policylabel OTPDeviceRegistration__OTPManageOrAuthenticate -policyName OTPRegisterDevice -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT

add authentication policylabel OTPPushOrPasscode__OTPManageOrAuthenticate -loginSchema LSCHEMA_INT
bind authentication policylabel OTPPushOrPasscode__OTPManageOrAuthenticate -policyName LDAPOTPAuthentication -priority 100 -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT


# Authentication Virtual Servers
# ------------------------------
add authentication vserver OTP-AAA SSL 0.0.0.0
bind authentication vserver OTP-AAA -policy _OTP-AAA_OTPManageOrAuthenticate__root_0 -priority 100 -nextFactor OTPManageOrAuthenticate__root -gotoPriorityExpression NEXT


# Authentication Profiles
# -----------------------
add authentication authnProfile OTP-AAA -authnVsName OTP-AAA


# NetScaler Gateway Session Profiles
# ----------------------------------
add vpn sessionAction AC_OS_10.2.4.120 -transparentInterception OFF -defaultAuthorizationAction ALLOW -SSO ON -icaProxy ON -wihome "https://xdc01.corp.local/Citrix/StoreWeb" -ClientChoices OFF -ntDomain corp.local -clientlessVpnMode OFF -storefronturl "https://xdc01.corp.local"

add vpn sessionAction AC_WB_10.2.4.120 -transparentInterception OFF -defaultAuthorizationAction ALLOW -SSO ON -icaProxy ON -wihome "https://xdc01.corp.local/Citrix/StoreWeb" -ClientChoices OFF -ntDomain corp.local -clientlessVpnMode OFF


# NetScaler Gateway Session Policies
# ----------------------------------
add vpn sessionPolicy PL_OS_10.2.4.120 "REQ.HTTP.HEADER User-Agent CONTAINS CitrixReceiver" AC_OS_10.2.4.120

add vpn sessionPolicy PL_WB_10.2.4.120 "REQ.HTTP.HEADER User-Agent NOTCONTAINS CitrixReceiver && REQ.HTTP.HEADER Referer EXISTS" AC_WB_10.2.4.120


# NetScaler Gateway Global Settings
# ---------------------------------
enable ns feature SSLVPN


# NetScaler Gateway Virtual Servers
# ---------------------------------
add vpn vserver gateway2 SSL 10.2.4.220 443 -Listenpolicy NONE -tcpProfileName nstcp_default_XA_XD_profile -deploymentType ICA_STOREFRONT -authnProfile OTP-AAA -vserverFqdn gateway3.corp.com
bind vpn vserver gateway2 -portaltheme RfWebUI
bind vpn vserver gateway2 -policy LDAP-Corp -priority 100
bind vpn vserver gateway2 -policy PL_OS_10.2.4.120 -priority 100
bind vpn vserver gateway2 -policy PL_WB_10.2.4.120 -priority 100


# SSL Virtual Servers
# -------------------
bind ssl vserver gateway2 -certkeyName WildcardCorpCom.cer_CERT_KEY
bind ssl vserver gateway2 -eccCurveName P_256
bind ssl vserver gateway2 -eccCurveName P_384
bind ssl vserver gateway2 -eccCurveName P_224
bind ssl vserver gateway2 -eccCurveName P_521

bind ssl vserver OTP-AAA -certkeyName WildcardCorpCom.cer_CERT_KEY
bind ssl vserver OTP-AAA -eccCurveName P_256
bind ssl vserver OTP-AAA -eccCurveName P_384
bind ssl vserver OTP-AAA -eccCurveName P_224
bind ssl vserver OTP-AAA -eccCurveName P_521

 

RADIUS Authentication – Citrix Gateway

Last Modified: Mar 29, 2021 @ 11:28 am

215 Comments

This article applies to Citrix Gateway 13.0, Citrix Gateway 12.1, and NetScaler Gateway 12.0. Citrix ADC is the new name for NetScaler. Citrix Gateway is the new name for NetScaler Gateway.

Navigation

Change Log

RADIUS Overview

One method of two-factor authentication to Citrix Gateway is the RADIUS protocol with a two-factor authentication product (tokens) that has RADIUS enabled.

  • Another common two-factor authentication method is SAML to an Identity Provider, like Azure Active Directory or Okta. SAML is detailed in the Federated Authentication Service article.

RADIUS Clients and Source IP – On your RADIUS servers, you’ll need to add the ADC appliances as RADIUS Clients. When ADC uses a local (same appliance) load balanced Virtual Server for RADIUS authentication, the traffic is sourced from the ADC SNIP (Subnet IP). When ADC uses a direct connection to a RADIUS Server without going through a load balancing Virtual Server, or uses a remote (different appliance) Load Balancing Virtual Server, the traffic is sourced from the ADC NSIP (ADC Management IP). Use the correct IP(s) when adding the ADC appliances as RADIUS Clients. And adjust firewall rules accordingly.

  • For High Availability pairs, if you locally load balance RADIUS, then you only need to add the SNIP as a RADIUS Client, since the SNIP floats between the two appliances. However, if you are not locally load balancing RADIUS, then you’ll need to add the NSIP of both appliances as RADIUS Clients. Use the same RADIUS Secret for both appliances.

Links:

Some two-factor products (e.g. SMS Passcode) require you to hide the 2nd password field. Receiver 4.4 and newer supports hiding the 2nd field if you configure a Meta tag in index.html.

Two-factor Policies Summary

ADC has two methods of configuring multi-factor authentication:

  • Citrix Gateway Virtual Server has bind points for Primary and Secondary authentication. This functionality is available in all ADC Editions and is detailed in this post.
    • This is the older method of configuring authentication also known as Classic authentication policies. One challenge with Classic policies is that Citrix Workspace app requires the LDAP and RADIUS fields to be swapped.
  • nFactor Authentication supports unlimited factors, but requires ADC Advanced Edition (formerly known as Enterprise Edition) or ADC Platinum Edition.
    • nFactor is the newer authentication configuration method also known as Advanced authentication policies. With nFactor, there’s no need to swap the LDAP and RADIUS fields for Citrix Workspace app.

Workspace app authentication with a Classic Policy configuration looks like a Window that is very difficult to customize.

Workspace app authentication with an nFactor configuration looks like a webpage that is fully customizable.

See the ADC menu page for additional authentication mechanisms supported by Citrix Gateway. Some require nFactor.

When configuring the Citrix Gateway Virtual Server, you can specify both a Primary authentication policy, and a Secondary authentication policy. Users are required to successfully authenticate against both policies before being authorized for Citrix Gateway.

For browser-based StoreFront, you need two authentication policies:

  • Primary = LDAPS authentication policy pointing to Active Directory Domain Controllers.
  • Secondary = RADIUS authentication policy pointing to RSA servers with RADIUS enabled.

For Citrix Workspace app, the classic authentication policies need to be swapped. There’s no need to swap them if doing nFactor (Advanced) policies.

  • Primary = RADIUS authentication policy pointing to RSA servers with RADIUS enabled.
  • Secondary = LDAPS authentication policy pointing to Active Directory Domain Controllers.

With Classic Authentication Policies, if you need to support two-factor authentication from both web browsers and Citrix Workspace app, then you’ll need at least four authentication policies as shown below.

Primary:

  • Priority 90 = RADIUS policy. Expression = REQ.HTTP..HEADER User-Agent CONTAINS CitrixReceiver
  • Priority 100 = LDAP policy. Expression = REQ.HTTP..HEADER User-Agent NOTCONTAINS CitrixReceiver

Secondary:

  • Priority 90 = LDAP policy. Expression = REQ.HTTP..HEADER User-Agent CONTAINS CitrixReceiver
  • Priority 100 = RADIUS policy. Expression = REQ.HTTP..HEADER User-Agent NOTCONTAINS CitrixReceiver

LDAP Server/Action

See the LDAP post for instructions to create an LDAP Server/Action. Only the LDAP server/action is needed. The Policies will be created later.

RADIUS Server/Action

Create a RADIUS Server/Action:

  1. On the left, expand Authentication, and click Dashboard.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. Change Choose Server Type to RADIUS.
  4. Give the server a name.
  5. Specify the IP address of the RADIUS load balancing Virtual Server.
  6. Enter the secret key specified when you added the ADCs as RADIUS clients on the RADIUS server. Click Test RADIUS Reachability.
  7. Scroll down, and click More.
  8. Find the Password Encoding drop-down. Change it to mschapv2 if your RADIUS server supports it, c. Microsoft NPS requires mschapv2 to support changing expired Active Directory passwords. 💡
  9. If you want ADC to receive AAA Group information from RADIUS, see CTX222260 Radius Group Extraction from Windows Server 2008/2012 with NetScaler/CloudBridge.
    • RADIUS attribute = 26 (Vendor-Specific)
    • Vendor Code = 3845 (Citrix)
    • Vendor-assigned attribute number = any number (e.g. 1). Configure RADIUS policy on ADC with same attribute number.
    • Attribute value = Group Name
  10. Click Create.

    add authentication radiusAction RSA -serverIP 10.2.2.210 -serverPort 1812 -authTimeout 60 -radKey Passw0rd -passEncoding mschapv2

Advanced Authentication (nFactor) Policies for LDAP and RADIUS

For the older Classic Authentication policies, jump ahead to the Classic Policies section.

Create Advanced Authentication Policies:

  1. In the left menu, go to Security > AAA – Application Traffic > Policies > Authentication > Advanced Policies > Policy.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. In the Create Authentication Policy window:
    1. Change the Action Type to RADIUS.
    2. Select your RADIUS Action.
    3. Give the policy a name.
    4. Expression = true.
  4. Click Create.
  5. Create another Authentication Policy.
    1. Set Action Type to LDAP.
    2. Select your LDAP Action/Server.
    3. Give the policy a name.
    4. Expression = true.
  6. Click Create.

Create a Policy Label for the second factor, which is typically the RADIUS policy. The first factor (LDAP) does not need a Policy Label.

  1. In the left menu, click Policy Label.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. Give the Policy Label a name.
  4. Leave Login Schema set to LSCHEMA_INT. The Login Schema in the first factor will collect both password and passcode in one form so there’s no need for the second factor to collect it again.
  5. Click Continue.
  6. In the Select Policy field, select your RADIUS policy.
  7. Click Bind at the bottom of the page.
  8. Click Done to finish creating the Policy Label.

Create a Login Schema to collect the password and passcode on the same form.

  1. In the left menu, click Login Schema.
  2. On the right, switch to the tab named Profiles and then click Add.
  3. Give the Login Schema a name (e.g. DualAuth).
  4. Click the pencil icon and then open the LoginSchema folder.
  5. Click the DualAuth.xml file on the left. On the right, make sure you click the blue Select button. It’s too easy to miss this step.
    • See my nFactor article for some info on how to customize the Login Schema.
  6. Then click Create.
  7. On the right, switch to the tab named Policies.
  8. Give the Login Schema Policy a name.
  9. Select the Login Schema Profile you just created.
  10. Set the Rule field to true.
  11. Click Create.

Create an Authentication (AAA) Virtual Server to link the factors together.

  1. In the left menu, under AAA – Application Traffic, click Virtual Servers.
  2. On the right, click Add.
  3. Change the IP Address Type to Non Addressable.
  4. Give the AAA vServer a name and then click OK.
  5. In the Certificate section, you can optionally bind a certificate. It doesn’t matter what certificate you choose (typically the Gateway cert). The only thing this certificate binding does is make the AAA vServer show as UP instead of DOWN. Otherwise it has no effect on functionality. Click Continue.
  6. In the Advanced Authentication Policies section, click where it says No Authentication Policy.
  7. In the Select Policy field at the top of the window, select the LDAP policy.
  8. Near the bottom, in the Select Next Factor field, click where it says Click to select.
  9. Select your RADIUS Policy Label and then click Bind. After LDAP is done, nFactor will then move to your RADIUS Policy Label.
  10. Click Continue.
  11. On the right, in the Advanced Settings column, click Login Schemas.
  12. On the bottom left, click where it says No Login Schema.
  13. Select the DualAuth Login Schema you created earlier and then click Bind.
  14. Click Done at the bottom of the page.

Link the AAA vServer to your Gateway vServer:

  1. In the left menu, expand Citrix Gateway and then click Virtual Servers.
  2. On the right, edit your Gateway vServer.
  3. On the right, in the Advanced Settings column, click Authentication Profile.
  4. On the bottom left, in the Authentication Profile section, click the Add button.
  5. Select the AAA vServer you created earlier.
  6. Give the Profile a name and then click Create.
  7. Back in the Gateway vServer, make sure you click OK in the Authentication Profile section. If you forget to click OK then the Authentication Profile won’t be bound.

If you point your Workspace app to the Gateway that has nFactor configured, the authentication window will look like a web page.

Classic Authentication Policies for LDAP and RADIUS

For Advanced Authentication (nFactor) policies, jump back to the Advanced Policies section.

  1. Go to Citrix Gateway > Policies > Authentication > RADIUS.
  2. On the right, in the Policies tab, click Add.
  3. In the Create Authentication RADIUS Policy page:
    1. Name the policy RSA-ReceiverSelfService or similar.
    2. Select the RADIUS server created earlier.
    3. Enter an expression. You will need two policies with different expressions. The expression for Receiver Self-Service is REQ.HTTP.HEADER User-Agent CONTAINS CitrixReceiver.
      Note: Citrix Gateway 12.1 does not natively support binding of Advanced Authentication Policies so you’ll have to create them as Basic Policies (classic expressions). You can only bind Advanced Authentication Policies using nFactor.
  4. Click Create.
  5. If you see a warning about deprecation, click OK, and ignore it.
  6. Create another RADIUS policy to match the ones shown below. Both RADIUS policies are configured with the same RADIUS server. The only difference between them is the expression (CONTAINS vs NOTCONTAINS):
    Name Expression Server
    RSA-ReceiverSelfService REQ.HTTP.HEADER User-Agent CONTAINS CitrixReceiver RSA
    RSA-ReceiverForWeb REQ.HTTP.HEADER User-Agent NOTCONTAINS CitrixReceiver RSA

  7. Go to the Citrix Gateway\Policies\Authentication\LDAP node.
  8. On the Policies tab, create two policies with the expressions shown below. Both LDAP policies are configured with the same LDAP server. The only difference between them is the expression (CONTAINS vs NOTCONTAINS).
    Name Expression Server
    LDAP-Corp-ReceiverSelfService REQ.HTTP.HEADER User-Agent CONTAINS CitrixReceiver LDAP-Corp
    LDAP-Corp-ReceiverForWeb REQ.HTTP.HEADER User-Agent NOTCONTAINS CitrixReceiver LDAP-Corp 

add authentication radiusPolicy RSA-ReceiverForWeb "REQ.HTTP.HEADER User-Agent NOTCONTAINS CitrixReceiver" RSA

add authentication radiusPolicy RSA-ReceiverSelfService "REQ.HTTP.HEADER User-Agent CONTAINS CitrixReceiver" RSA

add authentication ldapPolicy Corp-Gateway-ReceiverForWeb "REQ.HTTP.HEADER User-Agent NOTCONTAINS CitrixReceiver" Corp-Gateway

add authentication ldapPolicy Corp-Gateway-ReceiverSelfService "REQ.HTTP.HEADER User-Agent CONTAINS CitrixReceiver" Corp-Gateway

Bind Two-factor Policies to Gateway

  1. When you create or edit a Citrix Gateway Virtual Server, bind the Basic Authentication Policies as shown in the following table. Priority doesn’t matter because they are mutually exclusive.
    Policy Name Type Bind Point
    LDAP-Corp-ReceiverForWeb LDAP Primary
    RSA-ReceiverSelfService RADIUS Primary
    LDAP-Corp-ReceiverSelfService LDAP Secondary
    RSA-ReceiverForWeb RADIUS Secondary 

    bind vpn vserver gateway.corp.com -policy Corp-Gateway-ReceiverForWeb -priority 100

bind vpn vserver gateway.corp.com -policy RSA-ReceiverSelfService -priority 110

bind vpn vserver gateway.corp.com -policy RSA-ReceiverForWeb -priority 100 -secondary

bind vpn vserver gateway.corp.com -policy Corp-Gateway-ReceiverSelfService -priority 110 -secondary
  2. The Session Policy/Profile for Receiver Self-Service needs to be adjusted to indicate which authentication field contains the Active Directory password. On the Client Experience tab is Credential Index. This needs to be changed to SECONDARY. Leave the session policy for Web Browsers set to Primary.

    set vpn sessionAction "Receiver Self-Service" -ssoCredential SECONDARY
  3. On the StoreFront server, when creating the Citrix Gateway object, on the Authentication Settings page, change the Logon type to Domain and security token. This instructs Receiver / Workspace app to properly handle two-factor authentication. If you change this setting after Receiver / Workspace app has already performed discovery, then users might have to remove the Account from Receiver / Workspace app and re-add it.

Citrix Workspace app 2405.10

Last Modified: Aug 16, 2024 @ 8:05 am

689 Comments

Navigation

Workspace app is the new name for Receiver. This post applies to all Workspace app versions, including the Current Release version 2405.10 and the LTSR version 2402 CU1.

💡 = Recently Updated

Change Log

Workspace app Versions

Citrix Workspace app uses a YYMM (year/month) versioning format, of which version 2405.10 (24.5.10) is the newest Current Release. See Citrix Docs for the list of new features, some of which only apply to Citrix Cloud.

Workspace app 2311 and newer have a new installer interface. 

Workspace app 2303 and newer automatically install the App protection components with an option to start them after installation. Older Workspace apps have an option to install App protection and if you don’t select this and later want App protection then you must uninstall Workspace app and reinstall it.


  • See App Protection at Citrix Docs to enable App protection for the authentication screen. Workspace app 2305.1 and newer automatically start it for authentication if you have selected the Start App Protection check box during installation.

The newest Current Release version of Workspace app is version 2405.10.

The newest LTSR (Long Term Service Release) version of Workspace app is version 2402 Cumulative Update 1.

Workspace app Modules

The Workspace app installer deploys multiple modules. Here are the important ones:

  • ICA Engine (wfica.exe) – process that uses the ICA protocol to connect to published apps and desktops.
  • Self-Service (selfservice.exe) – gets icons from StoreFront and displays them in a Window. When an icon is clicked, Self-service passes the ICA file to the ICA Engine to establish a connection.
  • Single Sign-on (SSON) for ICA (ssonsvr.exe) – captures user credentials and submits them to VDAs after an ICA connection is established
  • Workspace Auto-Update (CitrixReceiverUpdater.exe) – Notifies users of Workspace app updates. The most recent name for this component is Citrix Workspace Update.

Custom ICA files are no longer supported. However, Ryan Butler has created a script that asks StoreFront for an ICA file. Explicit credentials are supported. Find the script at Github.

Workspace app Discovery and Beacon Process

If you are using Workspace app’s built-in user interface (instead of a web browser), then Workspace app first prompts you to perform discovery, which is also called Add Account.

Workspace app will contact the FQDN and request download of the StoreFront Provisioning File.

  • If you entered a StoreFront FQDN, then Workspace app will download the Provisioning File directly from the StoreFront server.
  • If you entered a Gateway FQDN, then Gateway will first prompt the user to authenticate. After authentication, Gateway will connect to its configured Account Services address, and download the Provisioning File from StoreFront. The Account Services address is configured in the NetScaler Gateway Session Profile on the Published Applications tab.

If your StoreFront server is configured with multiple stores, then the user will be prompted to select a store. Unfortunately, there’s no configuration option in NetScaler Gateway to force a particular store.

The Provisioning File downloaded from StoreFront is an XML document containing values for several items configured in the StoreFront console. You can export the Provisioning File from the StoreFront console by right-clicking a Store.

The ReceiverConfig.cr Provisioning File looks something like this:

Here are the values in the Provisioning File:

  • Address – the Base URL configured in StoreFront Console
  • Internal Beacon – as configured in StoreFront Console. This can be the Base URL, or a manually specified URL.
  • External Beacons – as configured in StoreFront Console
  • Gateways – as configured in StoreFront Console. If there are multiple Gateways, when enabling Remote Access on the Store, then only one Gateway is selected as Default
  • SRID – Store ID. An important value to consider for multi-datacenter configurations. The SRID is set when the Store is created. It can also be changed by editing C:\inetpub\wwwroot\Citrix\Roaming\web.config.

Workspace app reads the Provisioning File, and configures itself by inserting the file’s contents into the user’s registry. The values are located under HKCU\Software\Citrix\Dazzle\Sites and HKCU\Software\Citrix\Receiver\SR. If you performed discovery through NetScaler Gateway, notice that the internal Base URL is added to the user’s registry.

Once Workspace app is configured, it then performs the following steps:

  1. Attempt to connect to the Internal Beacon.
  2. If the Internal Beacon is reachable, connect directly to the StoreFront Base URL (Address).
  3. If the Internal Beacon is not reachable:
    1. Attempt to connect to the External Beacons. If the External Beacons are not reachable, then stop attempting to connect.
    2. Connect to the Gateway address configured in the Provisioning File. If there is more than one Gateway, connect to the Gateway that is marked as the Default.

Here are some interesting notes on this connection process:

  • The FQDN you entered during Discovery has absolutely nothing to do with how Workspace app connects to StoreFront or Gateway. The actual connection process is controlled by the contents of the Provisioning File, not the Discovery address.
  • If the Provisioning File has multiple Gateways defined, Workspace app uses whichever Gateway is marked as Default. Workspace app completely ignores whatever Gateway FQDN you entered during Discovery. To use a non-default Gateway, the user must manually select the other Gateway in Workspace app’s Advanced Preferences.

In StoreFront Console, if any configuration changes are performed that affect the Provisioning File, it takes an hour for Workspace apps to reconfigure themselves automatically. Or users can remove Accounts and re-add (or Reset Citrix Workspace) so that the updated Provisioning File is imported.

Here are some additional methods of performing Workspace app Discovery:

  • After exporting the Provisioning File from StoreFront Console, distribute it to users, and ask them to double-click it.


  • After logging in to Receiver for Web (StoreFront), at the top right, click the username, and click Activate. This downloads the receiverconfig.cr file, which is identical to the one you can export from StoreFront Console. The user then must run the downloaded file.

Virtual Monitors

In Workspace app 1812 and newer, when connected to a published desktop on a single monitor, you can split the screen into virtual monitors. This feature is intended for large 4K monitors.

  • In the desktop toolbar at the top of the screen, click Preferences.
  • Switch to the Monitor Layout tab.
  • On the bottom, select Horizontal or Vertical, then click somewhere in the blue box to draw a line. The single monitor will be split along this line. You can set different DPI for each portion of the virtual display.
  • Right-clicking one of the split sections changes that section to the primary display.
  • Click OK when done.
  • In the toolbar, click Window to resize it to a window, and then click Full Screen to cause your virtual monitor configuration to take effect.

Uninstall Old Clients

Workspace app installer can do a force uninstall of old clients before installing the new version:

  • In Workspace app 2309 and newer, run CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe /CleanInstall /Silent
  • In Workspace app 1909 and newer, run CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe /ForceInstall /Silent.
  • In Workspace app 1908 and older (including Receiver), run CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe /RCU /Silent or CitrixReceiver.exe /RCU /Silent.

Citrix CTX325140: How to Remove Client Files Remaining on System after Uninstalling Receiver for Windows.

Installation and Configuration

Administrator privileges – Administrator privileges are required to install any missing prerequisites.

Internet required – Recent versions of Workspace app download and install Microsoft Edge WebView2 Runtime, .NET Desktop Runtime 6.0.20, .NET Framework 4.8, and Visual C++. Internet access is required for the Workspace app installer to download these install files. Or there’s an Offline Installer for Workspace app 2309 and newer.

.NET Desktop Runtime 6.0.20 – Workspace app 2309 and newer will install x86 .NET Desktop Runtime 6.0.20 if it’s not already installed.

This section contains a summary of all common command line switches, registry keys, and policy settings for Workspace app.

Links:

Workspace app 2203 LTSR CU2 and Workspace app 2212 and newer fix security vulnerabilities.

CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe current release version 2405.10 or LTSR version 2402 CU1 can be installed by simply double-clicking it.

  • LTSR Workspace app does not support Browser Content Redirection.
  • Workspace app 2006 and newer do not support Windows 7.
  • Workspace app 2206 and newer enable DPI Matching by default. DPI Matching can be disabled through client-side group policy, or in the Advanced Preferences in Workspace app 2212 and newer. DPI Matching prevents connections to CVAD 7.15. Multi-session VDAs with version 1912, by default, have DPI Matching disabled, but can be enabled in the VDA’s registry. See CTX460068 for details.
  • Workspace app 2311 and newer have a new interface for installation.

  • Workspace app 2402 and newer ask if you want to install the Microsoft Teams VDI Plugin or not. This is for Teams 2.1 and newer.

Administrator vs non-administrator

  • Non-administrator – If a non-administrator installs Workspace app, then each non-administrator that logs in to the same workstation will have to reinstall Workspace app.
    • Non-administrator installations are installed to %USERPROFILE%\AppData\Local\Citrix\ICA Client for each user.
  • Administrator – If CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe is installed using an administrator account. then the Workspace app only needs to be installed once.
    • Administrator installations are installed to C:\Program Files (x86)\Citrix\ICA Client.
    • Administrator installations of Workspace app 1912 and newer can be manually upgraded by non-administrators by clicking Check for Updates. Older versions cannot be upgraded by non-administrators.
  • Conflicts – If an administrator install of Workspace app is performed on a machine that has non-administrator installs of Workspace app, then the two installations will conflict. Best option is to uninstall non-admin Workspace app and Receiver before installing admin Workspace app. Otherwise, the user’s profile probably has to be reset before Workspace app is functional again.

Global App Configuration Service

Global App Configuration Service (GACS) is a Citrix Cloud service that can push configurations to Workspace app clients. This Citrix Cloud service is now available to all on-premises customers even if you don’t own any Citrix Cloud entitlements.

  1. Login to https://citrix.cloud.com. If you don’t have a Citrix Cloud account, then login using your Citrix.com account credentials and it will create a Citrix Cloud account.
  2. Use the top left hamburger menu to go to Workspace Configuration.
  3. Switch to the tab named App Configuration.
  4. Click Switch URL.
  5. Near the bottom, click Claim URL.
  6. Click Add URL to add your on-premises StoreFront/Gateway URL. See Citrix Docs for details. GACS uses this URL to determine which Workspace app clients should receive the settings that you configure.
  7. Back in the App Configuration page, you can now configure Workspace app settings as desired. Workspace apps that have stores under the claimed URL will then receive these settings.

Auto-Update

Workspace app supports auto-update.

Some notes:

  • If Workspace app 1912 or newer is installed as administrator, then non-administrators can click Check for Updates to manually update Workspace app. To prevent this, use group policy to disable Citrix Workspace Updates.

    • Older versions of Workspace app cannot be upgraded by non-administrators.
  • If Workspace app is installed on a VDA, auto-update is automatically disabled. This includes Remote PC.
  • Auto-update can be limited to LTSR updates only.
  • Auto-update is configurable through several mechanisms: group policy, StoreFront, Workspace app GUI, installer command line. See Configuring Citrix Workspace Updates at Citrix Docs.
  • Workspace app 2107 and later let users select an Update channel.

  • See George Spiers Citrix Receiver for Windows Auto-Update.

Auto-update is configured using Workspace app group policy under the Citrix Workspace Updates, or Auto-Update node.


Or use Global App Configuration Service.

Workspace app Splash Screen

Workspace app shows a Splash Screen on first launch with the text “Citrix Workspace app extends the capabilities of Citrix Receiver”.

To prevent this splash screen, set the following registry value: (source = Dennis Span on Twitter)

  • Key = HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\Citrix\Splashscreen
    • Value (REG_SZ) = SplashscreenShown = 1

Add Account Wizard

After installation, Workspace app will launch and ask you to add an account. If Workspace app, notice the checkbox Do not show this window automatically at logon.

FTU (First Time Use aka Add Account Wizard) will be displayed only if a store is not configured. If a store is already configured via command line, GPO, or Citrix Studio, then FTU screen will not be available after installation. Otherwise, FTU can be suppressed by doing one of the following:

  • Rename CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe to CitrixWorkspaceAppWeb.exe.
  • Install using a command line switch:
    • CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe /ALLOWADDSTORE=N
  • Set the registry value: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Citrix\EnableFTU=dword:00000000 (or EnableX1FTU =dword:0)
  • Disable the EnableFTU policy setting in Receiver.admx.
  • Change Registry values post installation to suppress the Add Account window. Under HKLM\Software\Wow6432Node\Citrix\Dazzle, set AllowAddStore value to N.
  • Set the registry value: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Citrix\Receiver\NeverShowConfigurationWizard (REG_SZ) = true
  • Also see Suppressing Add Account dialog at Citrix Docs.

Discover Hidden Stores

When Workspace app is first launched, it must perform Discovery, which is the process of downloading the .xml provisioning file from StoreFront. Discovery is performed by entering a StoreFront FQDN or Gateway FQDN. To discover a hidden store (a store that’s not advertised), add ?StoreName to the end of the FQDN. CTX214819 How to configure Receiver to a Store that is not advertised.

CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe Command line switches

CTX227370 Citrix Workspace app Commandline Tool contains a GUI tool to build your installer command line.
image.png

For unattended installation of Workspace app, see CTA Dennis Span Citrix Workspace App unattended installation with PowerShell or Citrix Receiver unattended installation with PowerShell.

Installer Command Line Switches are detailed at Configure and install Receiver for Windows using command-line parameters at Citrix Docs. Common Command line switches include the following:

  • /silent
  • /includeSSON – enables pass-through authentication. GPO configuration is also required as detailed below. 
    CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe /includeSSON
  • /ALLOWADDSTORE=A – by default, only SSL (HTTPS) stores are accepted. To allow non-SSL stores: 
    CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe /ALLOWADDSTORE=A
  • /STORE0 – To add a store from the installation command line: 
    CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe STORE0="AppStore;https://Citrix.corp.com/Citrix/MyStore/discovery;on;App Store"
    • Workspace App can discover the Store through NetScaler Gateway. 
      CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe STORE0="AppStore;https://gateway.corp.com#MyStore;On;App Store"
  • /SELFSERVICEMODE=False – disables the Self-Service interface and enables shortcut-only mode: 
    CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe /SELFSERVICEMODE=False
  • /AutoUpdateCheck=auto /AutoUpdateStream=LTSR – enables Citrix Workspace Update notifications and sets it to LTSR Branch only. AutoUpdateCheck can also be set to manual or disabled. AutoUpdateStream can also be set to Current. See Configuring Citrix Workspace Updates at Citrix Docs. 
    CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe /AutoUpdateCheck=auto /AutoUpdateStream=LTSR
  • /ENABLEPRELAUNCH=True – enables prelaunch: 
    CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe /ENABLEPRELAUNCH=True
  • /ALLOW_CLIENTHOSTEDAPPSURL=1 – enables Local App Access: 
    CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe /ALLOW_CLIENTHOSTEDAPPSURL=1

Registry values

HKLM\Software\Wow6432Node\Citrix\Dazzle on the Workspace app machine. All are of type REG_SZ (string) unless specified. Note: several of these are configurable using the Reciever.admx group policy template.

  • SelfServiceMode (REG_SZ) = False – Turns off Workspace app’s Self-Service interface.
  • PutShortcutsOnDesktop (REG_SZ) = True – If Self-Service interface is disabled, places all shortcuts on desktop.
  • UseDifferentPathsforStartmenuAndDesktop (REG_SZ) = True
    • UseCategoryAsStartMenuPath (REG_SZ) = True or False
    • UseCategoryAsDesktopPath (REG_SZ) = True or False
  • StartMenuDir (REG_SZ) = name of folder on Start Menu where shortcuts are placed.
  • DesktopDir (REG_SZ) = name of folder on Desktop where shortcuts are placed
  • EnablePreLaunch (REG_SZ) = True – If SSON is enabled then PreLaunch is already enabled by default.
  • AllowAddStore (REG_SZ) = A – Only if using http (instead of https) to connect to StoreFront.
  • AllowSavePwd (REG_SZ) = A – Only if using http (instead of https) to connect to StoreFront.
  • UserDomainName (REG_SZ) = pre-filled domain name
  • InitialRefreshMinMs (REG_SZ) = 1 – minimizes the launch delay before contacting store
  • InitialRefreshMaxMs (REG_SZ) = 1 – minimizes the launch delay before contacting store
  • RefreshMs (REG_SZ) = 3600000 (1 hour) – interval for Receiver icon refreshes. 1 hour is the default value.
  • MaxSimultaneousFetches (REG_DWORD) = 6  – improves the time of loading icons in Start Menu
  • MaxSimultaneousSubscribes (REG_DWORD) = 6 – improves the time of loading icons in Start Menu
  • DontWarnOfRemovedResources (REG_SZ) = True – prevents dialog boxes when resources are removed from the server. (or False)
  • SilentlyUninstallRemovedResources (REG_SZ) = True – prevents dialog boxes when resources are removed from the server
  • PreferTemplateDirectory (REG_SZ) = UNC path or local path containing shortcuts copied by the prefer keyword. Give the shortcuts a short name.
  • PnaSSONEnabled (REG_SZ) = True – Enables Single Sign-on for PNAgent (Web Interface).
  • WSCReconnectMode (REG_SZ) = 3 (default) – If this Workspace app is running inside a VDA published desktop, set it to 0.
  • AlwaysUseStubs (REG_SZ) = True. Workspace app and Receiver 4.3.100 and newer don’t create .exe stubs by default. Set this to create .exe stubs. Also see Citrix CTX211893 Controlling Shortcut behavior in Receiver 4.3.100.
  • DontCreateAddRemoveEntry (REG_SZ) = True – don’t create “Delivered by Citrix” entries in Programs and Features
  • DesktopNameFormatString = format string for shortcut names – For example “{0}_{1}_{2}_{3}”. See the link for details.
  • SelfServiceFlags (REG_DWORD) = 4 – prevents duplicate shortcuts when roaming and Desktop is redirected.
  • ReEvaluateNetwork (REG_SZ) = true – for Beacon detection with Single FQDN

To prevent the Win+G popup on Windows 10 machines:

  • HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\Windows\GameDVR
    • AllowGameDVR (REG_DWORD) = 0

To allow adding non-HTTPS stores to Workspace app:

  • HKLM\Software\Wow6432Node\Citrix\AuthManager
    • ConnectionSecurityMode (REG_SZ) = Any

To increase ICA bandwidth consumption over high latency links, set:

  • HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\ICA Client\Engine\Configuration\Advanced\Modules\TCP/IP

To prevent beacon probing from using proxy, set:

  • HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\WOW6432Node\Citrix\Receiver\inventory
    • BeaconProxyEnabled (REG_DWORD) = 0

To enable foreground progress bar, set:

  • HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\ICA Client
    • ForegroundProgressBar (REG_DWORD) = 1

For client-to-server file type redirection, set:

  • HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\ICA Client\Engine\Configuration\Advanced\Modules\ClientDrive
    • NativeDriveMapping=”TRUE”

To fix USB devices that emulate a keyboard, set:

  • HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\ICA Client\Engine\Lockdown Profiles\All Regions\Lockdown\Virtual Channels\Keyboard
    • KeyboardTimer=”10”

To prevent “USB Hub Power Exceeded” message, set (not needed in 4.2.100 and newer):

  • HKLM\SOFTWARE\Citrix\ICA Client\GenericUSB (same path for 32-bit and 64-bit, create the keys)
    • DisableInternalDeviceCtlDispatchHook (DWORD) = 0x1

To override the devices that are mapped using optimized channels instead of generic USB, see Citrix CTX123015 How to Configure Automatic Redirection of USB Devices

Group Policy Settings

Copy the Workspace app ADMX template (C:\Program Files (x86)\Citrix\ICA Client\Configuration\receiver.admx) to C:\Windows\PolicyDefinitions (or Sysvol). Also copy receiver.adml to C:\Windows\PolicyDefinitions\en-us (or Sysvol).

Edit a GPO that applies to client machines, go to Computer Configuration | Policies | Administrative Templates | Citrix Components | Citrix Workspace and configure the following:

  • To enable pass-through authentication: go to | User Authentication |.
  • To add a store, go to | StoreFront |
    • StoreFront Accounts List – see the help text
  • To enable Auto-Update, go to |AutoUpdate| or |Citrix Workspace Updates|. (the node was renamed in 4.11 and Workspace app)
    • Enable or Disable AutoUpdate or
    • Citrix Workspace Updates
  • To enable Local App Access, go to | User Experience |
    • Local App Access Settings
  • To prevent the endpoint from sleeping while session is active, go to | User Experience |
    • Power Management (2405 and newer)
  • To configure the Self-Service interface, go to | SelfService |
    • Set Manage SelfServiceMode to Disabled to completely disable the Self-Service window. This causes all icons to be placed on the Start Menu.
    • Enable Manage App Shortcut and configure it as desired.
      • To allow the Self-Service window, but prevent it from automatically opening (reside in systray), tick Prevent Citrix Workspace performing a refresh of the application list when opened. Source
    • Enable Control when Workspace attempts to reconnect to existing sessions. If this is a VDA published desktop, set it to Disabled. Otherwise configure it as desired.
    • Set Enable FTU to Disabled  to prevent the Add Account wizard from displaying.
    • Enable Allow/Prevent users to publish unsafe content if publishing content that’s opens a file or file share.

Enable automatic client drive and client microphone mapping.

  • In a client-side GPO, add the GPO ADM template from http://support.citrix.com/article/CTX133565.
  • Enable the setting Create Client Selective Trust Keys. See Below for details.
  • Configure the FileSecurityPermission setting in one or more of the regions.
  • Configure the MicrophoneAndWebcamSecurityPermission setting in one or more of the regions.

Citrix CTX203658 Start Menu Icons Set to Default (Blank Document) After Update to Receiver 4.3.100 – Windows 8 and newer

  • Computer Configuration | Policies | Administrative Templates | Windows Components | File Explorer
    • Allow the use of remote paths in file shortcut icons = enabled

Deploy Workspace app using Active Directory

To deploy Workspace app using Active Directory, configure a GPO with a computer startup script that runs the Workspace app installer executable. Citrix provides sample scripts that can be downloaded from one of the Workspace app download pages (Workspace app current release version 2405.10, or LTSR version 2402 CU1, by expanding Downloads for Admins (Deployment Tools).

Also see CTA Dennis Span Citrix Receiver unattended installation with PowerShell.

Change Workspace App’s Store Configuration, including Reset Citrix Workspace

You can change Workspace app’s configured Store/Account with a couple command lines:

"C:\Program Files (x86)\Citrix\ICA Client\SelfServicePlugin\SelfService.exe" -deleteproviderbyname Corporate 
"C:\Program Files (x86)\Citrix\ICA Client\SelfServicePlugin\SelfService.exe" -init -createprovider Corporate https://storefront.corp.com/Citrix/Store/discovery

 

It is sometimes necessary to Reset Citrix Workspace by right-clicking the Workspace app systray icon, clicking Advanced Preferences, and clicking the Reset link. You can do this from the command line by running "C:\Program Files (x86)\Citrix\ICA Client\SelfServicePlugin\CleanUp.exe" -cleanUser -silent. See CTX140149 How to Reset Receiver Using the Command Line.

Workspace app Group Policy ADMX Template

Many of the Workspace app configuration settings must be configured in group policy. These Workspace app settings are only available after installing the GPO templates.

Alternatively, Citrix Cloud customers can use Global App Configuration Service to configure Workspace app. Today it’s a REST API, but Citrix has started adding a GUI at Workspace Configuration > App Configuration.

For GPO configuration:

  1. From a machine that has Workspace app installed, find the .admx and .adml files in the C:\Program Files (x86)\Citrix\ICA Client\Configuration.
    • You can also download the ADMX files from one of the Workspace app download pages (Workspace app current release version 2405.10, LTSR version 2402 CU1, by expanding Downloads for Admins (Deployment Tools).
  2. Copy the CitrixBase.admx and receiver.admx files. Also copy the en-US folder. In Workspace app, the files are still named receiver.admx.
  3. Go to your domain’s SYSVOL share and in the Policies folder look for a PolicyDefinitions folder. If one exists, paste the .admx file directly into the PolicyDefinitions folder. If this folder doesn’t exist in SYSVOL, instead copy the .admx file to C:\Windows\PolicyDefinitions. Overwrite any existing Receiver ADMX files.
  4. The GPO settings can then be found at one of the following:
    • Computer Configuration > Policies > Administrative Templates > Citrix Components > Citrix Workspace
    • Computer Configuration > Policies > Administrative Templates > Citrix Components > Citrix Receiver
  5. For example, you can disable Customer Experience Improvement Program (CEIP) from here.
  6. See https://www.carlstalhood.com/delivery-controller-cr-and-licensing/#ceip for additional places where CEIP is enabled.
  7. Workspace app 1905 and newer has a setting to Disable sending data to 3rd party (e.g., Google Analytics).
  8. Workspace app 1905 and newer let you disable embedded browser caching.
  9. Workspace app 1905 and newer have NetScaler LAN Proxy under Network routing > Proxy.
  10. Workspace app 1808 and newer have User authentication | Single Sign-on for NetScaler Gateway.
  11. Citrix Workspace Updates, (aka AutoUpdate) can be configured using group policy. See Configuring Citrix Workspace Updates at Citrix Docs.
  12. Workspace app 1912 and newer can be configured to require in-memory ICA files only. The setting called Secure ICA file session launch is under the Client Engine node. See Citrix Docs for details on in-memory ICA files instead of writing ICA files to disk.
  13. The DPI node has a setting called High DPI that lets you disable DPI matching, which is enabled by default in Workspace App 2206 and newer.

    • Workspace app 2210 and newer let you use the GUI to re-enable High DPI.
    • Native resolution means DPI matching, whereas Yes means force high DPI.
  14. Workspace app has settings to hide Advanced Preferences, enable/disable showing the DPI option, and enable/disable H265.
  15. Workspace app 4.8 and newer have SplitDevices GPO setting under Citrix Workspace | Remoting client devices | Generic USB Remoting. See Configuring composite USB device redirection at Citrix Docs.
  16. Workspace app 2212 and newer by default disable App Protection for the authentication screen and icons list. To enable them, configure User authentication | Manage App Protection and SelfService | Manage App Protection.

  17. Workspace app 2303 and newer have Anti-DLL Injection for App Protection. It is disabled by default. Enable it in a GPO at Citrix Components | Citrix Workspace | App Protection | Anti-DLL Injection. See Citrix Docs for details.
    App running

Pass-through Authentication

Citrix blog post – A Comprehensive Guide to Enabling Pass-Through Authentication with XenDesktop 7.5

  1. Run the command
    Set-BrokerSite -TrustRequestsSentToTheXmlServicePort $True from a Windows PowerShell command prompt on a Delivery Controller.

  2. Login to the PC as an administrator.
  3. If installing Workspace app, as an administrator, during installation, on the Enable Single Sign-on page, check the box next to Enable Single Sign-on. Then finish the installation.

  4. To verify that SSON is installed, go to C:\Program Files (x86)\Citrix\ICA Client and look for the file ssonsvr.exe.
  5. And if you open regedit and go to HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\NetworkProvider\Order, you should see PnSson in the ProviderOrder.
  6. Install the receiver.admx (and .adml) template into PolicyDefinitions if you haven’t already.
  7. Edit a GPO that is applied to the client PCs where the Workspace app is installed.
  8. Go to Computer Configuration > Policies > Administrative Templates > Citrix Components > Citrix Workspace.
  9. Expand Citrix Workspace and click User authentication.
  10. On the right, double-click Local user name and password.
  11. Select Enabled and then check the box next to Allow pass-through authentication for all ICA connections. Click OK.
  12. In Workspace app 1808 and newer, you can enable Single Sign-on for NetScaler Gateway.
  13. Ensure that the internal StoreFront FQDN is in the Local Intranet zone in Internet Explorer. You can use a GPO to configure this on the client side.
  14. Local Intranet zone should have Automatic logon only in Intranet zone enabled.
  15. For Windows 11 and newer, make sure the GPO setting Enable MPR notifications for the System is not enabled at Computer Configuration | Policies | Administrative Templates | Windows Components | Windows Logon Options. Make sure HKLM\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Policies\System\EnableMPRNotifications is not set to 0 on the Workspace app machine.
  16. Logoff Windows and log back on. In Task Manager you should now see ssonsvr.exe. This won’t appear unless you logoff and log back on.
  17. If Workspace app won’t connect or is slow to enumerate icons, then you might have to disable Automatically detect settings in IE.
  18. Right-click the Workspace app icon and click Advanced Preferences.
  19. Click Configuration Checker.
  20. Check the box next to SSONChecker and click Run.
  21. The lines with red x will indicate the issue and corrective action.

StoreFront Accounts

You can use a client-side GPO to add a store (Account) to Workspace app Self-Service.

  1. Install the receiver.admx (and .adml) template into PolicyDefinitions if you haven’t already.
  2. Edit a GPO that applies to endpoint devices that have Citrix Workspace app installed.
  3. Go to Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates > Policies > Citrix Components > Citrix Workspace > StoreFront.
  4. On the right, double-click NetScaler Gateway URL/StoreFront Accounts List.
  5. Select Enabled, and then click Show.
  6. Enter a store path based on the example shown in the Help box. Workspace app lets you enter a Gateway path. Then click OK.
  7. Note: Gateway paths work in GPO, but might not work when specified in the CitrixWorkspaceApp.exe installation command line.

Published Shortcuts and Reconnect

Citrix CTX200924 How to Customize App Shortcuts with Receiver for Windows

Workspace app has a user interface for setting Shortcut Paths. Right-click the Workspace app systray icon, click Advanced Preferences, and then click Shortcuts and Reconnect, or Settings Option.


From Citrix Docs Configuring application delivery: There are several methods of controlling how Workspace app displays shortcuts on the Start Menu and Desktop as detailed below:

  • Workspace app Registry values
  • receiver.admx GPO Template
  • From StoreFront in C:\inetpub\wwwroot\Citrix\Roaming\web.config
  • Published App Keywords (e.g. prefer).
  • Workspace app and Receiver 4.2.100 and newer supports published app Delivery configuration for adding the shortcut to the desktop. This only works if the app is a Favorite, or if Favorites are disabled, or Mandatory Store.

Under HKLM\Software\Wow6432Node\Citrix\Dazzle (or HKCU\Software\Wow6432Node\Citrix\Dazzle) are several registry values related to shortcuts. Some of the settings only apply if SelfServiceMode is set to False. Here are some common options:

  • SelfServiceMode – set to False so Receiver disables the Self-Service interface and automatically places all published shortcuts on the Start Menu and/or Desktop. More details in Configuring application delivery at Citrix Docs.
  • PutShortcutsOnDesktop – set to True to place every app on the desktop
  • DesktopDir – Workspace app places every shortcut on the desktop so it’s probably best to place them in a folder.
  • StartMenuDir – If there is potentially a conflict between local apps and remote apps, then you should place the Start Menu shortcuts in a folder.
  • PreferTemplateDirectory (with KEYWORDS:prefer=shortcutname) – copies the shortcutname from the template directory to the Start Menu and/or Desktop.

If you import the receiver.admx (and .adml) into the PolicyDefinitions folder, under Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates > Citrix Components > Citrix Workspace (or Receiver) is a node called SelfService.

Disable the Manage SelfServiceMode setting to hide the Workspace app Window.

Enable the Manage App shortcut setting to control placement of shortcuts.

Workspace app and Receiver 4.2.100 and newer have the ability to configure (or disable) Workspace Control using group policy. Enable the setting Control when Citrix Workspace attempts to reconnect to existing sessions and configure it as desired.

Prelaunch

Staring with Receiver 4.2, prelaunch is automatically enabled if Workspace app is installed with SSON enabled. Otherwise, set registry values to enable prelaunch. Receiver 4.2.100 prevents the prelaunch icon from appearing on the Start Menu.

  • HKLM\Software\[Wow6432Node\]Citrix\Dazzle
    • EnablePreLaunch (REG_SZ) = true or false

Additional customizations can be configured at:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\ICA Client\Prelaunch

  • Name: State
    • REG_SZ: 0 = disable, 1 = just-in-time pre-launch, 2 = scheduled pre-launch
  • Name: Schedule
    • REG_SZ: HH:MM|M:T:W:TH:F:S:SU where HH and MM are hours and minutes. M:T:W:TH:F:S:SU are the days of the week. For example, to enable scheduled pre-launch on Monday, Wednesday, and Friday at 1:45 p.m., set Schedule as Schedule=13:45|1:0:1:0:1:0:0 . The session actually launches between 1:15 p.m. and 1:45 p.m.
  • Name: UserOverride
    • REG_SZ: 0  = HKLM overrides HKCU, 1 = HKCU overrides HKLM

Device Access Behavior (Client Selective Trust)

When connecting to a XenApp/XenDesktop session, you might see the following:

To configure the default behavior, see the Citrix Knowledgebase article How to Configure Default Device Access Behavior of Receiver, XenDesktop and XenApp. Note: there is a bug fixed in Receiver 4.2.100 and newer.

  1. Download the ADMX file from http://support.citrix.com/article/CTX133565.
  2. Copy the .admx and .adml files to PolicyDefinitions (Sysvol, or C:\Windows).
  3. The .adml file goes in the en-US folder.
  4. Edit a GPO that applies to the endpoint devices that are running Receiver.
  5. Go to Computer Configuration | Policies | Administrative Templates | Citrix Components | Citrix Workspace (or Receiver) |  Citrix Client Selective Trust (x64).
  6. Enable the setting Create Client Selective Trust Keys.

  7. Then expand the regions, and configure the permission settings as desired.

Desktop Lock

As an alternative to Workspace app Desktop Lock, see Transformer in Citrix Workspace Environment Manager.

External links:

Use Studio to configure Workspace app Accounts in Published Desktop

In published desktops, Workspace app can be used for placement of shortcuts on the user’s Start Menu and Desktop. Use group policy to hide the common program groups and then use Workspace app to place published applications back on the Start Menu and Desktop based on user’s group membership and subscription preference.

  1. In Citrix Studio, on the left, expand the Configuration node, right-click StoreFront and click Add StoreFront.
  2. Enter a descriptive name for the StoreFront server.
  3. Enter the internal https URL of the load balanced StoreFront servers. Add the path to your store (e.g. /Citrix/Store) and then /discovery on the end of the URL. The full URL would be similar to https://citrix.corp.com/Citrix/Store/discovery. Click OK.
  4. Edit a Delivery Group that has a published desktop and Citrix Workspace app installed.
  5. On the StoreFront page, change the selection to Automatically, using the StoreFront servers selected below, and then check the box next to the StoreFront URL. Click OK. Now when users launch the published desktop, Workspace app will be automatically configured with this URL.

Published Desktop – use Workspace app to control Shortcuts

If you install Workspace app inside a published desktop (Workspace app on a VDA), then Workspace app can get icons from StoreFront and put those icons on the user’s published desktop Start Menu and Desktop. This is an alternative to using a User Experience Management product to control shortcut placement.

Note: Workspace app tends to be slow to create Start Menu shortcuts, so make sure you perform a Proof of Concept to determine how this functionality impacts logon times.

Configuration of Workspace app inside a published desktop is simplified if you have the following minimum versions:

  • Workspace app installed inside the VDA
  • VDA 7.17 or newer
  • StoreFront 3.14 or newer

If you meet these minimum version requirements, then Workspace app installed in the VDA automatically tries to launch published applications on the same local VDA rather than trying to launch them from a different VDA (aka double-hop). This feature is called vPrefer.

Do the following for all versions of Workspace app, VDA, and StoreFront, whether using the Prefer keyword or not:

  1. Make sure Workspace app or Receiver version 4.11 or newer is installed on the VDA.
  2. Install the Workspace app ADMX files if you haven’t already. For vPrefer, make sure they are the ADMX files from Workspace app.
  3. Enable the Group Policy setting Remove common program groups from Start Menu and apply it to non-administrators.
    • This removes all Public (aka All Users) Start Menu shortcuts. Workspace app will re-add the shortcuts based on user group membership.
  4. On the VDA, configure the following Workspace app Registry keys (or corresponding settings in the receiver.admx GPO template):
    • HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\Dazzle\WSCReconnectMode=”0″ so Workspace app doesn’t try to reconnect to the published desktop you’re already running.
    • HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\Dazzle\SelfServiceMode to False. This turns off the Workspace app Self-Service GUI and acts like all icons are subscribed. Otherwise, only subscribed (favorited) icons would be placed on the Start Menu and Desktop.
    • HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\Dazzle\UseCategoryAsStartMenuPath = True. This creates a Start Menu folder based on the published app’s configured Category.
  5. Configure each desired published app to Add shortcut to user’s desktop.

    • Or, configure HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\Dazzle\PutShortcutsOnDesktop = True to place all icons on the desktop.
  6. To control icon placement, configure the following registry values:
    • HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\Dazzle\StartMenuDir to place published applications in a sub-folder. Note: Windows Server 2012 and Windows 10 and newer only supports a single level of Start Menu folders, so setting this effectively turns off published app categories.
    • HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\Dazzle\DesktopDir to place published applications in a sub-folder on the desktop.
  7. Pass-through authentication:
    1. In a GPO that applies to the VDA, import the receiver.admx file, and set Local user name and password to Enabled. Check the box next to Allow pass-through authentication for all ICA connections.
    2. If you’re using Gateway internally, and if Workspace app 1808 or newer, then also enable Single Sign-on for NetScaler Gateway.
    3. In a user-level GPO that applies to the VDA, add the StoreFront FQDN to the Local Intranet zone. Make sure it is not in the Trusted Sites zone, or enable Automatic logon with current user name and password for the Trusted Sites zone.
    4. Make sure ssonsvr.exe is running after you login to the VDA. If not, troubleshoot it.
  8. When configuring Citrix Profile Management, make sure !ctx_startmenu! is not excluded from roaming.
  9. In Citrix Studio, configure a Delivery Group with delivery type = Desktop and Applications. Assign users to the delivery group, and the individual published applications (if visibility is limited).
    1. In Citrix Studio, edit each published application, and on the Delivery tab, specify a category. This will become the Start Menu folder name.
    2. If Workspace app Self Service Mode (GUI) is enabled, in Studio, edit each application, and add KEYWORDS:Auto and/or KEYWORDS:Mandatory to the published application description. This forces the applications to be subscribed/favorited. Only subscribed (or Favorite) apps are displayed in the Start Menu and Desktop. Unless you disable Workspace app’s SelfService interface as described earlier.
    3. Another option is to go to the StoreFront Console, click Stores on the left, and on the right, click Configure Store Settings, and click Disable User Subscriptions. This causes all apps to appear on the Start Menu and/or Desktop depending on Workspace app configuration.
  10. Create a group policy that applies to VDAs, and configure the group policy to define the Store URL for Workspace app similar to https://citrix.corp.com/Citrix/Store/discovery. Replace the FQDN with your load balanced StoreFront FQDN. Also replace the path to the store with your store path. Make sure there is /discovery on the end. By default, Workspace app and Receiver only support https.
    1. Your StoreFront store probably delivers both application and desktop icons. If you want to filter out the desktop icons, then create a new StoreFront store, and configure the Workspace app on the VDA to connect to the new Store.
    2. In StoreFront Console, click the store for VDAs, and click Configure Store Settings. On the Advanced Settings page, in the Filter resources by type row, choose Citrix.MPS.Desktop.
  11. For vPrefer in Workspace app, VDA 7.17 (or newer), and StoreFront 3.14 (or newer), edit a GPO that applies to the VDAs.
    1. Go to Computer Configuration | Policies | Administrative Templates | Citrix Components | Citrix Workspace (or Receiver) | SelfService.
    2. Edit the setting vPrefer. This setting is only in Workspace app ADMX templates from Workspace app.
    3. Set it to Allow all apps. Source = 7.17 vPrefer – not working with 32Bit Apps at Citrix Discussions.
  12. On your Delivery Controller, in PowerShell, run set-brokersite -TrustRequestsSentToTheXmlServicePort $true
    • This is required for Pass-through Authentication from Workspace app.
  13. Configure your client devices to connect to the published desktop.
    1. When users connect to the published desktop, Workspace app will auto-launch and hopefully auto-login.
    2. If Workspace app Self-Service Mode is disabled, all published applications should automatically appear in the Start Menu and Desktop.
    3. If Workspace app Self-Service Mode is enabled, then only applications with KEYWORDS:Auto and/or KEYWORDS:Mandatory in the published application description will be displayed. Users can open the systray icon to subscribe to more applications.
    4. Users can copy icons from the Start Menu to the desktop. Make sure the user Copies the icon and doesn’t Move it.
    5. Users can then launch applications directly from the Start Menu, from the Desktop, or from the Workspace app (if the Self-Service interface is enabled).
    6. If Workspace app 4.11 (or newer), VDA 7.17 (or newer), and StoreFront 3.14 (or newer), then vPrefer is enabled by default. When launching an app icon that came from Workspace app, Workspace app checks the local VDA machine to see if the application can be launched on the local VDA instead of by creating a new Citrix double-hop session.
    7. If the application is installed locally on the VDA then the local application shortcut should launch quickly. If the application is on a different delivery group then a second (double-hop) Citrix HDX/ICA connection will be established.
    8. If the user deletes Workspace app shortcuts from the Start Menu, you can get them back by going to the systray icon and refreshing the applications. Or sometimes you have to reset Workspace app.

If you are running components older than Receiver 4.11, VDA 7.17, and StoreFront 3.14, then you’ll need to configure the prefer keyword to get Receiver delivered icons to launch on the local VDA instead of in a new double-hop Citrix connection.

  1. Enable the Group Policy setting Remove common program groups from Start Menu and apply it to non-administrators.
    1. For applications that are installed on the same VDA that is publishing the desktop, configure Group Policy Preferences to recreate the application shortcuts based on Active Directory group membership. Applications on other delivery groups are handled by Receiver.
    2. Or use the prefer keyword to copy shortcuts from the PreferTemplateDirectory.
  2. On the VDA, configure the following Receiver Registry keys (or corresponding settings in the receiver.admx GPO template):
    • HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\Dazzle\PreferTemplateDirectory = a UNC path or local path containing shortcuts to be copied by the prefer keyword. This can point to C:\ProgramData\Microsoft\Windows\Start Menu.
  3. In Citrix Studio, configure a Delivery Group with delivery type = Desktop and Applications. Assign users to the Delivery Group and the applications (if visibility is limited).
    1. In Studio, edit each application and change KEYWORDS:Prefer to KEYWORDS:prefer. Notice the lower case p. It doesn’t work with uppercase P.
      • With the prefer keyword, if you publish an application that is also created using Group Policy Preferences, the Group Policy Preferences icon will take precedence. This is good. Otherwise the Receiver published application icon would result in a new Citrix double-hop session.
      • See Ralph Jansen Citrix Receiver 4.1 Prefer keyword examples
    2. If using the prefer keyword with the PreferTemplateDirectory, enter it as KEYWORDS:prefer=shortcutname where shortcutname is the name of the shortcut that is copied from the Template directory.
  4. Configure your client devices to connect to the published desktop.
    1. When users connect to the published desktop, Group Policy Preferences will create shortcuts to local applications.
    2. Receiver will auto-launch and hopefully auto-login.
    3. If Receiver Self-Service Mode is disabled, all published applications should automatically appear in the Start Menu and Desktop.
    4. If Receiver Self-Service Mode is enabled then only applications with KEYWORDS:Auto and/or KEYWORDS:Mandatory in the published application description will be displayed. Users can open the systray icon to subscribe to more applications.
    5. For published applications with KEYWORDS:prefer=shortcutname, Receiver should copy icons from the template directory to the Start Menu and/or Desktop. See below for considerations.
    6. Users can copy icons from the Start Menu to the desktop. Make sure the user Copies the icon and doesn’t Move it.
    7. Users can then launch applications directly from the Start Menu, from the Desktop, or from the Receiver (if Self-Service interface is enabled).
    8. If a local shortcut (e.g. Group Policy Preferences shortcut, or copied from template directory) matches a published application with KEYWORDS:prefer then the local shortcut will override the published application icon.
    9. If the application is installed locally on the VDA then the local application shortcut should launch quickly. If the application is on a different delivery group then a second (double-hop) Citrix HDX/ICA connection will be established.
    10. If the user deletes Receiver shortcuts from the Start Menu, you can get them back by going to the systray icon and refreshing the applications. Or sometimes you have to reset Receiver.

Notes regarding Prefer Template Directory

  • Prefer Template Directory can point to C:\ProgramData\Microsoft\Windows\Start Menu, which is the All Users Start Menu.
  • The shortcuts copied from the Prefer Template Directory are renamed to match the published app name.
  • For prefer local apps, any command line parameters specified in the published app are ignored. If you need these command line parameters, add them to the shortcut in the Prefer Template Directory.
  • If you have multiple published apps pointing to the same prefer local shortcut, then only one copy will be made, and it will have the name of only one of the published apps. To workaround this, in the Prefer Template Directory, create separate shortcuts for each published app, and adjust the published app prefer keyword accordingly.
  • Jan Hendrik Meier Automatic Shortcut generation for local installed applications in a Citrix XenDesktop / XenApp 7.x environment has a script that can create shortcuts based on the published apps with prefer keyword. These shortcuts can then be copied to your Prefer Template Directory.

How to Script/Automate Workspace app and Receiver Self-Service

From Citrix Knowledgebase article Driving the Citrix Receiver Self-Service Plug-in Programmatically: by default, Workspace app Self-Service (SSP) activities are driven by user interaction. However, SSP exposes sufficient information for its activities to be scripted.

When SSP builds a shortcut, it builds it to a small stub application in a file %appdata%\Citrix\SelfService\app-name-with-spaces-removed.exe for each resource. These files allow SSP to create a fake ‘install’ record for Add/Remove Software. Running these .exe files causes the application to launch. Note: Workspace app and Receiver 4.3.100 and newer don’t create stubs by default. To enable, set HKLM\Software\Wow6432Node\Citrix\Dazzle\AlwaysUseStubs (REG_SZ) = true.

If you want to drive SSP directly for launch instead of through an .exe stub, look at the keys under HKCU\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Uninstall. There will be keys in there named farm-name@@server-farm-name.app-friendly-name. In these keys you’ll find a LaunchString value that shows the relevant parameters. These parameters are user-independent and can therefore be cloned from a reference user to a general case. You can copy and reuse these parameters without interpretation.

Running the command selfservice.exe –init –ipoll –exit starts SSP, performs a refresh (interactive poll) from the current provider, and forces a clean exit.

Additional command line parameters are detailed at Driving the Citrix Receiver Self-Service Plug-in Programmatically.

 

Citrix Workspace app come with a .dll file that implements the Citrix Common Connection Manager SDK. You can use the CCM SDK to do the following:

  • Launch Sessions
  • Disconnect Sessions
  • Logoff Sessions
  • Get Session Information

Citrix was kind enough to develop a PowerShell module that calls functions from the .dll. Get the CCMPowershellModule from Github. The PowerShell module contains functions like the following:

  • CCMTerminateApplication
  • CCMLaunchApplication
  • CCMGetActiveSessionCount
  • CCMDisconnectAllSessions

Launcher Scripts

Ryan C Butler Storefront ICA file creator at Github. See Create an ICA File from Storefront using PowerShell or JavaScript for more info.

Stan Czerno – Powershell Script to launch one or more Published Applications from Citrix Storefront 2.x through 3.11: the script launches a browser, connects to StoreFront (or NetScaler Gateway), logs in, and launches an icon. This is a very well-written script that uses a .dll file from Citrix Workspace app to display session information.

Citrix Solutions Lab StoreFront Launcher Script at Github. It attempts to closely resemble what an actual user would do by:

  1. Opening Internet Explorer.
  2. Navigating directly to the Receiver for Web site or NetScaler Gateway portal.
  3. Completing the fields.
  4. Logging in.
  5. Clicking on the resource.
  6. Logging off the StoreFront site.

David Ott StoreFront App/Desktop Launch Testing Script uses Internet Explorer to login to StoreFront and launch a resource. Sends email with the result. Uses wficalib.dll to get session information.

Microsoft Teams

Citrix and Microsoft jointly support the delivery of Microsoft Teams from Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops using optimization for Microsoft Teams. The Teams optimization components are built into VDA and Workspace app. There is no need to install anything separately. The feature is based on Browser Content Redirection so don’t exclude that feature when installing the VDA.

Microsoft Teams optimization/offloading requires the following:

  • Newest version of Microsoft Teams machine-wide installation (ALLUSER=1)
  • Newest version of Citrix VDA
  • Newest version of Citrix Workspace app.

Feature matrix and version support at Citrix Docs shows the required versions of Teams, Citrix VDA, and Citrix Workspace app for various Teams features.

See Citrix Docs Optimization for Microsoft Teams.

Skype for Business

Citrix has a HDX RealTime Optimization Pack for Workspace app that enables offloading of Skype for Business media protocols to the client device. Here are the available versions:

The HDX RealTime Optimization Pack comes in two pieces: the Connector (on the VDA), and the Media Engine (on the Workspace app machine). Usually both pieces must be the same version, but versions 2.3 and higher now allow version mixing.

24-page Citrix PDF Delivering Microsoft Skype for Business to XenApp and XenDesktop Users.

For Skype for Business Location Based Routing, you’ll need the following: (Source = Citrix Derek Thorslund at Location based routing at Citrix Discussions)

  • Microsoft added support for Location Based Routing (LBR) with the virtualized Skype for Business 2016 client (and HDX RTOP 2.1 and above) in the Click-to-Run (C2R) download quite a long time ago, but it hasn’t yet been introduced in the MSI package.
  • It requires setting IsLBRInVDIEnabled on the Skype for Business Server to True: 
    $x = New-CsClientPolicyEntry -Name "IsLBRInVDIEnabled" -Value "true"
Set-CsClientPolicy -Identity "<ClientPolicyName>” -PolicyEntry @{Add=$x}

When offloading voice and video to Workspace app machines, don’t forget to configure QoS on the client machines. See Citrix Blog Post Implementing the Citrix HDX RealTime Optimization Pack: Don’t Forget About QoS/DSCP.

Citrix CTX222459 RealTime Optimization Pack Capability Checker: It will list out endpoint hardware/software information which will be used to process audio and video. The tool is independent of RealTime Optimization Pack version and runs any Windows machine.

Citrix CTX214237 LOPper – Lync Optimization Pack Log Parser: parses log files generated by Citrix HDX RealTime Optimization Pack (HROP) when an audio/video call is made using Lync 2013/Skype for Business (SfB) and shows relevant information in a UI.

Troubleshooting – Citrix QuickLaunch

Citrix CTX219718 QuickLaunch Tool (Testing Application and Desktop Launch) lets you launch Citrix sessions directly from a Controller without needing StoreFront.

You enter a Controller address, credentials, and then it shows you the published resources. You can pick a resource, edit properties on the other tabs, and then Connect. This allows you to easily try different connection properties.

If you run into problems launching a session, use Sysinternals DebugView while running CQL in Debug mode (/debug switch).

Troubleshooting – Workspace app Logging

In Workspace app 2309 and newer, if you right-click the Workspace app icon in the system tray, there’s a Troubleshooting menu with a Collect Logs option.

You can also access Log Collection from Advanced Preferences.

There are a couple methods of logging Workspace app for Windows operations. One method is CTX141751 Citrix Receiver Diagnostics Tool – For Windows, which creates a CDF trace that can be parsed by CDFControl.

Another method is CTX132883 How to Enable Logging on Receiver for Windows Using Registry Entries. The logfiles in %USERPROFILE%\Appdata\Local\Citrix\ are human readable. And CTX206102 Enable SSON Logging Using Registry Key.

Instead of creating the registry keys manually, you can use the following .reg file provided by Wolfgang Thürr:

Windows Registry Editor Version 5.00

;only for x64 windows os
;import with admin rights
;restart your computer to activate the logging and tracing settings
;create C:\TEMP for the launch ICA log and SSON logn (no environment variables can be used)

;general Workspace app and Receiver logging
;************************
;logpath: %USERPROFILE%\Appdata\Local\Citrix\Receiver
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix]
"ReceiverVerboseTracingEnabled"=dword:00000001

;Authentication Manager logging
;******************************
;logpath: %USERPROFILE%\Appdata\Local\Citrix\AuthManager
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\AuthManager]
"LoggingMode"="verbose"
"TracingEnabled"="True"
"SDKTracingEnabled"="True"

;Self Service logging
;********************
;logpath: %USERPROFILE%\Appdata\Local\Citrix\SelfService
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\Dazzle]
"Tracing"="True"
"AuxTracing"="True"
"DefaultTracingConfiguration"="global all –detail"

;save launch ICA
;***************
;logpath: C:\TEMP\ica.log (no environemnt variables allowed)
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\ICA Client\Engine\Configuration\Advanced\Modules\Logging]
"LogConfigurationAccess"="true"
"LogConnectionAuthorisation"="true"
"LogEvidence"="true"
"LogICAFile"="true"
"LogFile"="C:\\TEMP\\ica.log"
"LogStartup"="true"

;Receiver Always On Tracing
;**************************
;generates ETL Files for analyzing with CDFControl see CTX111961 for details
;can be configured or overruled by GPOs (icaclient.admx)
;path %USERPROFILE%\AppData\Local\Temp\CTXReceiverLogs
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Citrix\ICA Client\AoLog]
"EnableTracing"=dword:00000001

;Single Sign-on Logging
;**************************
;https://support.citrix.com/article/CTX206102
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Citrix\Install\SSON]
"DebugEnabled"="true"
"LogPath"="C:\\Temp"

Troubleshooting – Duplicate Stores

Stores are sometimes duplicated in Workspace app, especially if you are running Workspace app inside a VDA. (h/t Dan High)

StoreFront URLs can be defined in several places:

  1. In Studio, go to Configuration > StoreFront and delete all URLs configured here.
  2. Look in GPOs for Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates > Policies > Citrix Components > Citrix Workspace > StoreFront > NetScaler Gateway URL/StoreFront Accounts List. Remove any URLs configured here.
  3. In the client-side registry, at HKLM\Software\Wow6432Node\Citrix\Dazzle\Sites, you might see store addresses that were specified during a command line installation of Workspace app.
  4. When Citrix Workspace app switches between StoreFront servers in multiple datacenters, it’s possible for each datacenter to be treated as a separate Workspace app site. This can be prevented by doing the following. From Juan Zevallos at Citrix Discussions:
    1. Match the Base URL in all datacenters.
    2. Match the SRID in all datacenters – The SRID can be safely edited in the C:\inetpub\wwwroot\Citrix\Roaming\web.config. Make sure to propagate changes to other servers in the group.
    3. Match the Delivery Controller names under “Manage Delivery Controllers” – The XML brokers can be different, but the actual name of the Delivery Controller/Farm must be identical.

If you are running Workspace app on a VDA, once you’ve removed the configured URLs shown above, do the following to clean up the VDAs:

  1. On the VDA, HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Citrix – Delete the number folders representing policy entries.
  2. On session host VDAs, HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\Terminal Server\Install\Software\Citrix – Remove the entries for storefront in the following folders.
    1. Under \receiver\ctxaccount delete all entries.
    2. Under \SR\Store delete the entries.
  3. On the VDA, C:\ProgramData\CitrixCseCache – Delete all files
  4. On the VDA, C:\ProgramData\Citrix\GroupPolicy – Delete all folders and files.
  5. Run gpupdate and logoff.
  6. In the user’s registry, HKEY_CURRENT_USER or the profile registry hive. Possible profile reset.
    1. Under Software\Citrix\Dazzle\Sites – Delete all entries.
    2. Under Software\Citrix\Receiver\ctxaccount – delete all entries.
    3. Under Software\Citrix\SR\Store – delete the entries.
  7. Verify no cached profile folders for user on server.